V128FBII Vista 128fb V1 Installation Manual

Vista-128FB v1 Installation Manual Vista-128FB v1 Installation Manual AlarmHow.net Library

User Manual: vista-128fb-v1-installation-manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 268 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

N8988 5/98

VISTA-128FB

Commercial Fire & Burglary

Partitioned Security System

with Scheduling

Installation and Setup Guide

Features Q.E.D. programming

for quick enrollment of devices.

iii

Recommendations for Proper Protection

The Following Recommendations For The Location Of Fire And Burglary Detection Devices Help Provide

Proper Coverage For The Protected Premises.

Recommendations For Smoke And Heat Detectors

With regard to the number and placement of smoke/heat detectors, we subscribe to the recommendations

contained in the National Fire Protection Association's (NFPA) Standard #72 noted below.

Early warning fire detection is best achieved by the installation of fire detection equipment in all

rooms and areas of the household as follows: For minimum protection a smoke detector should be

installed outside of each separate sleeping area, and on each additional floor of a multi-floor

family living unit, including basements. The installation of smoke detectors in kitchens, attics

(finished or unfinished), or in garages is not normally recommended.

For additional protection the NFPA recommends that you install heat or smoke detectors in the

living room, dining room, bedroom(s), kitchen, hallway(s), attic, furnace room, utility and storage

rooms, basements and attached garages.

In addition, we recommend the following:

• Install a smoke detector inside every bedroom where a smoker sleeps.

• Install a smoke detector inside every bedroom where someone sleeps with the door partly or

completely closed. Smoke could be blocked by the closed door. Also, an alarm in the hallway

outside may not wake up the sleeper if the door is closed.

• Install a smoke detector inside bedrooms where electrical appliances (such as portable heaters,

air conditioners or humidifiers) are used.

• Install a smoke detector at both ends of a hallway if the hallway is more than 40 feet (12

meters) long.

• Install smoke detectors in any room where an alarm control is located, or in any room where alarm

control connections to an AC source or phone lines are made. If detectors are not so located, a fire

within the room could prevent the control from reporting a fire or an intrusion.

Recommendations For Proper Intrusion Protection

For proper intrusion coverage, sensors should be located at every possible point of entry to a home or

commercial premises. This would include any skylights that may be present, and the upper windows in a

multi-level building.

In addition, we recommend that radio backup be used in a security system so that alarm signals can still

be sent to the alarm monitoring station in the event that the telephone lines are out of order (alarm

signals are normally sent over the phone lines, if connected to an alarm monitoring station).

ULThis control complies with NFPA

requirements for temporal pulse

sounding of fire notification devices.

DINING

KITCHEN

BEDROOM

LIVING ROOM

✪

✪✪

✪

▲

BEDROOM

BDRM

DINING

LIVING ROOM

TV ROOM KITCHEN

■■

■

✪

✪✪

✪

▲

✪

BEDROOM BEDROOM

■

LVNG RM

BASEMENT

KTCHN

▲

CLOSED

DOOR

GARAGE

▲

Smoke Detectors for Minimum Protection

Smoke Detectors for Additional Protectio

Heat-Activated Detectors

Table of Contents

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR PROPER PROTECTION...............................................iii

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL.........................................................................................xi

CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL................................................................. xii

SECTION 1 General Description .............................................................1-1

General............................................................................................................................................................1-1

Features...........................................................................................................................................................1-1

SECTION 2 Planning a Partitioned System ..........................................2-1

Theory of Partitioning ....................................................................................................................................2-1

Setting Up a Partitioned System ...................................................................................................................2-2

Common Lobby Logic .....................................................................................................................................2-2

Master Keypad Setup and Operation ............................................................................................................2-5

SECTION 3 False Alarm Reduction Features........................................3-1

General Information.......................................................................................................................................3-1

Exit Error Logic and Related Reports ...........................................................................................................3-1

Recent Close Report ........................................................................................................................................3-2

Exit Delay Reset..............................................................................................................................................3-2

Cross Zoning ...................................................................................................................................................3-2

Call Waiting Defeat Logic ..............................................................................................................................3-3

SECTION 4 Installing the Control ..........................................................4-1

Mounting the Control Cabinet .......................................................................................................................4-1

Installing the Cabinet Lock............................................................................................................................4-1

Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing............................................................................................................4-2

Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing..................................................................................................4-3

Installing the Control's Circuit Board...........................................................................................................4-3

Connecting the AC Transformer and Battery................................................................................................4-4

Panel Earth Ground Connections..................................................................................................................4-4

SECTION 5 Installing the Keypads.........................................................5-1

Keypads That May Be Used ...........................................................................................................................5-1

Wiring to the Keypads ....................................................................................................................................5-1

Using a Supplementary Power Supply to Power Additional Keypads ........................................................5-2

Mounting the Keypads....................................................................................................................................5-3

Addressing the Keypads/Preliminary Checkout Procedure.........................................................................5-3

SECTION 6 Basic Hardwired Zones 001-008..........................................6-1

Common Characteristics of Hardwired Zones 1-8........................................................................................6-1

Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1-8 .........................................................................................6-1

Wiring 2-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1 and 2 .........................................................................................6-2

Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors..............................................................................................................6-3

Wiring 4-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1-8.................................................................................................6-3

Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors..............................................................................................................6-4

Fire Alarm Verification Smoke Detectors......................................................................................................6-4

Zone 6 Tamper Configuration........................................................................................................................6-4

Wiring 2-Wire Latching Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 8..............................................................................6-5

Compatible 2-Wire Glassbreak Detectors ......................................................................................................6-5

Checkout Procedure for Hardwired Zones.....................................................................................................6-6

Table of Contents

SECTION 7 2-Wire Polling Loop Expansion (Zones 009 - 128).............7-1

Polling Loop Overview....................................................................................................................................7-1

Common Characteristics of Polling Loop Zones ...........................................................................................7-1

Wiring/Addressing RPM Devices..................................................................................................................7-2

Polling Loop Supervision ...............................................................................................................................7-5

Checkout Procedure for Polling Loop Zones..................................................................................................7-5

Compatible Polling Loop Devices...................................................................................................................7-6

SECTION 8 Wireless Zone Expansion .....................................................8-1

Common Characteristics of Wireless Zones...................................................................................................8-1

Wireless Systems Available............................................................................................................................8-1

RF System Operation and Supervision .........................................................................................................8-2

RF System Installation Advisories ................................................................................................................8-3

Installation and Setup of the 4281/5881 RF Receiver .................................................................................8-3

Installing the 5800TM Module ......................................................................................................................8-4

House ID Sniffer Mode ...................................................................................................................................8-4

5700 Series Transmitter Setup.......................................................................................................................8-5

5800 Series Transmitter Setup.......................................................................................................................8-8

Checkout Procedure for Wireless Zones.......................................................................................................8-11

SECTION 9 Relay Outputs........................................................................9-1

Relay Basics....................................................................................................................................................9-1

Wiring the 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules................................................................................................9-1

SECTION 10 4285/4286 VIP Module.........................................................10-1

General Information.....................................................................................................................................10-1

Mounting the VIP Module............................................................................................................................10-2

Wiring the VIP Module.................................................................................................................................10-2

SECTION 11 Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) Unit..............................11-1

General Information.....................................................................................................................................11-1

AAV Module Operation.................................................................................................................................11-1

Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections ..........................................................................................11-2

Programming Audio Alarm Verification Module Options .........................................................................11-2

SECTION 12 J2 Trigger Outputs .............................................................12-1

General Information.....................................................................................................................................12-1

Remote Keypad Sounder Operation and Wiring.........................................................................................12-1

Remote Keyswitch Operation and Wiring ...................................................................................................12-3

5140LED Indicator Module..........................................................................................................................12-4

Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment.......................................................................................................12-6

Event Log Printer Connections ....................................................................................................................12-9

Direct Wire Downloading...........................................................................................................................12-10

SECTION 13 7820 Long Range Radio......................................................13-1

General Information.....................................................................................................................................13-1

Wiring the Long Range Radio to the Control..............................................................................................13-2

Programming the Control for the Long Range Radio.................................................................................13-2

Trouble Messages..........................................................................................................................................13-2

SECTION 14 Access Control .....................................................................14-1

General Information.....................................................................................................................................14-1

Access Control of an Entry/Exit Point ........................................................................................................14-2

Using the VISTA-128FB Without the VGM and PassPoint ACS...............................................................14-4

Access Control Dialer Events .......................................................................................................................14-4

Vista Gateway Module Wiring and Programming .....................................................................................14-4

Table of Contents

vii

SECTION 15 External Sounders..............................................................15-1

General Information.....................................................................................................................................15-1

Bell Circuit Supervision...............................................................................................................................15-2

Wiring Bell Circuits......................................................................................................................................15-2

Compatible Alarm-Indicating Devices.........................................................................................................15-2

Programming the Bell Circuits....................................................................................................................15-4

SECTION 16 Auxiliary Relay....................................................................16-1

Relay Functions ............................................................................................................................................16-1

SECTION 17 Dialer Outputs.....................................................................17-1

Dialer Outputs Available .............................................................................................................................17-1

Telephone Line Connections.........................................................................................................................17-1

Telephone Line Supervision.........................................................................................................................17-1

Dialer Operation...........................................................................................................................................17-2

SECTION 18 Event Log Options...............................................................18-1

General Information.....................................................................................................................................18-1

Event Log Printer Connections ....................................................................................................................18-1

Programming Event Log Options ................................................................................................................18-3

Event Logging Procedures............................................................................................................................18-3

SECTION 19 4100APG Pager Interface...................................................19-1

General Information.....................................................................................................................................19-1

Mounting the 4100APG ................................................................................................................................19-1

Wiring the 4100APG.....................................................................................................................................19-2

Programming the Control for the Pager......................................................................................................19-3

4100APG LED Indications...........................................................................................................................19-4

SECTION 20 Final Power-Up Procedure................................................20-1

Connecting the AC Transformer ..................................................................................................................20-1

Earth Ground Connections ..........................................................................................................................20-2

Backup Power Calculations .........................................................................................................................20-2

Connecting the Backup Battery to the Control............................................................................................20-3

Total Control Panel Load Worksheets.........................................................................................................20-4

SECTION 21 The Mechanics of Programming.......................................21-1

Using Data Field Program Mode.................................................................................................................21-1

System and Communication Defaults.........................................................................................................21-1

Entering Data Field Programming Mode ...................................................................................................21-2

Moving from One Page of Programming to Another...................................................................................21-2

Viewing Data Fields .....................................................................................................................................21-2

Entry Errors..................................................................................................................................................21-3

Programming System-Wide Data Fields.....................................................................................................21-3

Programming Partition-Specific Data Fields.............................................................................................21-3

#93 Menu Mode Programming.....................................................................................................................21-4

SECTION 22 Zone Type Definitions.........................................................22-1

Zone Number Designations..........................................................................................................................22-1

Zone Type Definitions...................................................................................................................................22-1

SECTION 23 Zone Index/Zone Type Defaults.........................................23-1

Zone Index.....................................................................................................................................................23-1

Zone Type Defaults .......................................................................................................................................23-2

SECTION 24 Data Field Descriptions.....................................................24-1

Table of Contents

viii

SECTION 25 #93 Menu Mode Programming...........................................25-1

#93 Menu Options.........................................................................................................................................25-1

Zone Programming.......................................................................................................................................25-3

Sequential Mode Programming...................................................................................................................25-9

Report Code Programming.........................................................................................................................25-12

Alpha Descriptors Programming...............................................................................................................25-16

Device Programming ..................................................................................................................................25-21

Relay Programming....................................................................................................................................25-25

Zone List Programming..............................................................................................................................25-30

Relay Voice Descriptors ..............................................................................................................................25-30

Custom Word Substitutes for VIP Annunciation......................................................................................25-32

RF Serial Number Clear Mode ..................................................................................................................25-32

SECTION 26 Scheduling Options............................................................26-1

Introduction to Scheduling ..........................................................................................................................26-1

Time Window Definitions.............................................................................................................................26-3

Open/Close Definitions................................................................................................................................26-4

Scheduling Menu Mode................................................................................................................................26-6

Scheduling Menu Structure .........................................................................................................................26-7

Time Windows...............................................................................................................................................26-8

Daily Open/Close Schedules........................................................................................................................26-9

Holiday Schedules ......................................................................................................................................26-10

Time-Driven Events....................................................................................................................................26-11

Limitation of Access Schedules..................................................................................................................26-16

Temporary Schedules .................................................................................................................................26-17

User Scheduling Menu Mode.....................................................................................................................26-19

SECTION 27 System Communication......................................................27-1

A Successful Transmission...........................................................................................................................27-1

Reporting Formats........................................................................................................................................27-1

Loading Communication Defaults...............................................................................................................27-4

SECTION 28 Downloading Primer..........................................................28-1

General Information.....................................................................................................................................28-1

Getting On-Line With a Control...................................................................................................................28-2

On-Line Control Functions...........................................................................................................................28-3

Access Security..............................................................................................................................................28-3

Connecting a 4100SM Module for Direct-Wire Downloading....................................................................28-3

SECTION 29 Setting the Real-Time Clock..............................................29-1

General Information.....................................................................................................................................29-1

Setting the Time and Date............................................................................................................................29-1

SECTION 30 User Access Codes................................................................30-1

General Information.....................................................................................................................................30-1

User Codes and Levels of Authority.............................................................................................................30-1

To ADD a Master, Manager, or Operator Code...........................................................................................30-4

To Change a Master, Manager, or Operator Code......................................................................................30-6

To Add an RF Key to an Existing User .......................................................................................................30-6

To Delete a Master, Manager, or Operator Code.........................................................................................30-7

To EXIT the User Edit Mode........................................................................................................................30-7

SECTION 31 Keypad Functions ...............................................................31-1

General Information.....................................................................................................................................31-1

Arming Functions.........................................................................................................................................31-2

Global Arming ..............................................................................................................................................31-3

Access Control ...............................................................................................................................................31-3

Delaying Closing Time.................................................................................................................................31-4

Table of Contents

Partition "GOTO" Commands .....................................................................................................................31-4

Viewing Capabilities of a User.....................................................................................................................31-4

Viewing Zone Descriptors.............................................................................................................................31-5

Viewing Downloaded Messages ...................................................................................................................31-5

Using the Built-in User's Manual................................................................................................................31-5

Panic Keys.....................................................................................................................................................31-5

Speed Key [D] (Macros) ................................................................................................................................31-6

Manual Relay Activation Mode (#70)..........................................................................................................31-7

SECTION 32 Testing the System ..............................................................32-1

Battery Test...................................................................................................................................................32-1

Dialer Test.....................................................................................................................................................32-1

Fire Drill Test (Code + [#] + 69)...................................................................................................................32-2

One-Man Fire Walk-Test (Code + [#] + 68)..................................................................................................32-2

Burglary Walk-Test (Code + TEST [5]).......................................................................................................32-3

Armed Burglary System Test.......................................................................................................................32-4

Trouble Conditions.......................................................................................................................................32-4

Turning the System Over to the User...........................................................................................................32-6

To the Installer..............................................................................................................................................32-6

APPENDIX A Regulatory Agency Statements .......................................... A-1

UL Installation Requirements ...................................................................................................................... A-1

UL864/NFPA Local Fire............................................................................................................................... A-1

UL864/NFPA Central Station and Remote Station Fire............................................................................ A-1

UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises/Local Mercantile Safe & Vault ............................................A-2

UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm......................................................................................... A-2

UL611/UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm....................................................................................... A-2

California State Fire Marshal (CFSM) Requirements ................................................................................ A-3

APPENDIX B DIP Switch Tables ............................................................... B-1

APPENDIX C Summary of System Commands......................................... C-1

APPENDIX D Specifications.......................................................................D-1

INDEX ......................................................................................................................Index-1

THE LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM

ADEMCO LIMITED WARRANTY

List of Figures

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

4-1. Installing the Lock.......................................................................................................................................4-1

4-2.. Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations.................................................................................................4-2

4-3. Mounting the PC Board ............................................................................................................................4-3

5-1. Keypad Connections to Keypad Port 1 Terminals......................................................................................5-2

5-2. Using a Supplementary Power Supply for Additional Keypads...............................................................5-3

6-1. 2-Wire Smoke Detector Connected to Zone 1 ..............................................................................................6-2

6-2. 4-Wire Smoke Detector Connections (Zones 1-8)........................................................................................6-4

6-3. Wiring Latching Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 8.......................................................................................6-5

7-1. Polling Loop Connections............................................................................................................................7-3

7-2a. Polling Loop Connections Using One 4297 Extender Module...................................................................7-4

7-2b. Polling Loop Connections Using Multiple Extender Modules...................................................................7-4

8-1. 5881 RF Receiver (cover removed) ..............................................................................................................8-3

9-1a. 4204 Relay Module ......................................................................................................................................9-2

9-1b. 4204CF Relay Module .................................................................................................................................9-3

10-1. 4285 VIP Module Connections..................................................................................................................10-3

11-1. Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections.......................................................................................11-3

12-1. J2 Pin Assignments and Functions..........................................................................................................12-2

12-2. Remote Keypad Sounder Wiring...............................................................................................................12-2

12-3. Remote Keyswitch Wiring..........................................................................................................................12-3

12-4 5140LED Indicator Module ......................................................................................................................12-5

12-5a.Connections to 7720 Long Range Radio...................................................................................................12-7

12-5b.Connections to 7720ULF Long Range Radio...........................................................................................12-8

12-5c.Connections to 7920SE Long Range Radio..............................................................................................12-9

13-1. Long Range Radio to Keypad Terminals .................................................................................................13-2

14-1. Wiring the Vista Gateway Module............................................................................................................14-4

15-1. External Sounder Connections .................................................................................................................15-3

16-1. Auxiliary Relay Used as Unsupervised Bell Output................................................................................16-2

16-2. Auxiliary Relay Used for Resetting 4-Wire Smoke Detectors ..................................................................16-2

18-1. Event Log Printer Connections .................................................................................................................18-2

19-1. Wiring the 4100APG Without the Serial Printer .....................................................................................19-2

19-2. Wiring the 4100APG With the Serial Printer...........................................................................................19-3

20-1. Connecting the Backup Batteries to the Control......................................................................................20-3

25-1. RF Transmitter Loop Designations..........................................................................................................25-7

25-2. 6139 Key Functions for Programming the 7820 Radio .........................................................................25-24

28-1. Direct Wire Downloading Connections.....................................................................................................28-4

Summary of Connections Diagram ...................................................................................Inside Back Cover

How To Use This Manual

This manual is written to accommodate both the new and the experienced installer of

ADEMCO products. A general description of the entire system is located at the beginning of

the manual, followed by the basics of programming. The wiring and physical setup of the

hardware follows.

The sections at the core of the manual include both hardware setup and programming

requirements of each device to make that specific device operational in the system. A

checkout procedure is included at the end of each section. We recommend this method to

ensure that each device is working properly before proceeding to the next section. It must

also be used if you are making a particular addition to the system of one of these devices.

Each of the sections covering the installation of peripheral devices includes the programming

for that device. If you are an experienced user of ADEMCO products, you may choose to wire

and then program the entire system at once. If so, refer to The Mechanics of Programming

section and the Data Field Descriptions section after the hardware setup is complete. A blank

pull-out programming form is included with this manual.

Without an understanding of the programming methodology, you will not be able to

successfully perform the required programming in each of these sections. We therefore urge

you to read the Mechanics of Programming section before any programming is performed.

This manual uses various icons to denote critical notes and technical tips to assist you with

the installation of this system. These are easily seen in the left-hand column of the relevant

information.

xii

Conventions Used in This Manual

Before you begin using this manual, it is important that you understand the meaning of the

following symbols (icons).

ULThese notes include specific information which must be followed if you are installing this system for

a UL Listed application.

These notes include information that you should be aware of before continuing with the installation,

and which, if not observed, could result in operational difficulties.

This symbol indicates a critical note that could seriously affect the operation of the system, or could

cause damage to the system. Please read each warning carefully. This symbol also denotes

warnings about physical harm to the user

Enter Zn Num.

= Quit) Many system options are programmed in an interactive mode by responding to alpha

keypad display prompts. These prompts are shown in a single-line box.

✴00 When programming the system, data fields are indicated by a “star” (✴) followed by the

data field number.

PRODUCT MODEL NUMBERS: Unless noted otherwise, references to specific model numbers represent

ADEMCO products.

1-1

SECTION 1

General Description

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

General

♦

Features

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

General

The VISTA-128FB is an 8-partition, UL listed commercial fire and burglary control panel

that supports up to 128 zones using basic hardwired, polling loop, and wireless zones. It also

includes zones for supervision of bells, phone lines, keypads, RF receivers, and relays. In

addition, the control offers scheduling capabilities and allows certain operations to be

automated by pressing a single button. The system has the capability to interface with an

alpha numeric paging device and also an ECP long range radio unit that can send Contact ID

messages. The control can be connected to the ADEMCO PassPoint system (via the Vista

Gateway Module) to provide a fully integrated security and access control system.

Features

Basic Hardwired Zones

Provides 8 style-B hardwire zones with the following characteristics:

• EOLR supervision (optional for zones 3-8) supporting N.O. or N.C. sensors

(EOLR supervision required for fire and UL burglary installations)

• Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions

• Up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors each on zones 1 and 2 (32 total)

• 4-wire smoke or heat detectors on zones 1-8 (power to 4-wire smoke detectors must be

supervised with an EOL device)

• Up to 50 2-wire latching glassbreak detectors on zone 8

• Individually assignable to bell outputs and/or aux. relay

Optional Expansion Zones

Polling Loop Expansion

Supports up to 120 additional hardwire zones using a built-in polling (multiplex) loop

interface. Current draw can total up to 128mA. Polling loop zones have the following

characteristics:

• Must use RPM (Remote Point Module) devices

• Supervised by control panel

• Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions

• Individually assignable to bell outputs and/or aux. relay

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

1-2

Wireless Expansion

Supports up to 63 wireless zones using 4281 type RF receiver or 128 wireless zones using

5881 type RF receiver (fewer if using hardwire and/or polling loop zones). Wireless zones

have the following characteristics:

• Supervised by control panel for check-in signals (except certain nonsupervised

transmitters)

• Tamper protection for 5800 Series supervised transmitters

• Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions

• Individually assignable to bell outputs and/or auxiliary relay

ULWireless devices may not be used in UL commercial burglary installations. UL Listing of the

5808 Smoke Detector for commercial fire installations is pending.

For specific information regarding number of wireless zones supported by each RF receiver, see

the

Wireless Zone Expansion

section.

System Zones

Provides zones for supervision of all peripheral devices (keypads, RF receivers, and relay

modules) and individual relays, as well as system zones (bells, dialers (telephone lines), earth

ground, keypad panics, etc.). Zone assignments are as follows:

Individual Relay Zones 601-632

Peripheral Device Zones 800-831

System Zones 970-999

(See the Zone Index section for a full explanation of these zones and specific zone

assignments.)

Maintenance Signal Support

The control monitors maintenance signals from certain smoke detectors (5808, 4192CPM,

4192SDM, 4192SDTM). Maintenance signals are triggered when a smoke detector gets dirty,

and indicate that the detector should be cleaned or replaced. If a detector maintains a high

or low sensitivity condition for longer than 24 hours, the control sends a Dialer report

(Trouble message for non-Contact ID reports; Event Code 385 or 386 for Contact ID reports),

makes an event log entry, and displays “HSENS xxx” or “LSENS xxx” at the keypads (xxx =

zone number).

NOTE: 5808 Wireless Smoke Detectors report high sensitivity regardless of whether the

condition is actually high-sensitivity or low-sensitivity.

8 Partitions

Provides the ability to control 8 separate areas independently, each functioning as if it had

its own separate control. Partitioning features include:

• A Common Lobby partition (1-8), which can be programmed to arm automatically when

the last partition that shares the common lobby is armed and to disarm when the first

partition that shares the common lobby is disarmed

Section 1 - General Description

1-3

• A Master partition (9), used strictly to assign keypads for the purpose of viewing the

status of all 8 partitions at the same time (master keypads)

• All zones (except fire) assignable to one of 8 partitions

• Fire zones must be assigned to Partition 1

• Keypads assignable to one of 8 partitions or to Master partition 9 to view system status

• Ability to assign relays to one or all 8 partitions

• Ability to display fire and/or burglary and panic and/or trouble conditions at all other

partitions keypads (selectable option)

• Certain system options selectable for each partition, such as entry/exit delay and

subscriber account number

User Codes

Accommodates 150 user codes, all of which can operate any or all partitions. Certain

characteristics must be assigned to each user code, which are as follows:

• Authority level (Master, Manager, or several other Operator levels)

• Opening/Closing central station reporting option

• What partitions the code can operate

• Global arming capability (ability to arm all partitions the code has access to in one

command)

• Use of an RF (button) to arm and disarm the system (RF key must first be enrolled into

the system)

Peripheral Devices

Supports up to 31 addressable devices, which can be any combination of keypads

(6139/6139R), RF receivers (4281/5881), relay modules (4204/4204CF), and 4285/4286 VIP

module. Peripheral Devices have the following characteristics:

• Each device set to an individual address (physically) according to the device's

instructions

• Each device enabled in the system using the Device Programming Mode (covered later in

this manual)

At least one 2-line alpha keypad (6139/6139R) must be connected to the system for

programming (if using keypad programming) and must remain connected to the system in order

to allow the primary user to program additional user codes into the system at a later time.

Keypad Panic Keys

Accommodates three keypad panic keys: 1 + ✴ (A), ✴ + # (B), and 3 + # (C).

• Designated as zones 995 (1 + ✴), 996 (3 + #), and 999 (✴ + #)

• Activated by wired and wireless keypads

• Activated and reported separately by partition, distinguished by subscriber account

number. (or partition number. if Contact ID reporting is used)

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

1-4

Keypad Macros

Accommodates 32 keypad macro commands per system (each macro is a series of keypad

commands). For example, by pressing either the A, B, C, or D key, the system can be

programmed to log onto another partition, bypass zones 2 and 3, and arm that partition in

the AWAY mode (explained in detail later in this manual). Characteristics of keypad macros

are:

• Assignable to the A, B, and C keys by partition

• Other macros (not assigned to these keys) executed by using the D key

• Each macro can be 32 characters (keystrokes) in length

Bell Outputs

Provides two style-Y supervised bell outputs on the control panel itself. A 4204CF Relay

Module can supply two additional style-Y supervised bell outputs.

Auxiliary Relay

Provides a built-in Form C relay which can be used for one of the following:

• Alarm activation

• Trouble/supervisory activation

• 4-wire smoke detector reset

• Battery saving feature (disconnects power from noncritical loads 4 hours after AC power

loss)

Optional Output Relays

Accommodates the use of 32 relay outputs using ADEMCO's 4204 and 4204CF Relay

Modules. Each 4204 module provides four Form C relays for general purpose use. Each

4204CF provides two style-Y supervised bell outputs. Relay outputs have the following

characteristics:

• Can be programmed to activate in response to system events

• Can be programmed to activate using time intervals

• Can be used for additional style-Y supervised bell outputs (4204CF only)

• Can be activated manually using the #70 Relay Command Mode

• Can be supervised by control panel (zones 601-632)

• Can each have an alpha descriptor assigned to it

Optional Vista Interactive Phone Module

Supports the ADEMCO 4285/4286 VIP Module. This permits access to the security system to

do the following:

• Obtain system status information

• Arm and disarm security system

• Control relays

ULThe 4285/4286 VIP Module is not Listed for use with the VISTA-128FB Control Panel in a UL

commercial installation.

Section 1 - General Description

1-5

Access Control

If programmed, provides users with a command, which activates relays to open access doors

(e.g., lobby door), to turn on lights, etc. Each partition can be assigned any number of access

control relays, up to 32 for the system.

By using the Vista Gateway Module (VGM), the control can be connected to the ADEMCO

PassPoint system for a fully integrated access control system.

ULThe access control function is not Listed for use with the VISTA-128FB Control Panel in a UL

commercial installation.

Optional 24-Volt Power Supply

Compatible with the PS24 Power Supply Module, which supplies two 24VFW, 1.7A full-wave

rectified, unfiltered outputs. The module is used to supply power to:

• Alarm notification appliances (sirens, strobes, etc.)

• Auxiliary devices which can operate using full-wave rectified, unfiltered voltage

Optional Backup Dialer

Supports use of 5140DLM Backup Dialer for connecting to a second supervised telephone

line.

Optional Keyswitch

Supports the ADEMCO 4146 Keyswitch on any one of the system's 8 partitions. If used, zone

7 is no longer available as a protection zone.

Voltage Triggers

Provides a trigger connector whose pins change state for different conditions. Used with

LRR (Long Range Radio) equipment or other devices such as a remote keypad sounder,

keyswitch ARMED and READY LEDs, or a printer to print the system's event log.

Event Log

Keeps a log of different event types (enabled in programming). The event log has the

following characteristics:

• Stores up to 224 events

• Can be viewed at the keypad or through the use of V-LINK or Compass software

• Can be printed on a serial printer using a 4100SM Module including zone alpha

descriptors

• Can store PassPoint events

• Printed events can be sent to an alpha numeric pager

Scheduling

Provides the following scheduling capabilities:

• Open/close schedules (for control of arming/disarming and reporting)

• Holiday schedules (allows different time windows for open/close schedules)

• Timed events (for activation of relays, auto-bypassing and unbypassing, auto-arming and

disarming, etc.)

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

1-6

• Access schedules (for limiting system access to users by time)

• End User Output Programming Mode (provides 20 timers for relay control)

Communications Formats

Supports the following formats for the primary and secondary central station receivers:

• ADEMCO Low Speed (Standard or Expanded)

• Sescoa/Radionics

• ADEMCO Express

• ADEMCO High Speed

• ADEMCO Contact ID

• Long Range Radio interface (ECP)

Audio Alarm Verification Option

Provides a programmable Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) option which can be used in

conjunction with an output relay to permit voice dialog between an operator at the central

station and a person at the premises. An optional AAV unit, such as Eagle model 1250, is

required.

ULThe Eagle Model 1250 AAV unit is not UL Listed.

Cross-Zoning Capability

Helps prevent false alarms by preventing a zone from going into alarm unless its cross-zone

is also faulted within 5 minutes.

Exit Error False Alarm Prevention Feature

• System can tell the difference between a regular alarm and an alarm caused by leaving

an entry/exit door open. If not subsequently disarmed, faulted E/E zone(s) and/or interior

zones will be bypassed and the system will arm.

• Generates an Exit Error report by user and by zone so the central station knows it was

an exit alarm and who caused it.

Enhanced Fire Walk-Test Mode

Provides the installer the ability to test fire zones more quickly and reliably. The following

features apply:

• Automatic test of all integrated RPM (polling loop) devices that have the automatic test

feature

• Dynamic display of all fire zones that remain untested while test is in progress

• Ability to log results (all fire zones tested and untested) in system's event log

• Ability to report results (all fire zones tested and untested) to the central station

Built-in User's Manual and Descriptor Review

For end-user convenience, the Vista-128FB contains a built-in User’s Manual. By depressing

any of the function keys on the keypad for 5 seconds, a brief explanation of that function

scrolls across the alpha numeric display. In addition, all programmed zone descriptors can

be displayed (one at a time) by pressing the READY key for 5 seconds. This serves as a check

for installers to be sure all descriptors are entered properly.

Section 1 - General Description

1-7

Improved Downloading Features

• Uploads and downloads at 300 baud, making upload/download speed faster.

• Ability to upload ECP devices, their physical addresses, programmed addresses, and

firmware revision levels from the control.

Agency Listings

Fire

• UL864-NFPA 72 Local, Central Station, and Remote Station

Burglary

• UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises and Mercantile Safe and Vault

• UL611/UL1610 Grades A, AA Central Station

• UL365 Grades A, AA Police Connect

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

1-8

2-1

SECTION 2

Planning a Partitioned System

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

Theory of Partitioning

♦

Setting Up a Partitioned System

♦

Common Lobby Logic

♦

Master Keypad Setup and Operation

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Theory of Partitioning

This system provides the ability to arm and disarm up to 8 different areas, as if each had its

own control. These areas are called partitions. Partitions are used to disarm certain areas

while leaving other areas armed, or to limit access to certain areas to specific individuals.

Each system user can be assigned to operate any or all partitions, and can be given a

different authority level in each.

Before anything can be assigned to those partitions, you must first determine how many

partitions are required (1-8).

Following are some facts you need to know about partitioning.

Keypads

Each keypad must be given a unique "address" and be assigned to one partition (it can also

be assigned to Partition 9 if Master keypad operation is desired. (See “Master Keypad Setup

and Operation” later in this section).

Zones

Each zone must be assigned to one partition.

The zones assigned to a partition will be displayed on that partition's keypad(s).

Fire zones must be assigned to Partition 1.

Users

Each user may be given access to one or more partitions. If a user is to operate more than

one partition and would like to arm/disarm all or some of those partitions with a single

command, the user must be enabled for global arming for those partitions (when entering

user codes).

A user with access to more than one partition (multiple access) can "log on" to one partition

from another partition's keypad, provided that program field 2*18: Enable GOTO is enabled

for each partition he/she wants to log on to from another.

A partition can be selected as a "common lobby" partition, and other partitions can affect this

partition by causing arming/disarming of this partition to be automated (see “Common Lobby

Logic” later in this section).

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

2-2

Setting Up a Partitioned System

The basic steps to setting up a partitioned system are described below. If you need more

information on how to program the prescribed options, see The Mechanics of Programming

section as well as each corresponding section's programming procedure.

1. Determine how many partitions the system will consist of (programmed in field 2*00).

2. Assign keypads to partitions (Device Programming Mode in #93 Menu Mode).

3. Assign zones to partitions (Zone Programming Mode in #93 Menu Mode).

All fire zones must be assigned to Partition 1 to ensure that all Fire Test modes operate correctly.

4. Confirm zones are displayed at the keypad(s) assigned to those partitions.

5. Assign users to partitions.

6. Enable the GOTO feature (program field 2*18) for each partition a multiple-access user

can log on to (alpha keypad only).

7. Program partition-specific fields (see the Data Field Descriptions section).

Common Lobby Logic

When an installation consists of a partition shared by users of other partitions in a building,

that shared partition may be assigned as the "common lobby" partition for the system

(program field 1*17). An example of this might be in a medical building where there are two

doctors’ offices and a common entrance area (see example that follows explanation).

This option employs logic for automatic arming and disarming of the common lobby. Two

programming fields affect the way the common lobby will react relative to the status of other

partitions. They are: 1*18 Affects Lobby and 1*19 Arms Lobby.

1*18 Affects Lobby (must be programmed by partition)

Setting this option to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the operation of

the common lobby as follows:

a. When the first partition that affects the lobby is disarmed, the lobby will also be

disarmed.

b. The common lobby cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect the lobby

is armed.

c. Arming the last partition that affects the lobby will not cause the system to

automatically attempt to arm the lobby.

1*19 Arms Lobby (must be programmed by partition)

Setting this option to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the operation of

the common lobby as follows:

a. When the first partition that affects the lobby is disarmed, the lobby will also be

disarmed.

b. The common lobby cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect the lobby is

armed.

Section 2 – Planning a Partitioned System

2-3

c. Arming the partition that is programmed to arm the lobby will cause the system to

automatically attempt to arm the lobby. If any faults exist in the lobby partition, or

another partition that affects the lobby is disarmed, the lobby cannot be armed, and the

message "UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION" will be displayed.

You cannot select a partition to "arm" the lobby unless it has first been selected to "affect"

the lobby. Enable field 1*18 before enabling field 1*19.

The following chart sums up how the common lobby partition will operate, if different options

are set for another partition in fields 1*18 and 1*19.

1*18

Affects Lobby 1*19

Arms Lobby Disarms when

partition

disarms?

Attempts to

arm when

partition

arms?

Can be armed

if other

partitions

disarmed?

0 0 NO NO YES

10YESNONO

11YESYESNO

0 1 ---ENTRY NOT ALLOWED---

Example

Here is an example of how the lobby would react in a typical setup.

MAIN ENTRANCE

OFFICE #1 OFFICE #2

COMMON LOBBY

User #1 has access to Office #1 and the Common Lobby.

User #2 has access to Office #2 and the Common Lobby.

Office #1 is set up to affect the Common Lobby, but not arm it.

Office #2 is set up to affect and arm the Common Lobby.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

2-4

In the tables below, the notations in parentheses ( ) indicate the current status of the other

partition when the user takes action.

Sequence #1:

Office 1 Office 2 Lobby Action

User #1: Disarms (Armed) Disarms

User #2: (Disarmed) Disarms No Change

User #1: Arms (Disarmed) No change

User #2: (Armed) Arms Arms

Sequence #2:

Office 1 Office 2 Lobby Action

User #2: (Armed) Disarms Disarms

User #1: Disarms (Disarmed) (No change)

User #2: (Disarmed) Arms No Change

User #1: Arms (Armed) No Change

Notice that in sequence #1, since Office #2 was the last to arm, the lobby also armed (Office

#2 is programmed to affect and arm the lobby). In sequence #2, the lobby could not arm

when Office #2 armed, because Office #1, which affects the lobby, was still disarmed.

When Office #1 armed, the lobby still did not arm because Office #1 was not programmed to

arm the lobby. User #1 would have to arm the lobby manually. Therefore, you would want

to program a partition to affect and arm the lobby, if the users of that partition are expected

to be the last to leave the building.

Do not

assign Partition 1 as the common lobby. All fire zones should be assigned to this partition

to ensure that all fire test modes operate correctly.

How User Access Codes Affect the Common Lobby

Codes with Global Arming

If a code is given "global arming" when it is defined (see the User Access Codes section), the

keypad will ask "Arm all?" or "Disarm all?" whenever the user tries to arm or disarm the

partitions he has access to from an alpha keypad. This allows the user to choose the

partitions to be armed or disarmed, and so eliminates the "automatic" operation of the lobby.

Keep in mind, however, that if attempting to arm all, and another "affecting" partition is

disarmed, the user will not be able to arm the lobby, and the message "UNABLE TO ARM

LOBBY PARTITION" will be displayed.

Codes with Non-Global Arming

If arming with a non-global code, the lobby partition operation will be automatic, as

described by fields 1*18 and 1*19.

Section 2 – Planning a Partitioned System

2-5

Other Methods of Arming/Disarming

Lobby logic remains active when arming or disarming a partition that affects and/or arms the

common lobby in one of the following manners:

• Quick-Arm

• Keyswitch

• Wireless Button

• Wireless Keypad

Arming/Disarming Remotely

If arming or disarming remotely (through V-LINK or Compass downloading software), the

lobby will not automatically follow another partition that is programmed to arm or disarm

the lobby. The lobby must be armed separately, after arming all affecting partitions first.

Auto-Arming/Disarming

If scheduling is used to automatically arm and/or disarm partitions, the common lobby

partition will not automatically follow another partition that is programmed to arm or

disarm the lobby. The lobby must be included as a partition to be armed/disarmed and must

be scheduled as the last partition armed.

If using auto-arming, make sure that the Auto-Arm Delay and Auto-Arm Warning periods

(fields 2*05 and 2*06) combined are longer than that of any other partition that affects the

lobby. This will cause the lobby to arm last.

Master Keypad Setup and Operation

Although this system has eight actual partitions, it provides an extra partition strictly for the

purpose of assigning keypads as master keypads for the system.

Any keypad assigned to Partition 9 in the Device Programming Mode in #93 Menu Mode will

make that keypad a master keypad. A master keypad reflects the status of the entire system

(Partitions 1-8) on its display at one time. This is useful because it eliminates the need for a

building security officer to log-on to various partitions from one partition's keypad to find out

where an alarm has occurred.

The following is a typical display:

S Y S T E M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

S T A T U S R R N N A ✴ B

Possible status indications include:

A = Armed Away M = Armed Maximum

S = Armed Stay I = Armed Instant

R = Ready N = Not Ready

B = Bypassed/Ready ✴ = Alarm Memory/Trouble present

To obtain more information regarding a particular partition, enter ✴ + [Partition No.] (i.e.,

✴4). This will allow viewing only of that partition. In order to affect that partition, the user

must use a code that has access to that partition. Also, in order for a user of any partition to

log on to Partition 9 to view the status of all partitions, that user must have access to all

partitions. Otherwise, access will be denied.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

2-6

The following would be displayed for a fault condition on Zone 2 (Loading Dock Window) on

Partition 1 (Warehouse) when logging on from a keypad on Partition 9:

WHSE DISARMED

HIT ✴ FOR FAULTS

Pressing ∗ will cause the following display to appear at Partition 1's keypad(s):

FAULT 002 LOADING

DOCK WINDOW

Additional zone faults will be displayed one at a time. To display a new partition's status,

press ✴ + [Partition No.].

The Armed LED on a master keypad will be lit only if all partitions have been armed

successfully. The Ready LED will be lit only if all partitions are "ready to arm." Neither

LED will be lit if only some partitions are armed and/or only some partitions are ready.

The sounder on a master keypad will reflect the sound of the most critical condition on all of

the partitions. The priority of the sounds is as follows:

a. Pulsing fire alarm sounds

b. Steady burglar alarm sounds

c. Trouble sounds (rapid beeping)

Pressing any key on the master keypad or a keypad on the partition where the condition

exists silences the sounder.

A master keypad uses the same panics as Partition 1. Master keypad panics are sent to Partition

1, and will activate on Partition 1. Therefore, panics must be programmed for Partition 1.

3-1

SECTION 3

False Alarm Reduction Features

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

General Information

♦

Exit Error Logic and Related Reports

♦

Recent Close Report

♦

Exit Delay Reset

♦

Cross-Zoning

♦

Call Waiting Defeat Logic

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

General Information

This control supports features that help minimize false alarms. Most false alarms occur upon

exiting the premises, either due to environmental factors, or because the zone's resistance to

the control may be on the edge of acceptability. We call this condition a "swinger."

Features which prevent false alarms due to these circumstances are:

• Exit Error Logic and related reports

• Exit Delay Reset

• Cross-Zoning

Exit Error Logic and Related Reports

ULThis feature is not suitable for use on a UL commercial burglary installation.

This feature is intended to reduce the incidence of false alarms due to exit doors that are left

open after the exit delay has expired. If this feature is enabled in program field 1*20, the

following will occur:

At the end of the exit delay, if a door is left open or an interior zone is faulted, the system will

start the entry delay period, and will sound the bell(s), siren(s) and keypad sounders for the

duration of entry delay. This gives the user time to re-enter the premises and disarm the

system before exit error occurs.

If the user does not re-enter the premises and disarm the system, the system will bypass the

faulted entry/exit and/or interior zone(s). The rest of the system will be armed. In addition,

the following dialer reports will be sent to the central station if programmed:

• Exit Error by User (not sent if using ADEMCO High Speed format)

• Exit Error by Zone (Sent as regular alarm if using ADEMCO High Speed format)

• Bypass reports

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

3-2

Recent Close Report

Another report, designed to notify the central station that an alarm has occurred within 5

minutes of arming, is called the Recent Close report. This report, as well as the Exit Error

reports, are programmed in Report Code Programming Mode in #93 Menu Mode

Exit Delay Reset

ULThis feature is not suitable for use on a UL commercial burglary installation.

This feature is designed to allow an operator to re-enter the premises to retrieve a forgotten

item without triggering an alarm. This feature is enabled in program field 1*21, and works

in the following way:

When the panel is armed, the normal exit delay begins. After the user exits and the door

closes, the exit delay time is reset to 60 seconds. If, within this 60-second period, the entry

door is re-opened, the panel will restart the exit delay sequence using the programmed exit

delay time. This feature will only be activated once after arming.

Cross Zoning

ULThis feature is not suitable for use on a UL commercial burglary installation.

The Cross-Zoning feature is designed so that a combination of two zones must be faulted

within a 5-minute period of each other to cause an alarm on either zone. This prevents

momentary faults from one of the zones causing an alarm condition. You can select four

"sets" of cross-zones, keeping in mind the following:

• Both must protect the same area.

• Both must be in the same partition.

• A fire zone must only be crossed to another fire zone protecting the same physical area

(see warning below).

Note: The four sets of cross-zones are programmed in data fields 1*22, 1*23, 1*24, and 1*25.

DO NOT cross-zone a fire zone with a burglary zone under any circumstance. A fire zone must

only be crossed to another fire zone and BOTH must be protecting the same physical area (no

walls or partitions separating them). Consult NFPA 72 standard for exact spacing requirements.

As a guideline, we recommend that spacing between fire cross-zones be no farther than 30 ft

Section 3 – False Alarm Reduction Features

3-3

Conditions That Affect Cross-Zone Operation

1. In the event of a continuous fault (lasting at least 5 minutes) on one of the paired zones, a

fault on the second zone will cause an alarm immediately.

2. If one of the zones in a pair is bypassed or has a zone response type set to 0, the cross-

zoning feature will not apply.

3. If an entry/exit zone is paired with an interior follower zone, be sure to enter the

entry/exit zone as the first zone of the pair. This will ensure that the entry delay time is

started before the follower zone is processed.

4. If a relay is programmed to activate on a fault of one of the zones, the relay will activate

without the other zone being faulted.

5. If a relay is programmed to activate on either an alarm or trouble, both zones must trip

before the relay will activate, and both zones must restore for the relay to deactivate (if

relay is programmed to deactivate on a Zone List Restore).

Call Waiting Defeat Logic

Although this option does not directly prevent false alarms, it may prevent the central

station from taking action on a potential false alarm. After the panel's initial call to report

the alarm, the panel may attempt to make an additional call, perhaps for a cancel or a zone

restoral. If Call Waiting is not defeated, an operator at the central station attempting to

contact the premises (to verify whether the alarm is valid) would hear the phone ringing

indefinitely and have to dispatch on the call.

This option, enabled in program field 1*42, attempts to defeat Call Waiting on the first

outgoing call attempt to both the primary and secondary numbers. It does this by dialing a

special sequence preceding the phone number (but after the PABX number). The panel will

dial *70 if using TouchTone and 1170 if using rotary.

The panel does not attempt to defeat Call Waiting on each call attempt because the phone

company may not complete the call if the sequence is dialed on a phone line that does not have

Call Waiting.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

3-4

4-1

SECTION 4

Installing The Control

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

Mounting the Control Cabinet

♦

Installing the Cabinet Lock

♦

Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing

♦

Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing

♦

Installing the Control’s Circuit Board

♦

Connecting the AC Transformer and Battery

♦

Panel Earth Ground Connections

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Mounting the Control Cabinet

• Mount the control cabinet to a sturdy wall using fasteners or anchors (not supplied) in a

clean, dry area which is not readily accessible to the general public. The back of the

control cabinet has 4 holes for this purpose.

• Before mounting the circuit board, remove the metal knockouts for the wiring entry that

you will be using. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE KNOCKOUTS AFTER THE

CIRCUIT BOARD HAS BEEN INSTALLED.

Installing the Cabinet Lock

Use an ADEMCO No. N6277 Cam Lock and No. P3422-2 Clip for universal commercial

cabinets.

CABINET DOOR BOTTOM

RETAINER

CLIP

RETAINER CLIP

(NOTE POSITION)

RETAINER

SLOTS

LOCKED

UNLOCKED

Figure 4-1: Installing the Lock

1. Insert the key into the lock. Position

the lock in the hole making certain

that the latch will make contact

with the latch bracket when the door

is closed.

2. While holding the lock steady, insert

the retainer clip into the retainer

slots.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

4-2

ULFor UL installations which are intended to provide certificated burglary service, refer to the

special requirements and

Figure 4-2 Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations

Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing

• The panel door must be supervised. Mount the clip-on tamper switch (supplied) to the

cabinet's right side wall as shown in the diagram below, and wire it to zone 6.

• Use a bell with a tamper-protected housing such as the ADEMCO AB12. The bell

housing's tamper switch and inner tamper linings must also be wired to zone 6.

• Assign zone 6 to a burglary partition. Program it for day trouble/night alarm (zone type

5) when only one burglary partition is used. Program it for 24-hr. audible alarm (zone

type 7) when more than one burglary partition is used. Enable the Zone 6 Alternate

Tamper Function (program field 3*17).

• All wiring between the bell and panel must be run in conduit. Remaining wires do not

need to be run in conduit.

• All wiring not run in conduit must exit from the knockout openings on the bottom or back

of the cabinet.

• All unused knockouts must be plugged using the disc plugs and carriage bolts (supplied),

as indicated in the diagram below.

• Fasten the cabinet door to the cabinet backbox using the 18 one-inch-long Phillips-head

screws (supplied) after all wiring, programming and checkout procedures have been

completed.

CABINET ATTACK RESISTANCE CONSIDERATIONS

(Shows typical local Grade A listing installation)

C-COM

PCB

RUN BELL WIRES

IN CONDUIT

▲

PLUG THIS

KNOCK-OUT

▲

CLIP-ON DOOR

TAMPER SWITCH

CABINET

MOUNTING HOLE

(4 PLACES)

▲

PLUG THIS

KNOCK-OUT

PLUG THIS

KNOCK-OUT

PLUG THIS

KNOCK-OUT

▲

RUN ALL REMAINING

WIRES THRU HERE

▲

TO PLUG AN UNUSED KNOCKOUT OPENING, REMOVE KNOCKOUT AND

INSTALL A PAIR OF DISC PLUGS AND A CARRIAGE BOLT AS SHOWN:

KNOCK-OUT

OPENING

DISC PLUGS (DIMPLES IN DISC

PLUG SHOULD REGISTER INSIDE

KNOCK-OUT OPENING

CARRIAGE BOLT

HEX NUT AND

LOCK WASHER CABINET SIDEWALL

(OUTSIDE)

▲

Figure 4-2: Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations

Section 4 - Installing The Control

4-3

Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing

• Follow the instructions given above for Mercantile Premises listing.

• Mount a shock sensor such as Sentrol No. 5402 to the control's backbox. Follow the

manufacturer's instructions for proper sensor mounting. This sensor must also be wired

to zone 6.

• For safe and vault applications, a UL Listed contact must be used inside the cabinet

through one of the knockouts for pry-off tamper purposes. This sensor must also be

wired to zone 6.

Installing the Control's Circuit Board

Refer to Figure 4-3 when mounting the PC board.

• Hang the three mounting clips on the raised cabinet tabs. Make sure the clip orientation

is exactly as shown in the diagram to avoid damage to the clip when the mounting screws

are tightened. This will also avoid problems with insertion and removal of the PC board.

• Insert the top of the circuit board into the slots at the top of the cabinet. Make certain

that the board rests in the slots as indicated.

• Swing the base of the board into the mounting clips and secure the board to the cabinet

with the accompanying screws.

Make certain that the mounting screws are tight. This ensures that there is a good ground

connection between the PC board and the cabinet. Also, dress field wiring away from the

microprocessor (center) section of the PC board. Use the 2 loops on the left and right sidewalls of

the cabinet for anchoring field wiring using tie wraps. These steps are important to minimize the

risk of panel RF interference with television reception.

DETAIL B

SIDE VIEW OF SHORT

MOUNTING CLIPS

DETAIL A

SIDE VIEW OF

BOARD INSERTED

INTO SLOTS

Figure 4-3: Mounting the PC Board

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

4-4

Connecting the AC Transformer and Battery

This product uses the 1451 Transformer, which must be hardwired into the premises’

electrical system. Therefore, we recommend wiring all zones and expansion modules

according to each section's instructions before powering up the system for programming and

testing. Refer to the Final Power-Up Procedure section for specific instructions on how to

connect the transformer and backup battery.

If desired, you can wire, program, and test each section individually by powering up

temporarily for programming and testing each section before final power-up.

Refer to the Final Power-Up Procedure section for battery standby calculations and battery

selection table.

Panel Earth Ground Connections

1. Connect the earth ground post inside the 1451 enclosure to a good earth ground (use

grounding methods specified in the National Electric Code).

2. Use a green nut (supplied) to secure the wire to the ground post. The earth ground wire

should be the only wire under this nut.

3. Run a 16AWG wire from this post to the panel’s earth ground terminal (terminal 30).

Use a second green nut (supplied) to secure this wire to the ground post. This method of

connection avoids ground loops that may occur when the 1451 and panel are connected to

different earth ground systems.

The panel requires this connection in order for its lightning transient protection devices and earth

ground supervision to function properly.

5-1

SECTION 5

Installing The Keypads

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

Keypads That May Be Used

♦

Wiring to the Keypads

♦

Using a Supplementary Power Supply to Power Additional Keypads

♦

Mounting the Keypads

♦

Addressing the Keypads/Preliminary Checkout Procedure

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Keypads That May Be Used

• 2-line alpha display: 6139 (gray) or 6139R (red) (check with local AHJ for approval of

keypad color)

• Up to 16 addressable keypads may be used in the system, independent of auxiliary power

considerations (you may need to use an auxiliary power supply if the 1-amp aux. output

is exceeded)

Wiring to the Keypads

1. Determine wire gauge by referring to the wiring length/gauge chart below.

2. Wire keypads to a single wire run or connect individual keypads to separate wire runs.

The maximum wire run length from the control to a keypad, which is homerun back to

the control must not exceed the lengths listed in the table.

Wire Run Length Table

Wire Gauge Length

#22 gauge 450 feet

#20 gauge 700 feet

#18 gauge 1100 feet

#16 gauge 1750 feet

1. The length of all wire runs combined must not exceed 2000 feet when unshielded quad

conductor cable is used (1000 feet if unshielded cable is run in conduit or if shielded cable is

used).

2. If more than one keypad is wired to a run, then the above maximum lengths must be divided

by the number of keypads on the run (e.g., the maximum length is 225 feet if two keypads are

wired on a #22 gauge run).

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

5-2

3. Run field wiring from the control to the keypads (using standard 4-conductor cable of the

wire gauge determined in step 1).

4. If using only one keypad, it may be connected to either Keypad Port 1 or 2, and must be

mounted on, or within 3 ft. of, the cabinet. If using multiple keypads, connect one to

Keypad Port 2 and mount it on, or within 3 ft. of, the cabinet. Set the main keypad to an

address of 00. (This address cannot be disabled in programming.) Additional keypads

can be mounted where desired, and must be connected to Keypad Port 1 terminals (11,

12, 13, 14), as shown in Figure 5-1. The keypad on Port 2 is electrically isolated from

those on Port 1 and will continue to function even if wiring problems prevent the other

keypads from working properly.

Figure 5-1: Keypad Connections To Keypad Port 1.

Using a Supplementary Power Supply to Power Additional Keypads

The control provides 1 amp of auxiliary standby power for powering keypads and other

devices from the auxiliary power output. Aside from this, the control can support up to 16

peripheral devices (keypads, RF receivers, relay modules, etc.). The backup battery will

supply power to these devices in the event that AC power is lost. A 1-amp load requires a

34.4 AH battery (see the Final Power-Up Procedure section for more information).

When the control’s auxiliary power load for all devices exceeds 1 amp, you can power

additional keypads from a regulated, 12VDC power supply (e.g., Alarm-Saf Model AS/PS5-

BFS-12-UL). Use a UL Listed, battery-backed supply for UL installations.

Connect the additional keypads as shown in Figure 5-2, using the keypad wire colors shown.

Be sure to observe the current ratings for the power supply used.

1. Make connections directly to the screw terminals as shown in

Figure 5-2

. Make no connection

to the keypad blue wire (if present).

2. Be sure to connect the negative (–) terminal on the power supply unit to terminal 12 (AUX – )

on the control.

KEYPADS

BLACK

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

CONTROL

TERMINALS

Section 5 - Installing The Keypads

5-3

Mounting the Keypads

Mount the keypads at a height that is convenient for the user. Refer to the instructions

provided with the keypad for mounting procedure.

You can either surface-mount or flush-mount keypads (using the 6139TRK Trim Ring Kit).

Refer to the mounting instructions and template included with the keypad and/or trim ring

kit for specific information.

Addressing the Keypads/Preliminary Checkout Procedure

If you want to check that the system is working before connecting field wiring from zones and

devices, do the following:

1. Temporarily connect a 2000-ohm end-of-line resistor across each of the basic hardwire

Zones 1–8, as shown in the Summary of Connections diagram. Without actual zone

wiring or EOL resistors connected, the keypads will not display the “READY” message.

2. Power up the system temporarily.

The keypads will not operate until they are physically addressed and enabled in the system's

Device Programming in the #93 Menu Mode

3. Set each keypad to an individual address (00-30) according to the keypad's instructions.

Set an alpha keypad for address 00 and other keypads for higher addresses (00 and 01

are enabled in the system's default program). Any keypads set for address 02 and above

will appear blank until they are enabled in the system's program. Each keypad must be

set for a different address.

Keypads set to the Nonaddressable Mode (address 31) will interfere with other keypads (as

well as other devices) connected to the keypad terminals.

4. After addresses are set, the green READY LED should light, and the words

“DISARMED...READY TO ARM” should be displayed on keypads set to addresses 00,

and 01.

SUPPLEMENTARY

POWER SUPPLY

+–

COMMUNICATOR

TERMINAL STRIP

AUX AUX. DATA DATA

+ – IN OUT

11 12 13 14

IMPORTANT:

MAKE CONNECTIONS

DIRECTLY TO SCREW

TERMINALS AS SHOWN.

TO KEYPAD RED WIRE

TO KEYPAD BLK WIRE

TO KEYPAD YEL WIRE

TO KEYPAD GRN WIRE

TO KEYPAD RED WIRE

TO KEYPAD BLK WIRE

TO KEYPAD GRN WIRE

TO KEYPAD YEL WIRE

IMPORTANT:

Make connections directly to screw

terminals. Make no connection to

the keypad blue wire (if present).

Figure 5-2: Using a Supplementary Power Supply for Keypads

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

5-4

5. If the “READY” message does not appear on any of the keypads in the system (in either

of the partitions), or a “NOT READY” message is displayed, check the keypad wiring

connections. Make sure each of the 8 basic hardwired zones has a 2000-ohm resistor

connected across its terminals.

6. When the proper “READY” message is displayed on the keypad(s) addressed at 00, and

01, the system is functioning properly.

7. Do not remove the EOL resistors until you are ready to make connections to the

hardwired zones, to allow for testing (described later in the manual).

If an “OC” or “OPEN CIRCUIT” message is present on the keypad, data from the control is not

reaching the keypad. Please check your wiring.

6-1

SECTION 6

Basic Hardwired Zones 001-008

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

Common Characteristics of Hardwired Zones 1-8

♦

Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1-8

♦

Wiring 2-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1 and 2

♦

Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors

♦

Wiring 4-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1-8

♦

Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors

♦

Fire Alarm Verification for Smoke Detectors

♦

Zone 6 Tamper Configuration

♦

Wiring 2-Wire Latching Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 8

♦

Compatible Glassbreak Detectors

♦

Checkout Procedure for Hardwired Zones

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Common Characteristics of Hardwired Zones 1-8

• EOLR supervision (optional for zones 3-8) supporting N.O. or N.C. sensors (EOLR

supervision required for fire and UL Burglary installations)

• Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions

• Up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors each on zones 1 and 2 (32 total)

• 4-wire smoke or heat detectors on zones 1-8 (power to 4-wire smoke detectors must be

supervised with an EOL device)

• Up to 50 2-wire latching glassbreak detectors on zone 8

• Individually assignable to bell outputs and/or aux. relay

Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1-8

1. Connect sensors/contacts to the hardwire zone terminals (15 through 27).

2. Connect N.C. devices in series with the high (+) side of the loop. The 2K EOL resistor

must be connected in series with the devices, following the last device.

3. Connect N.O. devices in parallel (across) the loop. The 2K EOL resistor must be

connected across the loop wires at the last device.

The maximum zone resistance is 100 ohms for zones 1, 2 and 8, and 300 ohms for all other zones

(excluding the 2K EOL resistor).

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

6-2

Wiring 2-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1 and 2

Zones 1 and 2 have the added capability of supporting 2-wire smoke detectors. Each zone

provides enough standby current (2 mA) to power up to sixteen of the smoke detectors listed

below. Each zone provides only enough alarm current (20 mA) to power one smoke

detector in the alarmed state. When assigned zone type 9 or 16, the second entry of a

User Code + OFF sequence at a keypad will interrupt power to these zones to allow detectors

to be reset following an alarm.

1. Connect 2-wire smoke detectors across zone 1 and/or zone 2 terminals (15 through 18) as

shown in Figure 6-1. Observe proper polarity when connecting the detectors.

2. If EOL resistors are presently connected across zone 1 and zone 2 terminals, remove

them. The EOL resistors must be connected across the loop wires of each zone

at the last detector.

2K EOLR resistors must be used on fire zones (standard, discrete 2K EOLR resistors may be

used on burglary and panic zones) and must be connected across the loop wires of each zone at

the last detector.

The alarm current provided by zones 1 and 2 will support only one smoke detector each in the

alarmed state.

Figure 6-1: 2-Wire Smoke Detector Connected to Zone 1 [can also be

connected to Zone 2, terminals 17(+) and 18(-)].

ZONE 1

2-WIRE SMOKE

DETECTOR

2000 OHMS

EOLR

SMOKE

Section 6 - Basic Hardwired Zones 001-008

6-3

Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors

You may use up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors each on zones 1 and 2 listed in the table below.

DETECTOR TYPE DEVICE MODEL # DETECTOR TYPE DEVICE MODEL #

Photoelectric, direct wire System Sensor 2400 Photoelectric duct detect.

w/DH400 base System Sensor 2451

Photoelectric w/heat

sensor, direct wire System Sensor

2400TH Ionization duct detector

w/DH400 base System Sensor

1451DH

Photoelectric w/B401B

base System Sensor 2451 Ionization, direct wire System Sensor 1100

Photoelectric w/heat

sensor and B401B base System Sensor

2451TH Ionization w/B110LP base System Sensor 1151

Ionization, direct wire System Sensor 1400 Photoelectric, direct wire System Sensor 2100

Ionization w/B401B base System Sensor 1451 Photoelectric w/heat sensor,

direct wire System Sensor 2100T

Photoelectric duct detect.

w/DH400 base System Sensor 2451 Photoelectric w/B110LP base System Sensor 2151

ULThese smoke detectors are UL Listed for use with the VISTA-128FB and are the only 2-wire

smoke detectors that may be used.

Wiring 4-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1-8

When programmed for fire warning usage, all zones can monitor 4-wire smoke detectors

(zone types 9, 16), N.O. fire alarm initiating devices (zone types 9, 17), or N.O. sprinkler

system supervisory devices (zone type 18).

You may use as many 4-wire smoke detectors as can be powered from the panel's Auxiliary

Power 1 output without exceeding the output's rating (see the Final Power-Up Procedure

section for auxiliary power ratings).

Auxiliary power to 4-wire smoke detectors is not automatically reset after an alarm, and therefore

must be momentarily interrupted using the built-in auxiliary relay as described below. This allows

the detectors to be reset via the second entry of a User Code + OFF sequence. Field 3*61 Aux

Relay Function must be programmed as a 2.

1. Connect 12-volt power for the detectors as follows: Wire the [+] side of Auxiliary Power

(Terminal 10) to the N.C. contact of the Aux. Relay (Terminal 9). Wire the Pole of the

Aux Relay (Terminal 8) to the [+] Power side of the smoke detector. Connect the [-] side

of the smoke detector to [-] Aux. Power (Terminal 12). Observe proper polarity when

connecting detectors (see Figure 6-2).

ULPower to 4-wire smoke detectors must be supervised with an EOL device (use a System Sensor

A77-716B EOL Relay Module connected as shown in

Figure 6-2

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

6-4

Figure 6-2: 4-Wire Smoke Detector Connections (Zones 1-8)

2. Connect detectors (including heat detectors, if used) across terminals of the zone selected.

See Figure 6-2. All detectors must be wired in parallel. Remove the 2000-ohm EOL

resistor if connected across the selected zone terminals. You must connect the EOL

resistor across the loop wires at the last detector.

Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors

Use any UL Listed 4-wire smoke detector which is rated for 10-14VDC operation and which

has alarm reset time not exceeding 6 seconds. Some compatible 4-wire smoke detectors are

listed below.

Photoelectric, direct wire System Sensor 2412

Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct wire System Sensor 2412TH

Ionization, direct wire System Sensor 1412

Fire Alarm Verification for Smoke Detectors

This feature applies to any hardwired or polling loop fire zone set to zone type 16. For 4-wire

smoke detectors, the power must be interrupted by the system's auxiliary relay (field 3*61 =

2). The control panel will “verify” any alarm by resetting the smoke detectors after the first

alarm trigger, and then waiting 90 seconds for a second alarm trigger. If the smoke detector

or thermostat does not trigger again, the control will disregard the first trigger, and no alarm

signal will occur. This feature eliminates false alarms due to electrical or physical transients.

Zone 6 Tamper Configuration

Zone 6 may be used as a tamper loop for the VISTA-128FB Cabinet Door Tamper Switch and

for the ADEMCO AB12 Grade A Burglary Bell Box Tamper Switches and Tamper Liner.

The bell housing's tamper switch and inner tamper linings must also be wired to zone 6.

VISTA-100

CONTROL

PANEL

ZONE

TERMINALS

(15-27)

••

EOL

POWER

SUPERVISION

RELAY

MODULE

A77-716B

•

2000Ω

EOLR

4-WIRE SMOKE

DETECTORS

HEAT

DETECTOR

SHOWN POWERED.

RELAY OPENS WHEN

POWER IS LOST.

N.O.

N.C.

POLE

Aux. Pwr 1

Keypad Prt 1

AUXILIARY RELAY

Section 6 - Basic Hardwired Zones 001-008

6-5

Assign zone 6 to a burglary partition. Program it for day trouble/night alarm (zone type 5)

when only one burglary partition is used. Program it for 24-hr. audible alarm (zone type 7)

when more than one burglary partition is used. Enable the Zone 6 Alternate Tamper

Function (program field 3*17).

When set in this manner, the zone will trigger a trouble when the panel is disarmed and an

alarm when the panel is armed, when the zone senses either an open or a short, or when an

earth ground fault caused by drilling through the AB12 housing is detected. See the

External Sounders section, for information on AB12 bell wiring.

Wiring 2-Wire Latching Glassbreak Detectors To Zone 8

Use zone 8 for connection of compatible 2-wire latching-type glassbreak detectors. Wire as

follows:

1. Connect all detectors in parallel across zone 8 (terminals 26 and 27). See Figure 6-3.

Remove the 2000-ohm EOL resistor if connected across the selected zone terminals. You must

connect the EOL resistor across the loop wires at the last detector.

Figure 6-3: Wiring Latching Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 8

After an alarm, the first code + OFF turns off the siren and disarms the system; the second

code + OFF clears the memory of alarm and resets the glassbreak detector.

Compatible Glassbreak Detectors

Use detectors that meet the following ratings:

Standby Voltage: 5VDC–13.8VDC

Standby Resistance: Greater than 20k ohms (equivalent

resistance of all detectors in parallel)

Alarm Resistance: Less than 1.1k ohms (see note below)

Alarm Current: 2mA–10mA

Reset Time: Less than 6 seconds

The IEI 735L Series detectors have been tested and found to be compatible with these

ratings. You can use up to 50 IEI 735L Detectors connected in parallel.

GLASSBREAK

DETECTOR

ZONE 8 (+)

(-)

LATCHING TYPE GLASS

BREAK DETECTOR LOOP

2000

OHMS

EOLR

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

6-6

1. The alarm current provided by zone 8 will support only one glassbreak detector in the alarmed

state.

2. Do not use other N.O. or N.C. contacts when using glassbreak detectors on zone 8. Other

contacts may prevent proper glass break detector operation.

You can use detectors which exceed 1.1k ohms in alarm, provided they maintain a voltage

drop of less than 3.8 volts in alarm.

Checkout Procedure for Hardwired Zones

After installation of all hardwired zones is complete, each partition of the security system

should be checked as follows:

1. Make certain that all devices and sensors connected to the hardwired zones are not in a

faulted state. Doors and windows with contacts should be closed, PIRs should be covered

(use a cloth to mask them temporarily, if necessary).

2. With all hardwired zones intact, the alpha keypads connected to the system should

display:

DISARMED

READY TO ARM.

If the following is displayed instead, press the [✴] key to display the faulted zone(s).

DISARMED Press ✴

to show faults

Restore any faulted zone(s) as necessary (also make sure that you have connected a 2000-

ohm EOL resistor across the terminals of unused zones). When the

“DISARMED...READY TO ARM” message is displayed, you can proceed to the next step.

3. Fault and then restore every contact or sensor on each zone individually to ensure that it

is being monitored by the system. Each time a zone is faulted, the keypads in the

partition to which the zone is assigned should display the number of the faulted zone.

Tripping fire and panic zones will cause external sounders to sound and may

trigger the dialer. When each zone is restored, the “READY TO ARM” message should

appear again.

If a zone or zones are not displayed at the correct partition's keypad(s), check both keypad and

zone programming to verify the correct partition assignment.

When you get the proper displays on the keypad(s), the hardwired zones in the system are

functioning properly.

4. Power down and continue to the next section.

7-1

SECTION 7

2-Wire Polling Loop Expansion

(Zones 009 - 128)

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

Polling Loop Overview

♦

Common Characteristics of Polling Loop Zones

♦

Wiring/Addressing RPM Devices

♦

Polling Loop Supervision

♦

Checkout Procedure for Polling Loop Zones

♦

Compatible Polling Loop Devices

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Polling Loop Overview

You can expand the system from the basic 8 zones to up to 128 zones using the built-in 2-

wire polling loop. Each device that is connected to the polling loop has the capability to

communicate with the panel about its status. These devices are called RPMs (Remote Point

Modules). The polling loop provides both power and data to the RPM zones, and is

constantly monitoring the status of all zones enabled on the loop. The maximum current

draw of all devices on the polling loop cannot total more than 128mA (unless using a 4297

Polling Loop Extender Module).

Refer to the list of compatible devices at the end of this section.

Common Characteristics of Polling Loop Zones

Polling loop zones have the following characteristics:

• Must use RPM (Remote Point Module) devices

• Supervised by control panel

• Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions

• Individually assignable to bell outputs and/or aux. relay

• Polling loop smoke detector LED will latch on the first detector to go into alarm. Clearing

alarm memory clears the latched LED.

• Polling loop smoke detector LED periodically flashes to indicate communication with the

control.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

7-2

Wiring/Addressing RPM Devices

All devices on the polling loop must be wired in parallel to the [+] and [-] polling loop

terminals of the control panel (28 and 29). You can wire from device to device, or have

multiple branches connected directly to the control panel in a star configuration, as shown in

Figure 7-1.

Although each polling loop device is wired in parallel, each device has its own unique zone

number (or group of zones if it is a zone expansion device). On some devices, this is

determined by the setting of DIP switches. Other devices have a built-in unique serial

number which must be enrolled into the control as the zone number desired. Set up the

polling loop as follows:

1. Run wires to each device on the polling loop. No individual wire run may exceed the

lengths given in the table to follow. In addition, no more than 64mA may be drawn on

any individual wire run. When a star configuration is used, the total length of all wire

runs combined cannot exceed 4000 ft (2000 ft. if using unshielded wire in conduit or

shielded wire). Twisted-pair is recommended for all normal wire runs.

Maximum Polling Loop Wire Runs

Wire Gauge Max. Length

#22 gauge 650 feet

#20 gauge 950 feet

#18 gauge 1500 feet

#16 gauge 2400 feet

When running polling loop wires, they must not be run within 6" of AC power, telephone, or

intercom wiring. Since the polling loop is carrying data between the control panel and the

devices, interference on this loop can cause an interruption of this communication. The polling

loop can also cause outgoing interference on the intercom or phone lines. If this spacing cannot

be achieved, shielded wire must be used. (Note that the maximum total wire length supported is

cut in half when shielded wire is used.)

2. Wire each device to the polling loop, making sure to use correct polarity when making

connections (refer to the device's instructions). If you are using serial number

devices, and intend to have the control enroll each serial number

automatically, wire no more than 25 of these devices to the control at a time.

Then power up and program them (as described in Zone Programming of the #93 Menu

Mode Programming section) before connecting the next 25. Leave previously enrolled

devices connected.

3. If you intend to manually enter the serial numbers through the keypad or through

V-LINK or Compass downloading software, all the devices may be connected before

powering up to program.

4. Note the polling loop devices that have DIP switches on them. Set each device's DIP

switches for the zone number you are assigning it. Refer to the device's instructions or

the DIP Switch Tables at the end of this manual when setting addresses.

Certain polling loop devices, such as the 4193SN and 4191SN, do not have DIP switches.

Instead, they have embedded serial numbers which must be "enrolled" by the control

during Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.

Section 7 - 2-Wire Polling Loop Expansion

7-3

Certain polling loop devices have a DIP switch which can be used either to select the device's

zone number or to select the enrolling of a unique, embedded serial number by the control panel.

When used with VISTA-128FB, these devices must be set for the serial number mode of

operation.

The 4297 Polling Loop Extender may be used to provide additional polling loop current, to

extend the polling loop wire run length, and/or to provide individual electrically isolated

polling loops. Refer to Figures 7-2a and 7-2b, to follow.

DO NOT use the 4197 Polling Loop Extender module with the VISTA-128FB

Be sure to include the total current drawn on the polling loop when figuring the total auxiliary load

on the panel's power supply (use the Auxiliary Current Draw Worksheet in the

Final Power-Up

Procedure

section

VISTA-100

2 WIRE RUNS SHOWN IN

A STAR CONFIGURATION

BUILT-IN POLLING LOOP

RPM RPM

BASIC POLLING LOOP CONNECTIONS

Figure 7-1: Polling Loop Connections

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

7-4

CONTROL

PANEL

4297

MODULE

Notes: - Do not use the 4197 module with VISTA-128FB.

- Refer to 4297 instructions for more detailed installation information.

The limits shown below supercede the limits described in the 4297 instructions.

- Do not connect 4297 modules in series.

- - -

RPM

- - -

Input Polling Loop Extension Polling Loop

RPM RPM

RPM

Extension Loop Limits:

- Same as for the input polling loop.

Input Loop Limits:

- 128mA max. No more than 64mA

on any individual wire run.

- No individual wire run may exceed:

Gauge Length

#22

#20

#18

#16

650 ft.

950 ft.

1500 ft.

2400 ft.

- Total length of all wire runs combined cannot

exceed 4000 ft. (2000 ft. if using unshielded

wire in conduit or shielded wire).

Combined Input and Extension Polling Loop Limits:

- No more than 120 devices combined.

- Total length of all wire runs on all loops combined can-

not exceed 6400 ft. (3200 ft. if using unshielded wire in

conduit or shielded wire)

Figure 7-2a: Polling Loop Connections Using One 4297 Extender Module

CONTROL

PANEL

4297

Input Polling

Loop

Notes: - Do not use 4197 module with VISTA-128FB.

- Refer to 4297 instructions for more detailed installation information.

The Limits shown below supercede the limits described in the 4297 instructions.

- Do not connect 4297 modules in series.

Extension Loop #1

Extension Loop #2

Extension Loop #8

- - -

Up to 8 modules may be connected

in parallel. Extension loops will be

electrically isolated if blue jumper

on each 4297 is left in tact.

Combined Input and Extension Loop Limits:

- No more than 120 devices combined on all loops

- To calculate the maximum wire run allowed on each extension loop:

1. Determine the total wire length of all input loops combined.

2. Subtract this number from 6400 ft. (3200 ft. for shielded cable or

unshielded cable in conduit).

The result is the maximum wire run length for each extension loop.

- - -

RPM RPM

RPM

RPM RPM

- - -

Extension Loop Limits:

Each individual loop has the

same limits as the input loop.

Input Loop Limits:

Same as figure 7-2a.

}

Figure 7-2b: Polling Loop Connections Using Multiple Extender Modules

Section 7 - 2-Wire Polling Loop Expansion

7-5

Polling Loop Supervision

A short on the polling loop is indicated by a trouble on its supervisory zone (zone 997), and

reports as a trouble condition only. As such, a polling loop should be assigned either zone

type 05 or type 19 if annunciation as a trouble condition is desired.

If a device on the polling loop fails (the panel cannot "see" that device), the partition or

partitions that use that device will display a trouble condition for all zones associated with

that device. If the panel is armed when a device fails, the zones associated with that device

will cause an alarm on the corresponding partition(s).

A trouble on zone 997 will not prevent a partition from being armed, as long as all polling loop

zones on that partition are bypassed.

Checkout Procedure for Polling Loop Zones

After installation of all polling loop zones is complete, each partition of the security system

should be checked as follows:

1. Be sure that all devices and sensors connected to the polling loop are not in a faulted

state. Doors and windows with contacts should be closed, PIRs should be covered (use a

cloth to mask them temporarily, if necessary).

2. With all hardwired and polling loop zones intact, the alpha keypads connected to the

system should display:

DISARMED

READY TO ARM.

3. If the keypad(s) begins beeping and displays the word "CHECK" or "TRBL" along with a

zone or zone numbers, the system either does not see the displayed zone(s) or the

tamper switches are tripped. Please check your DIP switch settings for the zone(s), your

connections, and/or that the covers for the units with tamper switches are in place. Once

the situation has been corrected, enter the [User Code] + [OFF] sequence twice to clear

the trouble.

4. If the following is displayed, press the [*] key to display the faulted zone(s):

DISARMED Press ✴

to show faults

5. Restore any faulted zone(s) as necessary. When the “DISARMED...READY TO ARM”

message is displayed, you can proceed to the next step.

6. Fault and then restore every contact or sensor on each zone individually to ensure that it

is being monitored by the system. Each time a zone is faulted, the keypads in the

partition to which the zone is assigned should display the number of the faulted zone.

Tripping fire and panic zones will cause external sounders to sound and may

trigger the dialer. When each zone is restored, the “READY TO ARM” message should

appear again.

If a zone or zones are not displayed at the correct partition's keypad(s), check both keypad and

zone programming to verify the correct partition assignment.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

7-6

When you get the proper displays on the keypad(s), the polling loop zones in the system are

functioning properly.

7. Power down and continue to the next section.

• The 4208 must be mounted either inside the VISTA-128FB cabinet or in a separate

enclosure which has a tamper-supervised cover.

• The 4190WH right loop must not be used, and the left loop must be EOLR-supervised.

• The 4278 Auxiliary Sensor Loop cannot be used.

• The 4194 is not UL Listed.

• The 4297 must be powered from the VISTA-128FB Auxiliary Power Output or from a UL

Listed supplementary power supply.

• For commercial fire installations, only the first 6 zones (which utilize 4.7k resistors) on a 4208

Zone Expander may be used. The last two zones may not be used.

Compatible Polling Loop Devices

4208 8-Zone Expander • Accommodates up to 8 zones via the polling

loop.

• DIP switch-programmable.

• The first two zones can be either normal or

fast response (DIP switch-selectable).

• All zones are EOLR-supervised (first six

zones = 4.7k ohms; last two zones = 30k

ohms), provided with the 4208.

4190WH 2 -Zone Expander • Accommodates up to 2 zones via the polling

loop.

• DIP switch-programmable.

• The left zone can be EOLR-supervised

(required in UL installations), can accept

either open or closed circuit sensors, and

can be set for fast response.

• The right zone is unsupervised and can

accept closed circuit sensors only (cannot

be used in UL installations).

4278 Quad PIR • Quad element PIR with built-in RPM

(connects directly to the polling loop).

• DIP switch-programmable.

• Includes mirrors for both wide-angle and

curtain/long-range applications.

• Features an auxiliary sensor loop that is

nonsupervised and can accept closed circuit

sensors only (cannot be used in UL

installations).

Section 7 - 2-Wire Polling Loop Expansion

7-7

Compatible Polling Loop Devices (cont’d)

4275 Dual PIR • Dual-element PIR with built-in RPM

(connects directly to the polling loop).

• DIP switch-programmable.

• Includes mirrors for both wide-angle and

curtain/long-range applications and can

use the 1875PA Pet Alley mirror.

• Built-in selectable pulse count capability.

4194 Surface Mount Reed

Contact (Wide Gap) • Wide-gap, surface-mounted reed contact

with built-in RPM (connects directly to the

polling loop).

• DIP switch-programmable.

4297 Extender Module • Used to increase the polling loop current

(128mA), to extend the polling loop wire

run length, and/or to provide individual,

electrically isolated loops.

• Connects to the polling loop and is powered

from panel's auxiliary power or by a

separate power supply with battery

backup.

4192SD

4192SDM

Photoelectric Smoke

Detector Devices • One-piece photoelectric smoke detector

with built-in RPM.

• DIP switch-programmable.

• 4192SDM provides maintenance signals.

4192SDT

4192SDTM Photoelectric Smoke

Detector w/Heat

Detector

• One-piece photoelectric smoke detector

with 135°F (57°C) heat detector and built-

in RPM.

• DIP switch-programmable.

• 4192SDTM provides maintenance signals.

4192CP

4192CPM Ionization Smoke

Detector • One-piece products of combustion

ionization detector with built-in RPM.

• DIP switch-programmable.

• 4192CPM provides maintenance signals.

4939SN-BR

4939SN-GY Serial Number

Surface Mount

Reed Contacts

• Compact surface-mount magnetic reed

contact with built-in RPM.

• Serial Number ID programmed by control

panel.

4191SN-WH Serial Number

Recessed Reed

Contact

• Recessed (1/2” dia.) magnetic reed contact

with built-in RPM.

• Serial Number ID programmed by control

panel.

4959SN Aluminum Overhead

Door Contact • 24-inch armored cable

• Serial Number ID programmed by control

panel.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

7-8

Compatible Polling Loop Devices (cont’d)

7500 Single Technology

Glassbreak Detector • Glassbreak detector with built-in RPM.

• DIP switch-programmable.

9500 Dual Technology

Glassbreak Detector • Dual-technology glassbreak detector with

built-in RPM

• DIP switch-programmable.

ULModels 7500 and 9500 Glassbreak Detectors are not UL Listed.

8-1

SECTION 8

Wireless Zone Expansion

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

Common Characteristics of Wireless Zones

♦

Wireless Systems Available

♦

RF System Operation and Supervision

♦

RF System Installation Advisories

♦

Installation and Setup of the 4281/5881 RF Receiver

♦

Installing the 5800TM Module

♦

House ID Sniffer Mode

♦

5700 Series Transmitter Setup

♦

5800 Series Transmitter Setup

♦

Checkout Procedure for Wireless Zones

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Common Characteristics of Wireless Zones

• Supervised by control panel for check-in signals (except certain non-supervised

transmitters)

• Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions

• Individually assignable to bell outputs and/or aux. relay

• Individually assignable to access points

ULWireless devices may not be used in UL commercial burglary installations. UL Listing of the

5808 Smoke Detector for commercial fire installations is pending.

Wireless Systems Available

The VISTA-128FB supports wireless zones that may be used exclusively or in addition to

hardwire and/or polling loop zones. The system supports two different wireless systems,

which have many similarities, but notable differences in the programming of the

transmitters for each system.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

8-2

The following receivers may be used with this system. Each supports the number of zones

shown below:

5700 Series

Recvr Zones

4281L up to 4

4281M up to 8

4281H up to 63

5800 Series

Recvr Zones

5881L up to 8

5881M up to 16

5881H up to 128

5881EH up to 128 (use

w/UL864 installations)

In Canada, 5800 systems must use 5882 Series receivers: 5882L/5882H. Information in this

manual relative to the 5881 Receivers applies as well to the 5882 Receivers. 5881 and 5882

Receivers can all use the same transmitters.

RF System Operation and Supervision

• The receiver responds to status and alarm signals from wireless transmitters (at

345MHz in the USA; 315MHz in Canada) within a nominal range of 200 feet, and relays

this information to the control.

• Each supervised transmitter sends a supervisory signal to the receiver every 70-90

minutes. If, after a programmed interval of time (e.g., 12 hrs), the receiver does not hear

from a particular transmitter, the word “CHECK” or “TRBL” will appear at the

corresponding partition’s keypad(s) accompanied by the zone number in question. The

trouble will not prevent you from arming the panel, but the zone must first be bypassed.

• Zones 988 and 990 are used to supervise the RF reception of receivers 2 and 1,

respectively. The reception is supervised for two conditions.

1. If, within a programmed interval of time (defined by program field 1*30), the receiver

does not hear from any of its transmitters. A “CHECK” or “TRBL” message will

appear for zones 988 (2nd receiver) or 990 (1st receiver) if response type 19 is assigned

to these supervisory zones and if programmed, Contact ID event code 333 is sent to

the central station. This message is an indication that the RF receiver is “deaf.” The

fault may be accompanied by a supervision fault for one or more RF transmitters.

2. If, the receiver has detected a condition that may impede proper RF reception (i.e.,

jamming or other RF interference). The control checks the receiver for this condition

every 45 seconds. A “CHECK” or “TRBL” message will appear for zones 988 (2nd

receiver) or 990 (1st receiver) if response type 19 is assigned to these supervisory

zones and if programmed, Contact ID event code 344 is sent to the central station

ULA response type must be programmed for zones 990 (1st receiver) and 988 (2nd receiver) if being

used, for UL commercial fire and burglary installations

• The control checks the receiver connections about every 45 seconds. If the panel has lost

communication with the receiver, a “CHECK” or “TRBL” message will appear for the

respective receiver supervisory zone (8 + 2-digit receiver device address; for example,

Device address 05 = supervisory zone 805). Supervisory zones must be programmed for

24-hour trouble (type 19). The “CHECK” or “TRBL” display may be an indication that

the wiring to the receiver is incorrect, or that the DIP switches are not set for the same

address the receiver was assigned to in the control’s Device Programming in the #93

Menu Mode.

Section 8 – Wireless Zone Expansion

8-3

• Two identical receivers can be used to provide either a greater area of coverage or

redundant protection.

• Any zone from 1 to 63 can be used as a 5700 Series wireless zone. Any zone from 1 to 128

can be used as a 5800 Series wireless zone, with the exception of zone 64 (reserved for a

wireless keypad).

RF System Installation Advisories

1. Place the receiver in a high, centrally located area for best reception. Do not place it on or

near metal objects. This will decrease the range and/or block transmissions.

2. For maximum range, install the RF receiver at least 10 feet from the control panel or any

keypads to avoid interference from the microprocessors in these units.

3. If dual receivers are used:

A. Both must be at least 10 feet from each other, as well as from the control panel and

remote keypads.

B. Each receiver must be set to a different device address. The receiver set to the lower

address is considered the 1st RF receiver for supervisory purposes.

C. The House IDs must be the same.

D. Using two receivers does not increase the number of transmitters the system can

support (63 zones using 4281H; 128 zones using the 5881H, plus a wireless keypad).

Installation and Setup of the 4281/5881 RF Receivers

1. Mount the receiver. Receivers must be mounted externally to the control and can detect

signals from transmitters within a nominal range of 200 feet. Take this into

consideration when determining mounting location.

2. Connect the receiver’s wire harness to the Keypad 1 terminals (11, 12, 13, 14). Plug the

connector at the other end of the harness into the receiver.

3. Refer to the Installation Instructions provided with the receiver for further installation

procedures regarding antenna mounting, etc.

MOUNTING

HOLES INTERFERENCE

INDICATOR

LED

CIRCUIT

BOARD

DIP SWITCH

PLUG

SOCKET

INSERT IN

RIGHT-HAND

TERMINALS

ANTENNAS

YELLOW

RED

BLACK

GREEN

}

TO CONTROL’S REMOTE

KEYPAD CONNECTION

POINTS. EACH RECEIVER

MUST BE ON INDIVIDUAL

HOME RUN.

WIRING

OPENING

KNOCKOUT

AREA FOR

SURFACE

WIRING

DIPSWITCH POSITION #5 (PRESENT ONLY ON 5881EH)

ON: SETS 5881EH FOR USE IN COMMERCIAL FIRE

APPLICATIONS (SEE THE RECEIVER’S INSTRUCTIONS).

OFF: USE IN NON-COMMERCIAL FIRE INSTALLATIONS.

ON OFF

NOTE:

SWITCH POSITION

5 PRESENT ON

5881EH ONLY.

Figure 8-1: 5881 RF Receiver (cover removed)

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

8-4

4. Set the receiver’s DIP switches for an address (01-07) which is not being used by another

device (i.e., keypads, relay modules, etc.).

Take note of the address you select for the RF receiver, as this address must be enabled in the

system’s

Device Programming

in the

#93 Menu Mode Programming

section).

Installing the 5800TM Module

Installation of this module is necessary only if you are using one or more 5827BD Wireless

Bi-directional keypads.

The 5800TM must be located next to the 4281 or 5881 Receiver (between one and two feet

from the receiver’s antennas). The 5800TM must not be installed within the control cabinet.

Mount the unit using its accompanying mounting bracket.

5800TM Wiring Connections

Connect the 5800TM to the control panel’s keypad connection terminals, using the supplied

connector with flying leads, as follows:

WIRE TERMINAL ON CONTROL

RED (+12VDC) Terminal 11

BLACK (Ground) Terminal 12

GREEN (Data to Control) Terminal 13

YELLOW (Data from Control) Terminal 14

BLUE: Not Used

Cut the red jumper for Address Setting 28; cut the white jumper for Address 29; cut both

jumpers for Address 30.

This address must be enabled in the control’s

Device Programming

as a keypad and then

assigned to a partition, (see

#93 Menu Mode Programming

section).

For additional information, refer to the 5800TM’s instructions.

House ID Sniffer Mode

This mode applies only to 5700 Series systems, or, if you are using a wireless keypad

(5827/5827BD), in a 5800 Series system.

5700 Series receivers respond only to transmitters set to the same House ID (01-31)

programmed into the control panel. This prevents system interference from transmitters in

other nearby systems. Use the House ID Sniffer Mode to make sure you do not choose a

House ID that is in use in a nearby system. To enter this mode, proceed as follows:

1. Enter [Installer Code] + [#] + [2].

2. The receiver will now “sniff” out any House IDs in the area and display them. Keep the

receiver in this mode for at least 2 hours to give a good indication of the House IDs being

used. Use a House ID that is not displayed.

3. To exit the Sniffer Mode, simply enter your [Installer Code] + OFF.

4. If you need to re-program the House ID of the receiver, do so before proceeding.

Section 8 – Wireless Zone Expansion

8-5

Since Sniffer Mode effectively disables RF point reception, Sniffer Mode cannot be entered while

any partition is armed.

5700 Series Transmitter Setup

Each 5700 Series transmitter has DIP switches to set both the transmitter’s zone number

(Transmitter ID) and the system House ID. The House ID will be the same for all

transmitters and must match the House ID programmed into the system for the RF receiver.

This can be likened to a family in which everyone has the same last name (House ID), but

each person has a different first name (Transmitter ID). The zone number must then be

programmed into the system using Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.

Transmitter Supervision

• Each transmitter (except 5701 and 5727) is supervised by a check-in signal that is sent to

the receiver at 70-90 minute intervals. If at least one check-in is not received from a

transmitter within a certain period of time (programmed in field 1*31), the keypad will

display the zone number and “CHECK.”

• Each transmitter (including 5701 and 5727) is also supervised for low battery conditions,

and will transmit a low battery signal to the receiver when the battery has

approximately 30 days of life remaining. The keypad will display the transmitter number

and “LO BAT.”

Transmitter Battery Life

• Batteries in the wireless transmitters may last from 4 to 7 years, depending on the

environment, usage, and the specific wireless device being used. External factors such as

humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large swings in temperature, may reduce

the actual battery life in a given installation. The wireless system can identify a true low

battery situation, thus allowing the dealer or user of the system time to arrange a change

of battery and maintain protection for that given point within the system.

• Unsupervised transmitters should be periodically tested by the installer for battery life

(i.e., 5701).

• After replacing a low or dead battery, activate the transmitter and enter the User Code +

OFF to clear its memory of the low battery signal.

Installing the Transmitters

A variety of RF system transmitters can be used to make up the wireless zones. These

include window/door units, smoke detectors, PIRs, and panic buttons. Zone number

assignments can be from 1 to 63.

1. Set the DIP switches on each 5700 Series transmitter to the appropriate zone number

and House ID. Refer to the Compatible Transmitters Table for zone numbers and

programming information for each particular transmitter.

2. Install each transmitter in accordance with the instructions provided with the

transmitter.

Before permanently mounting the transmitters, make sure reception of each transmitter’s signal at

the proposed mounting location is adequate. To do this, perform a Go/No Go Test, which is

described later in this section.

3. Program the transmitters using the Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

8-6

Wireless Zone Assignments for 5700 Series Transmitters

Each RF zone can be assigned any zone response type, such as entry/exit, interior, perimeter,

etc. (see the Zone Types Definitions section for explanations of each zone type). For 5700

Series transmitters, each response type uses a certain range of zone numbers. Each range of

zone numbers is indicated below:

Zone Type Trans/Zone #

Entry/Exit Burglary 1 through 47

Perimeter Burglary 1 through 47

Interior Burglary 1 through 47

Fire 48 through 63

through 55 * (use 5706)

24-Hour Panic

(silent or audible) 48 through 63

62 or 63 ** (use 5701)

Day/Night Burglary 1 through 47

24-Hour Auxiliary 1 through 47

Note that zones 1-63 can be used, but have the following limitations:

1. Transmitters set for zones 48-55 will transmit once every 12 seconds while the zone is

faulted. Transmitters set for zones 56-63 will transmit once every 3 seconds while

faulted. These two ranges of zone numbers could adversely affect transmitter battery life.

2. Transmitters set for an ID of 32 through 47 will have a 3-minute lockout between

transmissions. Use this last range of zone ID numbers for sensors protecting frequently

used doors or windows to conserve battery life.

* Transmitter IDs 48 through 55 have highest signal priority.

** Transmitter IDs 62 and 63 are unsupervised to allow removal of the 5701 off

premises – signal priority is lower than that of fire, but higher than burglary.

Section 8 – Wireless Zone Expansion

8-7

Compatible 5700 Series Transmitters

Model Product Zone Num. Description

5701 Panic Transmitter 62 or 63 • Programmable for either silent or

audible 24-hour alarm.

5706

5707 Photoelectric Smoke

Detector 48-55 • One-piece smoke detectors with

built-in transmitter.

• Built-in UL Listed 85 dB piezo-

electric alarm sounder and audible

low battery warning.

5711 Slimline Door/ Window

Transmitter 1-63 • Can be used with any closed circuit

sensor.

5715WH Universal Transmitter 1-63 • DIP switch-selectable for fast

response, and open or closed sensor

usage.

• Has a tamper-protected cover.

5716

5716WM Door/Window

Transmitter 1-63 • Can be used with any open or

closed circuit sensor.

• Features a built-in reed switch.

• 5716WM includes magnet.

5742 Audio Discriminator 1-63 • For use in unoccupied areas to

detect the sound of shattering glass

when a window is broken.

5743 Dual Technology

Glassbreak 1-63 • Detects the sound and shock.

Requires the presence of both to

initiate an alarm condition

transmission.

5775 PIR Detector 32-47 • Dual-element passive infrared

detector with built-in selectable

pulse count.

• Note: There is a 3-minute lockout

between fault transmissions to

conserve battery life.

5727 Wireless Keypad House ID • Can be used to turn the burglary

protection on and off.

• Features the same built-in panic

functions as wired keypads.

• Identified as zone “000” (on wired

keypads) when it transmits with a

low battery.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

8-8

Compatible 5700 Series Transmitters

Model Product Zone Num. Description

5827BD Wireless Keypad House ID • Requires use of 5800TM Module.

• Assigned to a partition in 1*48.

• Operates the system similarly to

wired keypads.

• Can indicate system status via its 3

LEDs and sounder.

• Includes 3 panic keys.

• House ID must be set.

ULThe 5711, 5715, and 5716 do not supervise their loop wiring. Therefore, the loop wiring may not

exceed 3 feet.

5800 Series Transmitter Setup

5800 Series transmitters have built-in serial numbers that must be enrolled by the system

using the # 93 Menu Mode Programming, or input to the control via the downloader. 5800

Series transmitters (except 5827, described separately) do not have DIP switches.

Each transmitter’s zone number is programmed into the system in # 93 Menu Mode. Some

transmitters, such as the 5816 and 5817, can support more than one “zone” (referred to as

loops or inputs). On the 5816, for example, the wire connection terminal block is Loop 1, the

reed contact is loop 2. Each loop must be assigned a different zone number.

For button-type transmitters (wireless keys), such as the 5804, 5804BD, 5803, and 5801, you

must assign a unique zone number to each individual button used on the transmitter. Each

button on the transmitter also has a pre-designated loop or input number, which is

automatically displayed when enrolled.

Transmitter Supervision

Except for some transmitters that may be carried off premises (5802, 5802CP, 5803, 5804,

5808BD, 5827, and 5827BD), each transmitter is supervised by a check-in signal that is sent

to the receiver at 70–90 minute intervals. If at least one check-in is not received from each

supervised transmitter within a programmed period (field 1∗31), the “missing” transmitter

number(s) and “CHECK” or “TRBL” will be displayed.

The supervision for a particular transmitter that may be carried off the premises (5801,

5802MN) may be turned off by enrolling it as a “UR” (unsupervised RF) type, as described

later in this manual.

Some 5800 Series transmitters have built-in tamper protection and will annunciate a

“CHECK” or “TRBL” condition if covers are removed.

Section 8 – Wireless Zone Expansion

8-9

Transmitter Input Types

All of the transmitters described have one or more unique factory-assigned input (loop) codes.

Each of the inputs requires its own programming zone (e.g., a 5804’s four-button inputs

require four programming zones).

Transmitters can be programmed as one of the following types:

Type Description

(Supervised RF)

Sends periodic Check-in signals, as well as Fault,

Restore, and Low Battery signals. The transmitter must

remain within the receiver’s range.

(Unsupervised RF)

Sends all the signals that the RF type does, but the

control does not supervise the Check-in signals. The

transmitter may therefore be carried off-premises.

(Unsupervised Button RF)

These only send Fault signals. They only send Low

Battery signals when they are activated (button pressed).

The transmitter may be carried off-premises.

Transmitter Battery Life

• Batteries in the wireless transmitters may last from 4 to 7 years, depending on the

environment, usage, and the specific wireless device being used. Factors such as

humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large swings in temperature may all

reduce the actual battery life in a given installation.

• The wireless system can identify a true low battery situation, thus allowing the dealer or

user of the system time to arrange a change of battery and maintain protection for that

given point within the system.

• Some transmitters (e.g., 5802, 5802CP, and 5803) contain long-life but nonreplaceable

batteries. At the end of their life, the complete unit must be replaced (and a new serial

number enrolled by the control).

• Button-type transmitters, (e.g., 5801, 5802, 5802CP & 5803), should be periodically

tested by the installer for battery life.

Do not install batteries in wireless transmitters until ready to enroll. After enrolling, batteries need

not be removed.

Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters

Model Product

Input

Type Description

5801 Wireless Panic

Transmitter UR or RF • Has four pushbuttons, each with

a unique input (loop) code.

• Programmable responses (e.g.,

Panic, Arm–Stay, Arm–Away,

Disarm, etc.

• For arming/disarming functions,

button must be assigned to a

user code when “adding a user.”

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

8-10

Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters (cont’d)

Model Product

Input

Type Description

5802

5802CP

Pendant (Personal

Emergency Transmitter)

Belt Clip (Personal

Emergency Transmitter)

BR Only • Has single pushbutton.

• Usually be programmed for

response type of 24 Hr. Audible

or 24 Hr. Silent (other zone

responses are possible).

• Contains a nonreplaceable

battery. At the end of the

battery’s life, the entire unit

must be replaced.

• If using for arming/disarming,

the button must be assigned to a

user code when “adding a user.”

5802MN Miniature (Personal

Emergency Transmitter) UR or RF • Has single pushbutton

• Usually programmed for a respon

• If using for arming/disarming,

the button must be assigned to a

user code when “adding a user.”

• Contains a replaceable battery.

5804 Wireless Key

Transmitter BR Only • Has four pushbuttons, each with

a unique input (loop) code.

• Programmable responses (e.g.,

Arm–Stay, Arm–Away, Disarm,

etc.).

• Contains a replaceable battery.

• If using for arming/disarming,

the button must be assigned to a

user code when “adding a user.”

5806/5807

5808 Wireless Photoelectric

Smoke Detectors RF • One-piece smoke detectors with

built-in transmitter.

• 5806 and 5807 UL Listed for

residential fire usage only. 5808

UL Listed for commercial fire.

5816 Door/Window

Transmitter RF • Has two unique input (loop)

codes: one for a wired closed

circuit contact loop; the other for

a built-in reed switch (used in

conjunction with a magnet).

5817 Multi-Point Universal

Transmitter RF • Has three unique input (loop)

codes: one for a “Primary”

contact loop with programmable

options; the others for two

“Auxiliary” closed circuit contact

loops.

Section 8 – Wireless Zone Expansion

8-11

Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters (cont’d)

Model Product

Input

Type Description

5818 Recessed Transmitter RF • Reed switch magnetic contact

sensor that is easily concealed in

the frame and edge of a door or

window.

• Has a single unique input (loop)

code.

5827 Wireless Keypad House ID • Can be used to turn the

burglary protection on and off.

• Features the same built-in panic

functions as wired keypads.

• The keypad is identified as zone

“000" on wired keypads when it

transmits with a low battery.

5827BD Wireless Bi-directional

Keypad House ID • (Used with 5800TM Module)

• Operates the system similarly to

wired keypads

• Can indicate system status via

its 3 LEDs and sounder.

• Includes 3 panic keys.

• House ID must be set.

• Requires 5800TM Transmitter

Module (must be enabled in #93

Menu Mode –Device

Programming and assigned to a

partition in 1*48

5849 Glassbreak Detector RF • Requires both sound and shock

of breaking glass to cause alarm

to be transmitted.

• Has unique input code.

5890 PIR Detector RF • Dual-element passive infrared

detector/transmitter with built-

in selectable pulse count.

• Has unique input code.

• Note: There is a 3-minute lock-

out between fault transmissions

to conserve battery life.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

8-12

Checkout Procedure for Wireless Zones

Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode

Use the Transmitter Sniffer Mode to test that transmitters have all been properly

programmed.

1. Enter [Installer Code] + [#] + [3]. Keypad(s) will display all zone numbers of wireless

units programmed for that partition.

2. Fault each wireless zone, causing each device to transmit. As the system receives a

signal from each of the transmitters, the zone number of that transmitter will

disappear from the display.

A transmitter not "enrolled" (5800 Series) or whose DIP switch is not set correctly (5700 Series)

will not turn off its zone number.

3. To exit the Transmitter Sniffer Mode, enter [Installer Code] + [1].

Be sure to perform the Transmitter Sniffer Mode Test for every partition that has wireless

transmitters programmed.

Go/No Go Test Mode

Before mounting transmitters permanently, conduct Go/No Go Tests to verify adequate

signal strength and reorient or relocate transmitters if necessary.

Make sure that all partitions are disarmed when performing this test. Since the wireless

receiver gain is reduced, checking in this mode assists in determining good mounting

locations for the transmitters, and verifies that the RF transmission has sufficient signal

amplitude margin for the installed system.

1. Enter [Installer Code] + [5].

Note: For multi-partition systems, make sure all partitions are disarmed before entering

this mode.

2. Once transmitters are placed in their desired locations and the approximate length of

wire to be run to sensors is connected to the transmitter's screw terminals, fault each

transmitter.

Note: Do not conduct this test with your hand wrapped around the transmitter, as this will

cause inaccurate results.

• If a single receiver is used, the keypad will beep three times to indicate signal

reception. If two receivers are used, the keypad will beep once if the first receiver

received the signal, twice if the second receiver received the signal, and three times if

both receivers heard the signal (which is desirable for redundant configurations).

• If the keypad does not beep, reorient or move the transmitter to another location.

Usually a few inches in either direction is all that is required.

3. Mount the transmitter according to the instructions provided with the transmitter.

4. Exit the mode by entering [Installer Code] + [1].

9-1

SECTION 9

Relay Outputs

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

Relay Basics

♦

Wiring the 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Relay Basics

Relays, used in conjunction with this control panel, are programmable switches that can be

used to perform many different functions. They can be used to turn lights on and off, control

sounders and doors, or for status indications. In this system, each device must be

programmed as to how to act (ACTION), when to activate (START), and when to deactivate

(STOP). Each of these is described in Relay Programming in the #93 Menu Mode

Programming section.

This control supports up to eight 4204 or sixteen 4204CF Relay Modules. Each 4204 Module

provides 4 relays with Form C (normally-open and normally-closed) contacts. This means

you can program up to 32 relays to activate and de-activate, as desired. Each 4204CF

Module adds two additional style-Y supervised bell outputs to the system. If 4204CF

Modules are used, only relays 1 and 3 on each module can be programmed. The other 2

relays (relays 2 and 4) on each module are used for supervision purposes.

This section is used to program relays to activate in response to a programmed condition (i.e.,

an alarm, fault of a zone, etc.). The system can also be programmed to activate relays at specific

times of day by using the #80 Scheduling Menu Mode–Time Driven Events function.

Wiring the 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules

1. Set the 4204 or 4204CF's DIP switches for a device address between 01 and 15 that is not

being used by another device (keypads, RF receivers, etc.).

The relay module will not operate until the device address you have chosen is enabled in the

control's

Device Programming

in the

#93 Menu Mode Programming

section.

2. Mount the 4204 and 4204CF Modules as per the instructions provided with these

modules. Connect the 4204/4204CF Module(s) to the control's Keypad 1 terminals (11-

14) when mounted remotely from the control (they may be wired to Port 2 when mounted

on or within the control's cabinet). Use the flying lead cable or the screw terminals

provided with each relay module to make connections.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

9-2

3. When mounted remotely, homerun each module back to the control. The table below

shows the maximum wire run lengths from the control to each 4204. Refer to the

instructions provided with the 4204CF for its maximum permissible wire lengths.

Wire Gauge Maximum Length

#22 125 feet

#20 200 feet

#18 300 feet

#16 500 feet

SWITCH 4 2 0 4 ADDRESS SETTINGS

POSITION ("—" means "OFF")

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON —

ON ON — — ON ON — — ON ON — — ON ON — —

ON ON ON ON — — — — ON ON ON ON — — — —

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON — — — — — — — —

12345

➞

13 14 15 16

OFF

➞

DIP SWITCH

FOR SETTING DEVICE ADDRESS

AND ENABLING/DISABLING TAMPER

➞

COVER TAMPER (REED) SWITCH

➞

TB1

4204

TB2

4-PIN CONSOLE PLUG

➞

121110987654321

▲

RELAY

TYPICAL

(SHOWN "OFF")

EITHER OR BOTH

CAN BE USED

➞

DATA IN

FROM CONTROL

(–) GROUND

DATA OUT

TO CONTROL

(+) 12V

YEL

BLK

GRN

RED

Figure 9-1a: 4204 Relay Module

Section 9 – Relay Outputs

9-3

Figure 9-1b: 4204CF Relay Module

SWITCH 4204CF ADDRESS SETTINGS

POSITION ("—" means "OFF")

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON —

ON ON — — ON ON — — ON ON — — ON ON — —

ON ON ON ON — — — — ON ON ON ON — — — —

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON — — — — — — — —

12345

➞

OFF

➞

13 14 15 16

DIP SWITCH

FOR SETTING DEVICE

ADDRESS AND

ENABLING/DISABLING

TAMPER

➞

COVER TAMPER (REED) SWITCH

➞

TB1

TB2

4-PIN CONSOLE PLUG

➞

121110987654321

▲

EITHER OR BOTH

CAN BE USED

➞

DATA IN

FROM CONTROL

(–) GROUND

DATA OUT

TO CONTROL

YEL

BLK

GRN

RED (+) 12V; SUPPLIES POWER TO MODULE

CIRCUITRY (INCLUDING NOTIFICATION

APPLIANCE RELAY COILS). CURRENT

DRAIN AT 12V IS: 25 mA + (80 mA PER

ACTIVE OUTPUT)

NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE AND

CONSOLE DATA OUTPUTS ARE

POWER LIMITED

–

NOTIFICATION

APPLIANCE B

2K EOLR

#610-7

POLARIZED

NOTIFICATION

APPLIANCE

–

NOTIFICATION

APPLIANCE A

2K EOLR

#610-7

}

–

POWER FOR

NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE A,

NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE B

8-28VDC OR VFW. UP TO 2.4A

DEPENDING ON BELL CURRENT

- ALARM POLARITY

SHOWN

- EACH OUTPUT

PROVIDES

STYLE Y

SUPERVISION

- EACH OUTPUT

RATED 1.2A MAX

- USE

NOTIFICATION

APPLIANCES

COMPATIBLE

WITH

NOTIFICATION

APPLIANCE

POWER SUPPLY

VOLTAGE

RATING

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

9-4

10-1

SECTION 10

4285/4286 VIP Module

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

General Information

♦

Mounting the VIP Module

♦

Wiring the VIP Module

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

ULThe 4285/4286 VIP Module is not permissible for commercial fire or UL commercial burglary

installations.

General Information

The 4285/4286 VIP Module is an add-on accessory that permits the user to access the

security system (and relays) via a TouchTone telephone, either from the premises or by

calling the premises from a remote location. Only one VIP Module can be used in a security

system. This module must be enabled as Device Address 4 in Device Programming in the

#93 Menu Mode Programming section, and must be assigned to a partition.

The 4285/4286 VIP Module offers the following features:

• Allows the user to receive synthesized voice messages over the phone regarding the

status of the security system.

• Allows the user to arm and disarm the security system and perform most other

commands using the telephone keypad.

• Allows the user to control relays using the telephone keypad.

• Provides voice annunciation over the phone to confirm any command that is entered.

• Announces many of the same words that would normally be displayed on an alpha

keypad under the same system conditions. Refer to the words in bold on the Alpha

Vocabulary list found in the #93 Menu Mode Programming section.

• Can be supervised for connection to control panel (annunciated and reported as zone

804).

Detailed operating instructions for phone access to the security system are provided with the VIP

Module. In addition, a

Phone Access User's Guide

is supplied with the VIP Module for the user

of the system.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

10-2

Mounting the VIP Module

The VIP Module may be mounted in the control cabinet if space is available or, if this is not

possible, on the side of the cabinet or adjacent to it. Pry off the VIP Module's cover prior to

wiring.

1. When the VIP Module is mounted inside the control cabinet, attach it to the cabinet's

interior surface with 2-faced adhesive tape. You may leave the module's cover off if it is

mounted within the cabinet.

Do not mount the VIP Module on the cabinet door or attempt to attach it to the PC board.

2. When the module is to be mounted outside the cabinet, use the screw holes at the rear to

mount horizontally or vertically (2-faced adhesive tape may be used, if preferred). You

can bring wires out from the side or back (a round breakout is also available on the back).

When you complete the module's mounting and wiring, you should install the module's

cover (with label affixed, as indicated next).

3. Affix the 4285/4286 connections label (supplied separately) to the inside of the VIP

Module's cover if the cover is used. Otherwise, affix the label to the inside of the control

cabinet's door.

Wiring the VIP Module

The 4285/4286 is wired between the control panel and the premises’ handset(s) (see Figure

10-1). It listens for touch tones on the phone line and reports them to the control panel.

During on-premises phone access, it powers the premises’ phones; during off-premises phone

access, it seizes the line from the premises’ phones and any answering machines.

1. Make 12V (+) and (–) and data-in and data- out connections from the VIP Module to the

control, using the connector cable supplied with the VIP Module. These are the same

connections as for remote keypads.

2. Insert the keyed connector at the other end into the mating header on the VIP Module.

3. Connect terminals 1 through 7 on the VIP Module as shown.

Terminal Block Connections

4285/4286 Terminal Connects to:

1. Phone In (Tip) green wire of direct connect cord

2. Phone In (Ring) red wire of direct connect cord

3. Phone Out (Tip) brown wire of direct connect cord

4. Phone Out (Ring) gray wire of direct connect cord

5. No Connection

6. Audio Out 1* Speaker

7. Audio Out 1* Speaker

*Supported by the 4286 only

Use an RJ31X Jack with the phone cable supplied with the control. Use an additional RJ31X

jack and a Direct Connect cord to make connections to the 4285/4286.

Section 10 – 4285/4286 VIP Module

10-3

Figure 10-1: 4285/4286 VIP Module Connections

1. Make all connections exactly as shown in

Figure 10-1

. This is essential, even if the system is

not connected to a central station. The 4285/4286 will not function if this is not done. If

the leads on the cable are too short to reach their assigned terminals, splice additional wires to

them, as required.

2. If Touch-tones are not present following phone access to the security system

via an on-

premises phone

, try reversing the wires connected to terminals 3 and 4 on the 4285/4286.

If the phone plug is disconnected from the control, the premise’s phones will not operate.

ANSWERING

MACHINE

NOT INSTALLER

ADJUSTABLE

UNUSED

▲

VOICE MODULE

123456 7

YELLOW: TO DATA OUT (term. 14)

NO CONNECTION

RED: TO AUX (+) (term. 11)

BLACK: TO AUX. GROUND (–) (term. 12)

GREEN: TO DATA IN (term. 13)

CONNECTOR

WITH FLYING

LEADS

TO CONTROL

PANEL

TERMINALS

USED FOR

KEYPAD

CONNECTIONS

PREMISES

ANSWERING

MACHINE AND

PHONES

▲

RJ31X

JACK

▲▲

INCOMING TELCO LINE

TO GND TERMINAL

ON CONTROL

4285

TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS

1 - TIP

2 - RING PHONE INPUT

3 - TIP

4 - RING PHONE OUTPUT

5 - GROUND

6 -

7 - AUDIO OUT 1

(FOR FUTURE USE)

}

GRAY

BROWN

GREEN

RED

VISTA-100

CONTROL

JACK

RED

MAIN

DIALER

JACK

RJ31X

JACK

CALLER

ID UNIT

DIRECT

CONNECT

CORD

8-CONDUCTOR

DOUBLE PLUG

CORD (SUPPLIED)

NOT USED

GRAY

BROWN

GREEN

Control

Panel

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

10-4

11-1

SECTION 11

Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) Unit

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

General Information

♦

AAV Module Operation

♦

Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections

♦

Programming Audio Alarm Verification Module Options

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

ULThe Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) feature is not UL Listed.

General Information

An Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) Module (also known as two-way voice), such as the Eagle

1241, is an add-on accessory that permits voice dialog between an operator at a central

station and a person at the alarm installation, for the purpose of alarm verification. This

feature is supported only if Alarm reports are programmed to be sent to the primary phone

number.

Make connections from Eagle 1241 Module terminals 7 and 8 to the control's zone 5

terminals 22 and 23. The purpose of this connection is to silence and restore the sounders at

the premises. It is also used to postpone noncritical dialer reports while the AAV session is

in progress. Note that zone 5 is then no longer available as a protection zone. When using

the AAV, zone 5 must be assigned a zone response type (e.g., response type 10), and option

1*60 must be enabled to silence sounders on the premises.

AAV Module Operation

After all messages have been sent during a reporting session to the primary phone number,

the control will trigger the AAV if at least one of the messages was an Alarm report. If

Contact ID format is selected for the primary phone number, and a Cancel report code is

enabled, the control will send a Listen-in to Follow" message (Event Code 606), which signals

the 685 (rev. 4.6 or higher) to hold the phone connection for 1 minute.

Once triggering occurs, the control will give up the phone line to the AAV Module, without

breaking connection with the central station. During the time the AAV is active, all sirens

and all continuous keypad sounds in all partitions will be shut off. When the AAV indicates

that the audio alarm verification session is completed, all keypad sounds will be restored.

Sirens will be restored if the alarm timeout period has not expired.

As part of its fail-safe software, the control will limit all audio alarm verification sessions to

15 minutes. This is because once the session begins, the AAV Module controls the duration.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

11-2

If a new fire alarm should occur during a session, the control will break the phone connection

and send the new Fire Alarm report, then re-trigger the AAV Mode. All other dialer

messages triggered during ongoing conversation will be held until either the AAV Module

signals that it is inactive, or the 15-minute timeout occurs.

The AAV Module is triggered via the use of a 4204 Relay as shown in Figure 11-1. The start

and stop conditions for that relay must be set to choice 60, "Audio Alarm Verification" during

Relay Programming in the #93 Menu Mode Programming section.

Some AAV modules allow remote triggering by ring detection at the alarm installation. If

this option is selected, it may defeat modem download and 4285/4286 VIP Module remote

access capability. The DIP switch settings shown in Figure 11-1 disable remote AAV Module

trigger option. The control also requires that the AAV Module trigger type is falling edge,

which is set in DIP switch settings shown.

685 Receiver software must be rev. 4.6 or higher. Earlier versions will not hold the phone line

connection.

Contact ID code for "Listen-in-to-follow" is 606. Contact ID is the only reporting format that will

send a "listen-in-to-follow."

Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections

Connect the Audio Alarm Verification Module's falling edge trigger input (terminal 5 on

Eagle Model 1241) to a 4204 Relay Module, as shown in Figure 11-1.

If also using a 4285/4286 VIP Module, be sure to follow the corresponding diagram when making

connections.

Programming Audio Alarm Verification Module Options

1. With at least one 2-line alpha keypad (6139/6139R) wired and set to a proper address,

temporarily apply power to the system.

2. Enter Data Field Programming Mode: [Installer Code] + 8 0 0 0.

3. Program the following data fields:

*45 PRIMARY DIALER FORMAT: Set for 1 (Contact ID).

1*60 ZONE 5/AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION: Set for 1.

If you need more information about actual programming procedures, see

The Mechanics of

Programming

section.

4. Zone 5 must be programmed for response type 10 and the EOLR must be removed,

regardless of whether or not EOLR resistors have been enabled in field *41.

Zone 5 is no longer available as a protection zone.

5. Program a 4204 Relay to trip on Zone Type/Sys. Op. 60 Audio Alarm Verification (see

Relay Programming in the #93 Menu Mode Programming section.).

6. Press *99 to exit Program Mode.

Section 11 – Audio Alarm Verification

11-3

Figure 11-1: Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections

If the phone plug is disconnected at the control, the premise’s phones will not operate. If a

problem exists, remove the phone plug at the RJ31X to resume premises phone operation.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

▲

MODEL EAGLE SECURITY

1241

REFER TO

AAV MODULE

INSTRUCTIONS

FOR CONNECTIONS

TO AUDIO SPEAKERS

AND MICROPHONE

PREMISES

ANSWERING

MACHINE AND

PHONES

ANSWERING

MACHINE

▲▲

INCOMING TELCO LINE

V+

GND

1 2 3

RELAY 1, SHOWN

“OFF”

NO NC C

4204 RELAY

MODULE

VISTA-100

CONTROL

JACK

RED

GREEN

GRAY

BROWN

ZONE 5+

ZONE 5-

CONTROL

GND

Notes:

1.Remove any EOL

resistor from control

panel terminals 22 &

23, if any present.

8-CONDUCTOR

DOUBLE PLUG

CORD (SUPPLIED)

RJ31X

JACK

BROWN

GRAY

CALLER

ID UNIT

1 2 3 4 5 6

All switches should

be “off” except

switch 5, which

should be “on.”

CONTROL

PANEL

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

11-4

12-1

SECTION 12

J2 Trigger Outputs

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

General Information

♦

Remote Keypad Sounder Operation and Wiring

♦

Remote Keyswitch Operation and Wiring

♦

5140LED Indicator Module

♦

Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment

♦

Event Log Printer Connections

♦

Direct Wire Downloading

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

General Information

The J2 connector, located in the upper right-hand corner of the main PCB, provides 1 input

(labeled INPUT 1) and seven trigger outputs (labeled OUT 1 - OUT 7) that can be used to

interface to the following:

• Remote keypad sounder

• UL Listed keyswitch

• 5140LED Indicator Module

• Auxiliary alarm signaling equipment such as an ADEMCO Long Range Subscriber Radio

• Event logging serial printer (via the 4100SM Interface Module)

• PC computer used to direct-wire download the panel's programming information (via the

4100SM Interface Module)

The trigger output ratings are listed below. Note that all outputs are power-limited.

Outputs 1, 5, 7: LOW: 2K to ground

HIGH: 10-14 VDC @ 20 mA max

Remaining Outputs: LOW: 1K to ground

HIGH: 10-14 VDC through 5K

The pin assignments for the J2 connector are shown in Figure 12-1. Use a 4142TR 9-wire

trigger cable (1 supplied) to interface with this connector. The panel does not supervise field

wiring connected to this connector.

Program fields 3*19 and 3*20 are used to select the functions of INPUT 1 and OUT 1-7 as

indicated in Figure 12-1.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

12-2

When using J2 for LORRA, Input 1 (Pin 9) is supervised by Zone 973, which is used for

supervision of the LORRA XMIT OKAY signal. Assign a 24-hr. zone response type (5 or 19) to

this zone.

Figure 12-1: J2 Pin Assignments and Functions

Remote Keypad Sounder Operation and Wiring

An optional Amseco PAL 328N Piezo Sounder can be used to duplicate the sounds produced

by the keypad's built-in sounder. The panel will remote all sounds (i.e., alarm, trouble,

chime, entry/exit, etc.) produced by the keypad's built-in sounder except for the short beeps

associated with keypad key depression. One application of this feature might be to produce

chime sounds at a distant location from the panel's keypads. If used, program field 3*20

must be set to "0" (factory default) to enable the remote sounder option, and field *15 must be

set to the desired partition number. The PAL 328N must be connected to J2/OUT 5 as shown

in Figure 12-2.

Figure 12-2: Remote Keypad Sounder Wiring

123456 78 9

FIELD 3*19 = 0 FIELD 3*19 = 0 FIELD 3*19 = 0 FIELD 3*19 = 1

FIELD 3*20 = 0 FIELD 3*20 = 1 FIELD 3*20 = 2

(DEFAULT)

LORRA LORRA LORRA

XMIT OKAY XMIT OKAY XMIT OKAY PRINTER DTR

KEYSWITCH 5140LED AS SELECTED

OPEN/CLOSE ARMED LED AC FAIL LED IN FIELD 3*20

REMOTE KEYSWITCH 5140LED AS SELECTED

CONSOLE SOUNDER READY LED DIALER 2 FAIL LED IN FIELD 3*20

FIRE ALARM FIRE ALARM FIRE ALARM PRINTER RXD

FIRE FIRE FIRE AS SELECTED

SUPERVISORY SUPERVISORY SUPERVISORY IN FIELD 3*20

BURGLARY BURGLARY 5140LED AS SELECTED

ALARM ALARM COMM FAIL LED IN FIELD 3*20

TROUBLE TROUBLE TROUBLE AS SELECTED

IN FIELD 3*20

PANIC ALARM PANIC ALARM 5140LED AS SELECTED

DIALER 1 FAIL LED

IN FIELD 3*20

INPUT 1

GROUND

OUT 1

OUT 4

OUT 7

OUT 3

OUT 6

OUT 2

OUT 5

J2 CONNECTOR

MAKE CONNECTIONS USING 4142TR (1 SUPPLIED)

BLACK

RED

–

AMSECO PAL-328N

PIEZO SOUNDER

(10MA)

123456789

INPUT 1

GROUND

OUT 1

OUT 4

OUT 7

OUT 3

OUT 6

OUT 2

OUT 5

J2 CONNECTOR

(VIOLET)

(GRAY)

(YELLOW)

(WHITE)

(RED)

(GREEN)

(BROWN)

BLUE

BLACK

4142TR CABLE

Section 12 – J2 Trigger Outputs

12-3

Remote Keyswitch Operation and Wiring

An optional UL Listed remote keyswitch, such as the ADEMCO 4146, can be used for remote

arming/disarming of the burglary portion of the system and for remotely silencing alarms. If

used, the following must be programmed:

1. Field *15 to assign the keyswitch to a partition (1-8), or 9 to silence fire bell if fire alarm

occurs; enter 0 to disable.

2. Zone 7 must be assigned a non-zero response type.

3. Field 3*20 must be set to "1" if you are using J2/OUT 1 and 5 to operate keyswitch

ARMED and READY LEDs (if keyswitch provides LEDs).

4. *40 to enable Open/Close report for keyswitch.

Wire the keyswitch as shown in Figure 12-3. The tamper switch need not be used for fire or

UL Household Burglary installations. For UL Commercial Burglary installations, the

tamper switch must be wired to zone 8, and zone 8 must be programmed for Day

Trouble/Night Alarm (zone type 5). When the keyswitch is removed from the wall, the

tamper switch will open, causing an alarm or trouble on zone 8, and causing the control to

disable keyswitch operation until the associated partition is disarmed from a keypad.

(ARMED) (READY)

RED GREEN

820Ω820Ω

TAMPER

SWITCH

(N.C.)

LOCK

SWITCH (N.O.)

2000

OHMS

2000

OHMS

EOLR

TO ZONE 8 + (TERM 27)

TO ZONE 7 + (TERM 25)

TO ZONE 7/ZONE 8 – (TERM 26)

▲▲

4146 KEYSWITCH

BROKEN LINES REPRESENT

INSTALLER WIRING CONNECTIONS

TO OUT 1 (J2 PIN 7)

TO OUT 5 (J2 PIN 6)

TO GND (J2 PIN 8)

Figure 12-3: Remote Keyswitch Wiring

Keyswitch Operation

The VISTA-128FB allows 2 modes of keyswitch operation. When field *15 is set to a partition

(1-8), the keyswitch operates as follows:

With System Disarmed and No Alarms Present:

A momentary short across zone 7 will arm the partition in the AWAY mode, and a short held

for more than 10 seconds will arm the partition in the STAY mode. A subsequent short will

disarm the partition. The keyswitch LEDs will indicate that the partition has armed (see

table below).

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

12-4

Faulted zones must either be corrected or bypassed before the system will arm.

ULIn commercial fire installations, mount the keyswitch next to a keypad. The keypad will display the

UL-required "FIRE BELL SILENCED" indication when the keyswitch is used to silence a fire alarm.

With Alarms Present:

A momentary short across Zone 7 will silence alarm bell and keypad sounds, and will disarm

the partition if it was armed. The keyswitch LEDs provide a memory of alarm indication (see

table below). A subsequent short across Zone 7 will clear the alarm memory indication and

reset 2-wire smoke and glassbreak detectors (if used).

When field *15 is set to "9," the keyswitch operates as follows:

A momentary short across Zone 7 will silence alarm bell sounds (i.e., turn off Bell 1, Bell 2

and the aux relay if programmed for alarms) only if a fire alarm is present. Outputs will re-

sound automatically if a new fire alarm condition is detected. Burglary alarms will not

trigger the bell output until a User Code + OFF is entered at the keypad. A momentary

short has no effect if there are no fire alarms present. This mode is used when you want to

provide the fire department with keyswitch silence capability without compromising the

burglary system's security.

LED indications are defined as follows:

GREEN RED MEANING

OFF OFF DISARMED & NOT READY

ON OFF DISARMED & READY

OFF ON STEADY ARMED AWAY

OFF SLOW FLASH ARMED STAY

OFF RAPID FLASH ALARM MEMORY

Open/Close reporting for the keyswitch is enabled in field *40, and the keyswitch reports as User

5140LED Indicator Module

An optional 5140LED Indicator Module can be used in municipalities which require

dedicated indicators for communicator fault status. The 5140LED provides the following

indicators:

1. AC POWER:

• ON if AC power is present.

• OFF if AC power is not present.

Section 12 – J2 Trigger Outputs

12-5

2. COMM FAILURE:

• ON if maximum number of attempts were made (field 3*21) to transmit a message to

the central station. Enter [User Code] + OFF following a successful transmission to

turn off.

• OFF if normal.

3. DIALER 1 FAULT:

• ON if the main dialer line is faulted. Correct problem and then enter [User Code] +

OFF to turn off.

• OFF if normal.

4. DIALER 2 FAULT:

• ON if the backup dialer line is faulted. Correct problem and then enter [User Code] +

OFF to turn off.

• OFF if normal.

If used, program field 3*20 must be set to "2," and the 5140LED Module must be connected

to J2/OUT 1, 3, 4, 5 as shown in the diagram below. It is designed to be mounted into a

standard single-gang electrical box and installed as follows:

1. Pull wires from the panel's J2 connector through an opening in the single-gang box and

splice these wires to the module's flying leads. Solderless splices may be used.

2. Mount the module's PC board onto one side of the PC board retainer bracket (supplied).

3. Slide the PC board retainer bracket into the box and fasten with screws (supplied).

4. Mount the stainless steel decorative cover (supplied) onto the box.

Figure 12-4: 5140LED Indicator Module

5140LED MODULE

AC POWER

4142TR CABLE WIRES COLORS

▲

AC POWER BROWN

DIALER 2 FAULT GREEN

COMM FAILURE ORANGE

DIALER 1 FAULT YELLOW

COMM FAILURE

DIALER 1 FAULT

DIALER 2 FAULT

FUTURE USE

▲

BLUE

RED

BLACK

5140LED MODULE

WIRES COLORS

▲

TO AUX PWR 1

OUTPUT

–

(TO TERM

123456789

INPUT 1

GROUND

OUT 1

OUT 4

OUT 7

OUT 3

OUT

OUT 2

OUT 5

J2 CONNECTOR

(VIOLET)

(GRAY)

(YELLOW)

(WHITE)

(RED)

(GREEN)

(BROWN)

BLUE

BLACK

4142TR CABLE

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

12-6

Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment

The J2 connector can be used to provide triggers for the following conditions:

• Fire alarm

• Burglary/audible panic alarm

• Silent panic/duress alarm

• Fire supervisory

• Trouble

• Opening/closing (arming/disarming)

These triggers may be used to trip auxiliary alarm signaling equipment such as ADEMCO's

7720, 7720ULF, and 7920SE Long Range Radios. Note that not all of these triggers are

available for all settings of field 3*20. See Figure 12-1 J2 Pin Assignments and Functions

shown earlier for configuration of the J2 triggers.

The open/close, fire alarm, fire supervisory, burglary/audible panic alarm, silent panic/duress

alarm, and trouble triggers are common to all partitions and must be enabled for each

partition (data field 2*20). The open/close trigger is LOW when all enabled partitions are

armed, and HIGH when any enabled partition is disarmed. The remaining triggers are

normally LOW and go HIGH when the corresponding condition occurs in at least one enabled

partition. The fire and burglary/audible panic alarm triggers remain HIGH until a [User

Code] + OFF is entered in all enabled partition(s) which display these conditions. The silent

panic/duress trigger works the same way, except that it is momentary when initiated by

duress. The fire supervisory and trouble triggers remain HIGH until the underlying faults

are corrected and the [User Code] + OFF is entered in all enabled partition(s) which display

these conditions.

Figures 12-5a, b, and c show how to make connections to the 7720, 7720ULF, and 7920SE

Long Range Radios.

Section 12 – J2 Trigger Outputs

12-7

Figure 12-5a: Connections to 7720 Long Range Radio

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

7720 RADIO

(USE 7720 ULF INSTEAD

FOR COMMERCIAL FIRE

INSTALLATIONS)

SEE 7720 INSTRUCTIONS FOR

MORE DETAILED INSTALLATION

INFORMATION

FAULT

4142TR

CABLE

4142TR

CABLE

WIRE

COLORS

FAULT

ZONE 1

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

GROUND

RADIO FAULT (PROGRAM FOR SHORT ON FAULT)

GROUND

FIRE ALARM

BURG/AUDIBLE PANIC ALARM

TROUBLE (ZONE TROUBLE, TELCO FAULT, ETC.)

SILENT PANIC/DURESS ALARM

BLACK

BLUE

BROWN

GREEN

YELLOW

RED

WHITE

GRAY

VIOLET INPUT 1

GROUND

OUT 1

OUT 2

OUT 4

OUT 7

OUT 3

OUT 6

OUT 5

J2 CONNECTOR

NOTES:

• MOUNT THE 7720 WITHIN 3 FEET OF THE C-COM. RUN WIRING FROM C-COM TO 7720 IN CONDUIT.

7720 WIRING DIAGRAM

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

12-8

Figure 12-5b: Connections to 7720ULF Long Range Radio

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

7720 ULF RADIO

SEE 7720 ULF INSTRUCTIONS FOR

MORE DETAILED INSTALLATION

INFORMATION

FAULT

4142TR

CABLE

4142TR

CABLE

WIRE

COLORS

FAULT

ZONE 1

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

GND

FIRE SUPERVISORY

FIRE ALARM

BURG/AUDIBLE PANIC ALARM

TROUBLE (ZONE TROUBLE, TELCO FAULT, ETC.)

SILENT PANIC/DURESS ALARM

BLACK

BLUE

BROWN

GREEN

YELLOW

RED

WHITE

GRAY

VIOLET INPUT 1

GROUND

OUT 1

OUT 2

OUT 4

OUT 7

OUT 3

OUT 6

OUT 5

J2 CONNECTOR

NOTES:

• MOUNT THE 7720 WITHIN 3 FEET OF THE C-COM. RUN WIRING FROM C-COM TO 7720ULF IN CONDUIT.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

- CUT RESISTOR JUMPERS Z1-Z5.

- DO NOT USE 2k EOL RESISTOR.

- PROGRAM 7720 ULF FOR SLAVE

OPERATION. PROGRAM ZONES 1-4 AS

ALARM ZONES AND ZONE 5 AS A

TROUBLE ZONE.

GROUND

ZONE 5

7720 ULF WIRING DIAGRAM

RADIO FAULT

(PROGRAM FOR SHORT ON FAULT)

Section 12 – J2 Trigger Outputs

12-9

123456789

J2 CONNECTOR

(YELLOW)

BLUE

(BROWN)

(RED)

(WHITE)

BLACK

(GRAY)

(VIOLET)

OUT 5

OUT 1

GROUND

INPUT 1

4142TR CABLE WIRES COLORS

7920SE RADIO

(GREEN)

OUT 4

OUT 7

OUT 3

OUT 6

OUT 2

4142TR CABLE

4.7K

(NOTE)

ZONE 1

TB2

TB1

CONNECT TO POLLING

LOOP GROUND SCREW

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE 5

FAULT

CABINET GROUND

EARTH GROUND

SEE 7920SE INST. INSTR. FOR

INSTRUCTIONS ON POWERING

GROUND

FIRE ALARM

SILENT PANIC ALARM

FIRE SUPERVISORY

TROUBLE

BURGLARY/AUDIBLE

PANIC ALARM

NOTES:

1. The 7920SE cabinet is at circuit ground

potential and must be isolated from earth

ground to avoid earth ground faults.

2. Enable trigger supervision pulses (2*21)

when 7920SE mounted more than 3 feet

from control. Run wires from control to

7920SE in conduit and use PVC conduit or

equivalent means to isolate cabinets of

each unit.

Figure 12-5c: Connections to 7920SE Long Range Radio

Event Log Printer Connections

The VISTA-128FB's event log can be printed on a local serial printer. If used, program field

3*19 must be set to "1."

This setting overrides the functions selected for INPUT 1 and OUT 2 made in field 3*20.

Connect a UL EDP Listed serial printer to the J2 connector using an ADEMCO 4100SM

Interface module. Refer to the Event Log Options section for wiring connections, printer

configuration, and a description of the keypad commands which initiate event log printing.

If earth ground fault sensing is enabled:

1. You may get an earth ground fault indication when the 4100SM Module is clipped

directly onto a side-wall of the VISTA-128FB cabinet. If this occurs, use an insulator to

insulate the 4100SM's clip-on bracket from the VISTA-128FB cabinet side-wall. Later

production versions of the 4100SM have the clip-on bracket isolated from the circuit

ground (Terminal 7) and will not have this problem.

2. You may also get an earth ground fault indication if you use a printer (or PC) which has

a 3-prong, grounded power cord. If this occurs, first verify that Pin 1 (chassis ground) is

isolated from Pin 7 (signal ground) on the 4100SM's RS232 connector. Early production

versions of the 4100SM have an unmarked, 3/8' long, bare wire jumper lying near the Pin

1 side of the RS232 connector, which must be cut to isolate these pins. Then verify that

these pins are isolated on your printer's RS232 connector. Follow the instructions

provided with your printer to isolate these pins, if required.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

12-10

Direct Wire Downloading

The VISTA-128FB can be downloaded without using a modem or telephone line, but by using

a 4100SM Serial Module and V-LINK or Compass Downloading Software. This method of

downloading is referred to as DIRECT WIRE downloading. Connect a PC, which runs the

downloading software to the 4100SM Module as specified in the module's instructions.

Connect the 4100SM to the panel's J2 header. Refer to the Downloading Primer section for

wiring connections.

Direct-wire downloading can be initiated by following the procedures described in the

V-LINK or Compass manual.

13-1

SECTION 13

7820 Long Range Radio

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

General Information

♦

Wiring the Long Range Radio to the Control

♦

Programming the Control for the Long Range Radio

♦

Trouble Messages

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

General Information

The control can support the 7820 Long Range Radio (LRR). All messages programmed to be

sent via the phone lines may also be enabled to be sent via the LRR. These messages will be

transmitted in Contact ID format regardless of the format programmed for the control in

fields 45 and 47.

It is recommended that, if possible you use Contact ID format for the main dialer. If Contact ID is

not used, certain types of reports, such as “Listen To Follow” (606)will not be sent at all.

Supervision of the LRR

The data lines between the control and the LRR can be supervised, as well as certain

functions in the radio. If communication is lost or a trouble condition occurs, both the LRR

and the control’s dialer to the central station can be programmed to send a Trouble message.

Note: For complete information, see the Installation Instructions that accompany the radio.

Operation of the LRR

The LRR reporting options are defined by selecting categories of events for each subscriber

ID in fields 58 and 59. The reporting categories are Alarms, Troubles, Bypasses,

Openings/Closing, System Events, and Test. In addition, within an enabled category, the

specific event must be enabled for dialer reporting. If, for instance, zone 10 is enabled to

report, but zone 11 is not, zone 10 will report via the LRR, but zone 11 will not.

The priority of events from most to least important, transmitted from the VISTA-128FB to

the LRR is: Fire Alarms, Panic Alarms, Burglary Alarms, Fire Troubles, Non-Fire Troubles,

Bypasses, Openings/Closings, Test messages, and all other types of reports. The priority

here is based on the assumption that multiple events occur at approximately the same time.

There isn’t an event priority of messages transmitted via the radio to the central station.

Messages are transmitted on a “First In/First out” basis.

There are two subscriber ID’s programmed into the LRR: primary and secondary. These

correspond to the two subscriber ID’s programmed into the control for each partition. If a

subscriber ID for a partition is not programmed (disabling reports to that central station

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

13-2

phone number for that partition), the events enabled for the corresponding subscriber ID in

the LRR will not be transmitted.

If the event is to be reported to both phone numbers, dual reporting, then reporting through

the LRR, will be done in an alternating sequence. The first event in the queue will be

transmitted to the primary radio central station. Then this event will be transmitted to the

secondary radio central station. If the event was reported successfully via the control’s

dialer, it will be deleted from the radio’s transmission queue. The control will then proceed to

the next event in the queue.

If split reporting is selected for the VISTA-128FB, then the LRR will follow that option. The

radio will send the appropriate reports to the primary and secondary central stations.

Wiring the Long Range Radio to the Control

Connect the data in/out terminals and voltage input terminals of the radio to the control’s

keypad connection points, terminals 11, 12, 13, and 14, as shown below.

KEYPADS

BLACK

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

CONTROL

TERMINALS

Figure 13-1. Long Range Radio to Keypad Terminals

Programming the Control for the Long Range Radio

The control’s subscriber ID’s can be passed to the LRR and incorporated into the transmitted

data; or the LRR can transmit the subscriber ID programmed in its own EEPROM (see

Device Programming in the #93 Menu Mode Programming section).

An option exists to send the reports only via the LRR and bypass the control’s dialer

completely (field 56).

There is an option to stop transmissions via the LRR if communication via the control’s

dialer to the central station was successful (field 57).

The LRR reporting options are defined by selecting categories of events for each subscriber

ID. Field 58 is for selecting the events for the primary subscriber’s ID; field 59 is for

selecting the events for the secondary subscriber’s ID. The reporting categories are: Alarms,

Troubles, Bypasses, Openings/Closings, System Events, and Tests.

The control can be programmed to transmit these reports by partition,

Trouble Messages

The following messages will be displayed on the 6139 (alpha keypad) when a problem exists

in the Long Range Radio:

1. “LRR Battery”: The battery connected to the radio is low.

2. “PLL out of Lock”: The radio has an internal fault and cannot transmit any messages.

3. “Early Power Detect”: RF power is detected without a valid transmission.

LONG RANGE

RADIO

Section 13 – 7820 Long Range Radio

13-3

4. “Power Unattained”: Full RF power was never attained.

5. “Frwd. Power Loss”: RF power was not sustained throughout the transmission.

6. “Antenna Fault”: A problem with the antenna has been detected.

7. “LRR CRC is bad”: The radio’s EEPROM is corrupt (the internal CRC is bad.

Items 2 and 3 require factory service.

Items 4 and 5 could be the result of a bad or low battery.

Item 6 check the antenna connection and cable, otherwise, this requires factory service.

NOTE: All these messages will be displayed in conjunction with the “CHECK 8xx” message

which indicates a trouble on the address to which the LRR unit is programmed in the

control.

All of the above events except Antenna Fault will be sent to the event log and reported to the

central station using Contact ID Event Code 333 (expansion device trouble). Antenna Fault

will use Event Code 357. If the tamper is tripped on the LRR, it will use Event Code 341

(expansion device tamper).

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

13-4

14-1

SECTION 14

Access Control

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

General Information

♦

Access Control of an Entry/Exit Point

♦

Using the VISTA-128FB Without the VGM and PassPoint ACS

♦

Access Control Dialer Events

♦

Vista Gateway Module Wiring and Programming

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

General Information

The VISTA-128FB is capable of interacting with the ADEMCO PassPoint Access Control

System (PassPoint ACS). The VISTA-128FB processes fire, burglary, arm, disarm, and other

information. The PassPoint ACS processes card reader information and controls the locking

and unlocking of doors. The sharing of information between the two systems is provided by

the Vista Gateway Module (VGM).

The VGM is connected between the ECP bus (keypad terminals) of the control and the

network bus of the PassPoint ACS (see Figure 14-1). The control sends the VGM its status

information, event log entries and entry/exit requests (the inputs are programmed with

response type access point), from keypads, hardwired zones, and rf transmitters. The VGM

then reformats and retransmits this information to the Main Logic Board, (MLB) on the

PassPoint ACS network bus.

The VISTA-128FB is able to control the following on the PassPoint ACS:

• Uncommitted relays

• Triggers

The PassPoint ACS is able to control the following on the VISTA-128FB:

• Relays

• Arming/disarming schedules

• Macros

• Keypad display

• Time/date synchronization of the two systems

See the documentation that accompanies the PassPoint ACS for details.

The PassPoint ACS can dedicate some of its inputs for use as regular VISTA-128FB

hardwired zones (the zone response type is ACS). The PassPoint ACS can also utilize the

VISTA’s dialer for reports to the central station.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

14-2

Access Control of an Entry/Exit Point

The control can send entry and exit requests to the PassPoint ACS utilizing keypads,

hardwired zones, and rf transmitters. A zone is programmed with a response type 27 (access

point) and an appropriate input type (console, hardwired, rf).

Using the Alpha Keypad

Five entries can be entered at the keypad to access a door.

• Code + #73

• Code + #74 + access point

These entries allow a user to gain access to an access point in the PassPoint system or to

trigger a relay on the control.

The following entries require the installation of the VGM and the PassPoint ACS:

• Code + #75 + access point + function

The selectable functions are Grant, Protect, and Bypass. Selecting “Grant” will

temporarily unlock a door to force an access. Selecting “Protect” will cause the door to

unlock only when a valid access is received. Selecting “Bypass” will cause the door to be

permanently unlocked to allow continuous access.

• Code + #76 + access point + script #

This entry will run a script for the access point selected by the operator on the PassPoint

ACS.

See the documentation that accompanies the PassPoint ACS a detailed explanation of what a

script is and how to create one.

• Code + #77 + access point + function

This entry will unbypass a PassPoint ACS zone.

Programming the keypad

1. Enter Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.

2. Program the zone with a response type 27 (Access Point).

3. Enter the access point number (00-31) of the door and indicate whether this is an entry

or exit console.

4. Enter the partition number.

5. Enter the input type as CS (09).

6. Enter the keypad ECP address.

See Zone Programming in #93 Menu Mode Programming section for a detailed explanation.

Using an RF Transmitter Zone

An rf button-type transmitter (5804) can be used to provide access or egress for up to 4 doors.

One button will control one door. Also, a button can be used to provide access or egress due

to a panic or duress condition.

An rf transmitter (5816) can be used with a remote switch to provide exit in case of a fire

alarm.

The PIR (5890) can be used to provide exit while preventing entry through a door.

The smoke detector (5808), can be used to provide egress in emergency situations.

Programming the RF Transmitter

1. Enter Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.

2. Program the zone with a response type 27 (Access Point).

3. Enter the access point number (00-31) of the door.

4. Indicate whether rf device is for entry or exit.

Section 14 – Access Control

14-3

5. Enter the partition number

6. Enter the input type: supervised rf (03), unsupervised rf (04), or button rf (05).

7. Enter the loop number.

8. Enroll the serial number.

See Zone Programming in #93 Menu Mode Programming section for a detailed explanation.

RF buttons and pendants must be assigned to a user number in order to function. See the

User Access Codes section for the procedure.

Wireless Keypads

Wireless keypads (5827 & 5827BD) can provide another way of entering or exiting the

premises. They function the same as alpha keypads, except when the code + # 73 is entered.

This entry will allow momentary access to ALL access points in the partition to which the

keypad is assigned

Programming the Wireless Keypad

Enter the partition the keypad is assigned to in field 1*48.

Using ACS Relays and Triggers

The control can be programmed to use the PassPoint ACS’s relays and triggers.

Programming to Control ACS Relays and Triggers

1. Enter Relay Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.

2. Enter all the information for the relay (action, zone list, etc.).

3. For the relay type enter “3.”

4. Enter the VGM ECP address.

5. Select whether this relay is an ACS relay (0) or trigger (1).

6. Enter the ACS relay or trigger number that maps to the PassPoint ACS’s identification of

this relay.

See Relay Programming in #93 Menu Mode Programming section for a detailed explanation.

Using ACS Zone Inputs

If the PassPoint ACS has uncommitted zones, these may be used by the VISTA-128FB as

hardwired zones.

Programming the ACS Zone Inputs

1. Enter Zone Programming in #93 Menu Mode.

2. Program this zone as any other zone. Indicate the input type as ACS (10).

3. Enter the PassPoint ACS’s zone ID (00-31).

See Zone Programming in #93 Menu Mode Programming section for a detailed explanation.

Control of Lighting and Appliances

Lighting and appliances can be controlled when an access or exit event occurs. Lights or

appliances can be automatically turned on or off when a valid entry or egress request is

presented at an access point. To control these devices, the VISTA-128FB relays or the ACS

relays or triggers are used with keypads and/or rf transmitters whose response type is Access

Point (27).

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

14-4

Programming the Control of Lighting and Appliances

1. Enter Relay Programming in #93 Menu Mode.

2. Program all the information for the relay.

3. Select the relay type: ECP (1) for the 4204 and ACS (3) for an uncommitted relay or

trigger on the PassPoint ACS.

4. If (3) was selected, enter the VGM’s ECP address (01-30), and whether the device is a

relay (0) or trigger (1).

See Relay Programming in #93 Menu Mode Programming section for a detailed explanation.

Using VISTA-128FB Without the VGM and PassPoint ACS

The VISTA-128FB can be used for access control without interfacing to PassPoint ACS. A

user can trigger an access point (i.e., door strike) for 2 seconds by entering [User Code] + [0].

Programming the Control for Stand-alone Access Control

1. Enter Relay Programming in #93 Menu Mode.

2. Program the relay type as 1 or 2.

3. For type 1, program the ECP address and relay #.

4. For type 2, program the house and unit codes

5. Program the relay number in field 1∗76 (partition-specific).

See Relay Programming in #93 Menu Mode Programming section for a detailed explanation.

Access Control Dialer Events

All PassPoint ACS events can be sent to the VISTA-128FB’s dialer via the VGM. These

events will also be logged into the control’s event log. This is enabled in the PassPoint ACS.

See the PassPoint ACS documentation for a detailed explanation.

Vista Gateway Module Wiring and Programming

Wiring the Vista Gateway Module

The Vista Gateway Module is connected between the ECP bus (VISTA-128FB keypad

terminals) and the network bus of the PassPoint Access Control System. See Figure 14-1 for

the proper wiring connections.

}

ECHELON

NETWORK

YELLOW

RED

GREEN

PROM C

TRANSFORMER

4-PIN

KEYPAD

PLUG

}

CONTROL’S

KEYPAD

TERMINALS

BLACK

Figure 14-1: Wiring the Vista Gateway Module

Programming the Vista Gateway Module

See the PassPoint ACS instructions to program the Vista Gateway Module.

15-1

SECTION 15

External Sounders

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

General Information

♦

Bell Circuit Supervision

♦

Wiring Bell Outputs

♦

Compatible Alarm-Indicating Devices

♦

Programming the Bell Outputs

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

General Information

The VISTA-128FB provides two bell circuit outputs for operating fire and burglary alarm

notification appliances. Each bell output is rated as follows: 10VDC - 14VDC, 1.7 amps max.,

power limited. Note that the total alarm current drawn from the Aux Power 1, Aux Power 2,

polling loop, Bell 1, and Bell 2 outputs cannot exceed 2.3 amps for battery-independent

operation. Each output has the following options:

• Class B supervision (style-Y) or no supervision

• Selectable to activate by individual zone assignments

• Selectable for Confirmation of Arming Ding (1-2 sec. sounding to confirm system has

armed)

• Selectable to chime when entry/exit or perimeter zones are faulted

• Selectable for steady or pulsing output

• Selectable for no timeout or timeout of 2-30 minutes

If you purchased a kit containing the PS24 Power Supply Module, you may use this module to

convert one or both VISTA-128FB 12VDC, 1.7A style-Y supervised bell outputs to 24VFW, 1.7A

style-Y supervised bell outputs.

UL1. Burglary bell circuits must be programmed for a timeout of 16 minutes or longer.

2. Commercial fire alarm systems require bell or indicating circuits to be supervised.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

15-2

Bell Circuit Supervision

To supervise bell circuits, do the following:

• Install a 2K EOL resistor (Model 610-7, supplied) across the last notification appliance

on each bell output to be supervised.

• Program Zones 970 (Bell 1) and 971 (Bell 2) for 24-Hr. Trouble response (zone type 19)

(see Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode Programming section).

To unsupervise bell circuits, do the following:

• Cut the white jumpers W1 (for Bell 1) and/or W4 (for Bell 2) on the main PCB.

• Program zones 970 (Bell 1) and 971 (Bell 2) for a response type of 00 to disable

supervision (see Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode Programming section).

• Do not install the EOL resistor(s) across the unsupervised output(s).

Wiring Bell Outputs

By default, Bell 1 is set to operate as an unsupervised burglary bell output. You may use

any UL Listed, nonpolarized burglary-indicating device rated for 10-14 VDC operation on

this output. Note that a local burglary Grade A listing requires that a bell in a tamper-

protected housing be used (such as ADEMCO AB12) and that bell wiring be run in conduit.

By default, Bell 2 is set to operate as a supervised fire bell output. Note that the panel

supervises this wiring for open, short and earth ground faults. You may use any UL Listed,

polarized fire-indicating device rated for 10 -14 VDC operation on this output. Observe

polarity when wiring polarized devices.

Compatible Alarm-Indicating Devices

Compatible devices are listed below. The wiring connections follows this chart.

Model Description

System Sensor PA400B

(beige)/PA400R (red) Indoor piezo sounder (red or beige), rated

at 90 dB @ 10 feet.

System Sensor MA-12/24 Horn

System Sensor SS1215 ADA Strobe

System Sensor SS121575 ADA Strobe

System Sensor MASS1215 ADA Horn/Strobe

System Sensor MASS121575 ADA Horn/Strobe

System Sensor MA/SS-12 Horn/Strobe

Wheelock LS1-12-VFR Strobe

Wheelock MS1-12-VFR Strobe

Wheelock MT-12-LS-VFR Horn/Strobe

Wheelock MT4-12-LS-VFR Horn/Strobe

Wheelock MT-12-MS-VFR Horn/Strobe

Wheelock MT4-12-MS-VFR Horn/Strobe

Gentex GXS-2-15 Strobe

Gentex GXS-2-1575 Strobe

Gentex SHG-12-15 Horn/Strobe

Gentex SHG-12-1575 Horn/Strobe

Faraday 5336L-U-14-12-DC Horn/Strobe

Faraday 5337L-U-14-12-DC Horn/Strobe

Section 15 – External Sounders

15-3

(Shows wiring for bell outputs configured using factory default programming selections)

BELL 1 FACTORY DEFAULTS

Bell 1 is configured as a burglary bell circuit

• Use non-polarized Grade A indicating devices

(eg: Ademco No. AB12 - see below)

• Wiring is not supervised; cut white jumper, W1,

on main PCB

• Activates for zones 3-8 alarms (by default,

zones 3-8 are assigned to burglary part. 1)

• Steady alarm output

•

16 minute timeout

BELL 2 FACTORY DEFAULTS

Bell 2 is configured as a fire bell circuit

• Use polarized indicating devices

• Class B open/short supervision

• 24 hr trouble response to faults

• Activates for zone 1, 2 alarms (by default,

zones 1 & 2 are assigned to fire partition 3)

•

Pulsed alarm output

• No timeout

+–

BELL 1

+–

BELL 2

2k EOLR

(Model 610-7)

34 5 6

AB12 WIRING NOTES:

• Disconnect the AB12's factory wired connection

from it's terminal #4 to it's outer box

• Set field 3*17 to "1" to enable zone 6 tamper

function

• Assign zone 6 to a burglary partition. Program it

for day trouble/night alarm response (type 05)

when this bell is used by only 1 burg. part.

Program it for 24 hr. audible alarm response (type

07) when this bell is used by more than 1 burg.

part.

• All wiring from AB12 to panel must be run in

conduit

AB12 BELL/BOX WIRING

TO PANEL'S BELL +

(EG: BELL 1+; TB3)

TO PANEL'S EARTH

GROUND (TB30)

TO PANEL'S BELL –

(EG: BELL1–; TB4)

TO ZONE 6 + (TB24)

TO ZONE 6 – (TB23)

BELL

TAMPER

SWITCHES

123456

2k EOLR

AB12 OUTER BOX

INNER LINER

Figure 15-1: External Sounder Connections

Programming the Bell Outputs

1. Enter Data Field Program Mode [Installer Code] + 8 0 0 0.

2. Program the following data fields:

*08 Temporal Siren Pulse

*13 Select Timeout for Bell 1

*16 Confirmation of Arming Ding for Bell 1

1*47 Enable Chime for Bell 1

3*57 Confirmation of Arming Ding for Bell 2

3*59 Enable Chime for Bell 2

3*15 Select either Steady or Pulsing for each bell circuit output

3*60 Select Timeout for Bell 2

3. Enter Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode to assign zones to bell outputs and/or

aux. relay.

4. Exit Program Mode by pressing *99.

The bell outputs will not respond if zones are not assigned to them. For fire alarms, the system

will display "FIRE ALARM SILENCED." This message will also be displayed if the bell output is

not supervised.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

15-4

16-1

SECTION 16

Auxiliary Relay

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

Relay Functions

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Relay Functions

The VISTA-128FB provides a built-in Form C relay with contacts rated at 28 VAC/VDC, 2.8

amps max. This relay may be programmed for one of the functions below (determined by

program field 3*61):

• Alarm Activation

• Trouble/Supervisory Activation

• 4-Wire Smoke Detector Reset

• Battery Saver

These options are described below.

Alarm Activation

(3*61 = 1 or 4): Steady activation in response to an alarm on one, some or all zones, as

selected in Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode. If 3*61 = 1, the auxiliary relay

remains active until Aux. Relay Timeout expires or until [User Code] + OFF is entered. This

option can be used to provide a third, unsupervised bell output for supplementary strobes,

sounders, etc. when wired to the Aux. Power 1 output or to a separate power supply as shown

in Figure 16-1. If field 3*61 = 4, the auxiliary relay remains activated until [User Code] + [#]

+ 67 is entered. This option can be used for elevator recall or ventilator shutdown on fire

alarms. By default, the relay is set to activate on alarm zones 1-8 with no timeout (field 3*61

= 1). This usage might be required for a common fire and burglary alarm strobe indicator.

When field 3*61=1, the auxiliary relay can also be programmed to give a brief activation for

confirmation of arming (field 3*57) or for entry/exit or perimeter zone faults while Chime

Mode is active (field 3*59).

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

16-2

Figure 16-1. Auxiliary Relay Used as Unsupervised Bell Output

Trouble/Supervisory Activation

(3*61 = 0): Steady activation in response to any zone or system-related trouble condition or

to any fire supervisory condition. Remains activated until all fault conditions have been

corrected and the [User Code] + OFF has been entered.

4-Wire Smoke Detector Reset

(3*61 = 2): Momentary (6 second) activation at second entry of [User Code] + OFF sequence

which interrupts power to 4-wire smoke detectors connected to hardwired zones (Zones 1-8)

or to polling loop zones, allowing the detectors to be reset following an alarm. Power to 4-

wire smoke detectors should be wired to the auxiliary relay and to the Auxiliary Power 1

output as shown in Figure 16-2.

Figure 16-2. Auxiliary Relay Used for Resetting 4-Wire Smoke Detectors

Can draw power from

Aux. Pwr. 1 output or

from separate supply.

AUX RELAY

FACTORY DEFAULTS

• Activates for zones 1-8

alarms

(steady alarm output)

• No timeout

NOTES:

• Use non-polarized indicating

devices

• Wiring is not supervised

• Do not exceed ratings of the

supply used. If Aux. Pwr. 1

output is used, then combined

alarm current drawn from Aux.

Pwr. 1, Aux. Pwr. 2, Bell 1 and

Bell 2 cannot exceed 2.3A max.

+–

11 12

N.O.

POLE

N.C.

AUX PWR #1

GROUND

78910

▲

ALARM

▲

VISTA-100

CONTROL

PANEL

ZONE

TERMINALS

(15-27)

••

EOL

POWER

SUPERVISION

RELAY

MODULE

A77-716B

•

Four-Wire Detector Circuit

2000Ω

EOLR

4-WIRE SMOKE

DETECTORS

HEAT

DETECTOR

SHOWN POWERED.

RELAY OPENS WHEN

POWER IS LOST.

N.O.

N.C.

POLE

Aux. Pwr 1

Keypad Prt 1

AUXILIARY RELAY

Section 16 – Auxiliary Relay

16-3

Battery Saver

(3*61 = 3): When this function is selected, the auxiliary relay will normally be activated (i.e.

N.O. and pole contacts will be connected, N.C. contact will be open) and will de-activate 4

hours after the start of an AC power failure. Using this feature, noncritical loads (such as

supplementary keypads) which do not need to be supported for the full 24-hour battery

backup period can be disconnected from the auxiliary outputs, allowing a smaller-capacity

battery to be used. The relay re-activates within a few seconds after AC power restores.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

16-4

17-1

SECTION 17

Dialer Outputs

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

Dialer Outputs Available

♦

Telephone Line Connections

♦

Telephone Line Supervision

♦

Dialer Operation

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Dialer Outputs Available

The VISTA-128FB provides one main built-in dialer for communication to the central station

and one optional 5140DLM Backup Dialer, both supervised for voltage and current on the

phone lines.

Telephone Line Connections

Connect the main dialer and backup dialer (if used) outputs to telephone company lines

which provide loop start service using the RJ31X Cables supplied. Do not connect to

telephone company lines which provide ground start service.

The 5140DLM Backup Dialer mounts to the main PCB shield and connects to the main PCB

J3 connector using a ribbon cable (supplied with module) as shown in the Summary of

Connections diagram at the end of this manual.

Connect the earth ground screw on the 5140DLM to the earth ground screw (terminal 30) on

the main PCB using 16 AWG wire.

Cut the blue jumper when the dialer outputs are connected to telephone lines, which have a

telephone company MTU installed.

For Listed fire central station (UL864/NFPA 72) applications, use either a LORRA alone, the main

dialer with the LORRA, or use the main dialer with the 5140DLM Backup Dialer. For Listed fire

remote station (UL864/NFPA72) applications, use the main dialer with the 5140DLM backup

dialer. Telephone line supervision is required for UL commercial fire alarm systems when a dual

line dialer is used for fire signal transmission.

Telephone Line Supervision

The supervision circuits on both dialer outputs will indicate a fault when the tip/ring voltage

falls below approximately 25 volts (13 volts for the main dialer when the main PCB blue

jumper is cut; 13 volts for the backup dialer when its blue jumper is cut) and when handset

current is less than approximately 10 mA.

Faults on the phone lines are displayed as zones 974 (main dialer) and 975 (backup dialer).

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

17-2

DO NOT connect both outputs to the same telephone company line.

1. To prevent the risk of shock, disconnect phone lines at telco jack before servicing the panel.

2. If the communicator is connected to a telephone line inside a PABX, be sure the PABX has a

backup power supply that can support the PABX for 24 hours (central station usage) or 60

hours (remote station usage). Many PABXs are

not

power-backed up, and connection to

such a PABX will result in a communication failure if power is lost

Dialer Operation

When only the main dialer is enabled ([1,0] in field 3*30), the VISTA-128FB will attempt to

route all calls over the main output. When both main and backup dialers are enabled ([1,1]

in field 3*30), the VISTA-128FB will attempt to route all calls over the main output until a

fault is detected, at which time it will attempt to use the backup output. Line faults will

result in a “Zone 974-DIALER 1 FAULT” or a “Zone 975-DIALER 2 FAULT” display. The

communicator will make up to 8 attempts to transmit a report to one or both telephone

numbers, depending upon the report routing option programmed. After the eighth attempt,

the communicator will hang up and a “COMM FAIL” will be displayed at the keypad. The

number of dialer attempts are programmed in field 3*21 (default = 8; must be restricted to 3,

4 or 5 attempts if a secondary phone number is programmed).

The system will not switch to the backup dialer unless it detects a fault (low voltage and low

current) on the main telephone line. This means that if a report does not go through on the main

phone line due to a programming error, the backup dialer will not be activated.

The VISTA-128FB will transmit reports in the following order: Alarms (fire, medical/panic,

burglary), Fire Supervisories and Troubles, remaining types of messages. See the System

Communication section for a description of communication formats, the types of messages

transmitted by the panel, and for the dialer programming defaults.

18-1

SECTION 18

Event Log Options

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

General Information

♦

Event Log Printer Connections

♦

Programming Event Log Options

♦

Event Logging Procedures

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

General Information

This system has the ability to record up to 224 events of various types in a history log. Each

event is recorded in one of six categories with the time and date of its occurrence (if real-time

clock is set). These categories are:

• Alarm

• Supervisory/check

• Bypass

• Open/close

• System conditions

• Test

The log may be viewed (Display Mode) on an alpha keypad, or can be printed (Print Mode) on

a serial printer (connected to the system via a 4100SM Serial Interface Module).

Event Log Printer Connections

The VISTA-128FB's event log can be printed on a local serial printer. If used, program field

3*19 must be set to "1."

This setting overrides the functions selected for INPUT 1 and OUT 2 made in field 3*20.

Connect a UL EDP Listed serial printer to the J2 connector using an ADEMCO 4100SM

Interface Module as shown in Figure 18-1.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

18-2

Figure 18-1: Event Log Printer Connections

The printer must be configured as follows:

• 7 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit

• 300 or 1200 baud (1200 required if alpha numeric pager interface is installed)

• Hardware handshaking using DTR signal

The 4100SM Module is supplied with a 10-foot RS232 cable. A longer cable or an extension

cable can be used if the VISTA-128FB and serial printer are separated by more than 10 feet,

but the total cable length should be less than 50 feet.

The 4100SM Module must be connected to the panel using the distance of the trigger cable. The

wires

cannot

be lengthened to mount the module in a remote location.

Most printers either ignore the CTS, DSR, and CD signals, or require them to be high (i.e., 3-

15VDC as measured on RS232 DB25 Connector Pins 5, 6 & 8, respectively, with respect to

Ground Pin 7). The 4100SM Module sets these pins high. If the printer being used will not

operate with these pins high, then clip the blue (CTS), white (DSR), or red (CD) jumpers on

the 4100SM Module to set the corresponding signal floating. Important pins on the RS232C

cable are Pin 3 (data out), Pin 7 (ground) and Pin 20 (DTR - ready).

The DTR signal, as measured at 4100SM TB1, should be high (9.5-14VDC) when the printer

is powered, properly connected, on-line and ready to print. This signal will be low (0-

1.5VDC) when the printer is not powered, not properly connected, off-line or out of paper.

The VISTA-128FB will not send printing data to the printer unless the DTR signal is high.

123456789

INPUT 1

GROUND

OUT 1

OUT 4

OUT 7

OUT 3

OUT 6

OUT 2

OUT 5

J2 CONNECTOR

(VIOLET)

(GRAY)

(YELLOW)

(WHITE)

(RED)

(GREEN)

(BROWN)

BLUE

BLACK

4142TR CABLE

+ PWR

– (GND)

RXD

not used

DTR

BLUERED WHITE

10 FT.

CABLE

SUPPLIED

WITH 4100SM

SERIAL PRINTER

SET FOR 8 DATA BITS

NO PARITY

1 STOP BIT

300/1200 BAUD

HARDWARE HANDSHAKE

USING DTR SIGNAL

USE GENDER

CHANGER SUPPLIED

WITH 4100SM IF

PRINTER HAS DB25

MALE CONNECTOR

(TO TERM 11)

–

(TO TERM 12)

▲▲

AUX PWR 1

OUTPUT

4100SM JUMPERS

(CUT TO SET RESPECTIVE SIGNAL FLOATING)

COLOR FUNCTION PIN#

RED CD 8

BLUE CTS 5

WHITE DSR 6

4100SM

NOTE: IF EARTH GROUND FAULT SENSING IS ENABLED

– YOU MAY GET AN EARTH GROUND FAULT INDICATION IF YOU USE

A PRINTER OR PC) WHICH HAS A 3 PRONG, GROUNDED POWER

CORD. IF THIS OCCURS, FIRST VERIFY THAT PIN 1 (CHASSIS

GROUND) IS ISOLATED FROM PIN 7 (SIGNAL GROUND) ON THE

4100SM'S RS 232 CONNECTOR (EARLY PRODUCTION VERSIONS OF

THE 4100SM-ADT HAVE AN UNMARKED, 3/8" LONG, BARE WIRE

JUMPER LYING NEAR THE PIN 1 SIDE OF THE RS232 CONNECTOR

WHICH MUST BE CUT TO ISOLATE THESE PINS). THEN VERIFY

THAT THESE PINS ARE ISOLATED ON YOUR PRINTER'S RS232

CONNECTOR. FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS PROVIDED WITH

YOUR PRINTER TO ISOLATE THESE PINS IF REQUIRED.

Section 18 – Event Log Options

18-3

Programming Event Log Options

1. With at least one alpha keypad (6139/6139R) wired and set to a proper address,

temporarily apply power to the system.

2. Enter Data Field Programming Mode: [Installer Code] + 8 0 0 0.

3. Program the following data fields:

1*70 EVENT LOG TYPES (1=enable; 0=disable for each type)

1*71 12/24-HOUR TIME STAMP FORMAT (0=12 hr; 1=24 hr)

1*72 EVENT LOG PRINTER ON-LINE (0=disable; 1=enable)

1*73 PRINTER BAUD RATE (1=300; 0=1200)

4. Enter Report Code Programming in the #93 Menu Mode to program report codes for the

event log (System Group #4 codes).

5. Exit Program Mode by pressing *99.

If you need more information about actual programming procedures, see

The Mechanics of

Programming

section

Event Logging Procedures

In order for proper time and date stamping to occur, the system's real-time clock must be set.

Refer to the

Setting the Real Time Clock

section.

If you have selected the printer to be "on-line" (field 1*72), events will print automatically, as

they occur. To display or print on demand, the following commands apply:

Commands

Display Mode: Installer or Master Code + [#] + [6] + [0]

Print Mode: Installer or Master Code + [#] + [6] + [1]

Clear Event Log: Installer or Master Code + [#] + [6] + [2]

To EXIT Event Log: Press ✴ at any time.

Display/Printing: After entering either the Display or Print Mode, the following will be

displayed:

ENTER 0 = RECENT

1 = COMPLETE

The Event Log holds up to 224 events, and can display or print

all events in a category (complete), or only those events in a

category occurring since the last “Clear Event Log” command

(recent). Note that once the event log is full, the oldest event

will be erased upon the logging of any new event. Press the

desired Display Mode key, 0 or 1.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

18-4

SCAN LOG BY PART

0=NO 1-8=PART #

The system allows viewing of any partition's event log. Enter

the partition number for the partition whose events are to be

displayed. Entering 0 (NO) will display all events that occurred

in the system, regardless of partition. Events are displayed in

chronological order, from most recent to oldest.

For display and printing purposes, events are stored on a

partition-by-partition basis (except system events), and are

grouped into five categories, as follows.

Use the [3] & [1] keys to scroll to the next and previous screens respectively:

ALARM EVENT LOG

TYPE CCC UUU

Displays time/date for zones that have either caused an alarm

or have been restored in selected partition.

CHECK EVENT LOG

TYPE CCC UUU

Displays time/date for zones that have caused a trouble or

supervisory condition in selected partition.

BYPASS EVENT LOG

TYPE CCC UUU

Displays time/date for zones that have been bypassed in

selected partition.

OP/CL EVENT LOG

TYPE CCC UUU

Displays time, date, and user number for each arming and

disarming of the system for the partition selected.

SYSTEM EVENT LOG

TYPE CCC UUU

Displays time/date for system conditions, such as AC loss,

communication failure, etc., regardless of partition.

ALL EVENT LOG

TYPE CCC UUU

Displays all categories of events in chronological order, from

most recent to oldest.

TEST EVENT LOG

TYPE CCC UUU

Displays all test events.

To display the events in a particular category, press [8] at the desired category screen.

If in Display Mode, the most recent event is displayed. Press [1] to display older events; press

[3] to go forward in time.

If in Print Mode, the first press of [8] will cause the printer to print all events in that

category, with each event automatically scrolled on the display keypad. The following is a

typical display:

P8 01/01 12:02A

BURGLARY 003

Shows burglary alarm occurred in zone 3 of Partition 8, at

12:02AM on January 1.

After the last event in the selected category has been displayed (using either the [1] or [3]

keys), the following will appear for a few seconds:

END OF EVENT LOG

TYPE CCC UUU

Section 18 – Event Log Options

18-5

CLEAR EVENT LOG

0=NO 1=YES

Press [1] if Event Log Clear function is to be performed.

Clearing the event log does not erase any events from the

system memory. All events in the log will still be displayed if

the COMPLETE option is selected. Only those events

occurring from the time of the CLEAR command will be

displayed if RECENT display option is selected. Press [0] if

event log is not to be cleared at this time.

If [1] is pressed, the following will appear:

ARE YOU SURE?

0=NO 1=YES

Press [1] if it is desired to clear the event log. Press [0] if event

log is not to be cleared.

SCREEN DEFINITIONS

RECENT Events since last CLEAR

COMPLETE Displays all events

TYPE Type of event (burg., fire, etc.)

CCC Zone (contact) number

UUU User number

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

18-6

19-1

SECTION 19

4100APG Pager Interface

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

General Information

♦

Mounting the 4100APG

♦

Wiring the 4100APG

♦

Programming the Control for the Pager

♦

4100APG LED Indications

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

General Information

Whenever an event occurs on the VISTA-128FB, a message can be sent to a pager. This is

accomplished by using the 4100APG Pager Interface. The 4100APG will dial and send the

information to a paging service. It will transmit to the pager any message programmed to be

sent to the event log printer, even if the printer is not being used.

The types of messages are divided into 6 categories: Alarms; Troubles; Bypasses;

Opens/Closes; System and Test. The VISTA-128FB can be programmed so each type of

message transmits to a different pager. Each type has its own programming field for the

pager phone number and pager ID. Of course, these could be sent to the same pager by

programming those fields with the same pager phone number and ID.

The 4100APG will hang up between each message. Multiple messages will be sent in the

order received. If the 4100APG cannot make contact with the paging service, it will retry up

to 10 times. If the interface loses contact with the VISTA-128FB, it will send a message to

the paging service to notify the user.

The pager interface must be wired to a different phone line than the VISTA-128FB itself.

Otherwise, the communication of both will not function properly.

Mounting the 4100APG

The 4100APG may be mounted in the control cabinet if space is available or, if this is not

possible, on the side of the cabinet or adjacent to it. Pry off the pager interface’s cover prior to

wiring.

1. When the 4100APG is mounted inside the control cabinet, attach it to the cabinet's

interior surface with 2-faced adhesive tape. You may leave the interface's cover off if it is

mounted within the cabinet.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

19-2

Do not mount the 4100APG on the cabinet door or attempt to attach it to the PC board.

2. When the 4100APG is to be mounted outside the cabinet, use the screw holes at the rear

to mount horizontally or vertically (2-faced adhesive tape may be used, if preferred). You

can bring wires out from the side or back (a round breakout is also available on the back).

Wiring the 4100APG

Without the Event Log Printer

The 4100APG connects to the VISTA-128FB via the 4100SM. The 4100SM wires to the J2

connector on the control via the 4142TR Cable. See Figure 19-1.

Connecting the 4100SM to the control:

1. 4142TR to J2 on the control

2. RED wire of 4142TR to TB1-6 of 4100SM (RxD)

3. VIOLET wire of 4142TR to TB1-1 of 4100SM (DTR)

4. TB1-7 of 4100SM to terminal 12 (Auxiliary Power -) of the control

5. TB1-8 of 4100SM to terminal 11 (Auxiliary Power +) of the control

Connecting the 4100APG to the 4100SM

1. Incoming telephone line to the 4100APG RJ11 connector labeled LINE

2. (Optional) Handset side of telephone line to 4100APG RJ11 connector labeled PHONE

3. DB25M to DB-9M Cable (supplied), from 4100SM (25 pin) to 4100APG (9 pin) connector

labeled SERIAL PORT INPUT

Red Violet

4100SM

4100APG

DB-25

DB-9

RJ-11

To Telco

11 12

Aux. Pwr

Aux. Gnd

Red

Black

RxD

TxD

Serial Port Input

Line

Figure 19-1: Wiring the 4100APG Without the Serial Printer

Section 19 – 4100APG Pager Interface

19-3

With the Event Log Printer

The VISTA-128FB will support the 4100APG and serial printer. See Figure 19-2.

The serial printer must be configured for 1200 baud rate, seven data bits, even parity, and one

stop bit. (7/E/1).

Red Violet

4100SM

4100APG

DB-25

DB-9

RJ-11

To Telco

11 12

Aux. Pwr

Aux. Gnd

Red

Black

RxD

TxD

Serial Port Input

Line

DB-25

1200 Baud Serial

Printer 7-E-1

Figure 19-2: Wiring the 4100APG With the Serial Printer

When you complete the module's mounting and wiring, you should install the module's cover

(with label affixed, as indicated next).

Programming the Control for the Pager

• In field *64 enter 1 to enable the 4100APG pager interface.

• In field *65 enter the phone number of the paging service for Alarm reports. Up to 17

digits may be entered.

• In field *66 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for Alarm reports. This is

the PIN number. Up to 10 digits may be entered.

• In field *67 enter the phone number of the paging service for Trouble reports. Up to 17

digits may be entered.

• In field *68 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for Trouble reports. This is

the PIN number. Up to 10 digits may be entered.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

19-4

• In field *69 enter the phone number of the paging service for Bypass reports. Up to 17

digits may be entered.

• In field *70 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for Bypass reports. This is

the PIN number. Up to 10 digits may be entered.

• In field *71 enter the phone number of the paging service for Open/Close reports. Up to

17 digits may be entered.

• In field *72 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for Open/Close reports. This

is the PIN number. Up to 10 digits may be entered.

• In field *73 enter the phone number of the paging service for System reports. Up to 17

digits may be entered.

• In field *74 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for System reports. This is

the PIN number. Up to 10 digits may be entered.

• In field *75 enter the phone number of the paging service for Test reports. Up to 17

digits may be entered.

• In field *76 enter the Pager ID number of the paging service for Test reports. This is the

PIN number. Up to 10 digits may be entered.

• In field 1*70 enable the events for the event log.

• In field 1*72 enable the Printer On-Line option. This must be turned on to allow events

to be sent to the pager interface when they occur.

Field 3*19 MUST be programmed with a “1” in order for the printer and pager to operate properly.

4100APG LED Indications

Below is a table outlining the LED indications:

LED Name Steady Blinking Off Pulse

Power OK On Battery (B/U) No Power

Line Not in use (OK) In Use

Call Call in Progress Page Retry Idle

Busy Telephone Busy No Dial Tone OK

Page Page Fail OK Page OK

Data No Data Msg Data

Load No Data Prog Data

TRBL Trouble OK

20-1

SECTION 20

Final Power-Up Procedure

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

Connecting the AC Transformer

♦

Earth Ground Connections

♦

Backup Power Calculations

♦

Connecting the Backup Battery to the Control

♦

Total Control Panel Load Worksheets

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Connecting the AC Transformer

Use the ADEMCO 1451 Transformer with enclosure (supplied) with the VISTA-128FB

control when the PS24 Power Supply will not be used. This transformer provides 18 VAC/72

VA secondary winding for powering the control. Use the 1451-24 Transformer to power the

VISTA-128FB Control and the PS24 Power Supply module when the PS24 is being used.

This transformer provides an 18VAC, 72VA secondary winding for powering the control; and

a 30VAC, 188VA secondary winding for powering the PS24. The control panel kit that you

purchased will come with the appropriate transformer. Both transformers have a manually

resettable circuit breaker mounted inside a protective metal enclosure.

Follow the instructions below for mounting the enclosure and for wiring the 18VAC winding

of either transformer. Follow the instructions provided with the PS24 for wiring the 30VAC

winding of the 1451-24 Transformer.

Before connecting the AC transformer, connect all zone, polling loop, keypad, auxiliary device

and bell circuit wiring. Mount and wire the 1451 transformer as follows:

1. Remove the front cover of the enclosure.

2. Mount the enclosure to the wall near the VISTA-128FB panel. The enclosure has 4

mounting holes on its back surface for this purpose.

3. Run 120VAC wiring to the enclosure in conduit. A dedicated circuit must be used.

Use wire nuts to splice the 120VAC wires to the transformer’s white and black primary

leads. Connect the earth ground post on the back of the enclosure to a good earth ground.

4. Use wire nuts to splice the transformer blue 18VAC secondary leads to 16AWG wire

which is run in conduit to the panel. These wires are connected to panel terminals 1 & 2.

• Use wires having insulation rated for at least 90°C operation and suitable for non-power-

limited applications.

• Use care to keep 18VAC wiring separated from all other wiring inside the panel’s enclosure.

This must be done by running non-power-limited 18VAC wiring into the panel’s enclosure via

one of the knockouts on the left-hand side of the enclosure, and then tie-wrapping these wires

to the tie-wrap loops located near the knockout.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

20-2

5. Replace the front cover of the enclosure and fasten with the screws supplied.

A few seconds after power is applied to the control, the keypad should display

"DISARMED...READY TO ARM." If there is no keypad display, check that the 1451

Transformer is supplying proper voltage to the panel (about 17-19.5VAC when the power line

voltage is 110-120VAC).

Earth Ground Connections

1. Connect the earth ground post inside the 1451 enclosure to a good earth ground (use

grounding methods specified in the National Electric Code). Use a green wire nut

(supplied) to secure the wire to the ground post.

2. Run a 16AWG wire from this post to the panel’s earth ground terminal (terminal 30).

Use a second green nut (supplied) to secure this wire to the ground post. This method of

connection avoids ground loops that may occur when the 1451 and panel are connected to

different earth ground systems.

The panel requires this connection in order for its lightning transient protection devices and earth

ground supervision to function properly.

Backup Power Calculations

In the event of an AC power loss, the VISTA-128FB control (and PS24 Power Supply Module,

if used) must be supported by a backup, rechargeable, lead acid (gel cell type) battery. When

used without a PS24, a 12VDC, 12AH min./34.4AH max. battery must be connected to the

VISTA-128FB control. When used with the PS24, two 12V, 7AH min./17.2AH max. batteries

must be connected to the PS24. The PS24 configures these batteries to provide 24V backup

power to its outputs, and 12V backup power to the control.

The battery's capacity must be sized to provide 24 hours (UL central station fire) or 60 hours

(UL remote station fire) of standby time followed by 5 minutes (fire only) or 15 minutes

(fire/burglary) of alarm time. This can be determined as follows:

1. If using the polling loop, fill out the Polling Loop Current Draw Worksheet, shown on

next page, to determine the total current drawn from the polling loop.

2. Fill out the Total Control Panel Load Worksheet, shown on next page, to determine the

total standby and alarm load drawn from the control's internal 12V power supply.

3. If using the PS24, fill out the Total PS24 Module Load Worksheet, found in the PS24's

instructions, to determine the required capacity of the backup batteries that must be

connected to the PS24. Select two 12V batteries from the Battery Selection Table in the

PS24's instructions that have a capacity greater than or equal to the calculated capacity.

When calculating standby capacity, use 24 hours for central station fire and 60 hours for remote

station fire in the standby capacity formula.

4. If not using the PS24, fill out the Battery Capacity Calculation Worksheet, following the

other worksheets, to determine the required capacity for the backup battery. Select one

of the batteries given in the Battery Selection Table (later in this section) which has a

capacity greater than or equal to the calculated battery.

Section 20 – Final Power-Up Procedure

20-3

Connecting the Backup Battery to the Control

If not using the PS24, connect the battery (or batteries) to the VISTA-128FB as shown in

Figure 20-1.

If using the PS24, connect the backup batteries to the PS24 using the cables supplied with

the PS24, as shown in the PS24's instructions. Both the VISTA-128FB and the PS24 run

brief battery tests every 60 seconds to determine whether the battery is connected. If a low

or disconnected battery condition exists, it will be displayed on the control's keypad. Refer to

the Testing the System section for more detailed information.

Figure 20-1: Connecting the Backup Batteries to the Control

Polling Loop Current Draw Worksheet

Refer to the Polling Loop Expansion section for device restrictions for fire and burglary usage.

RPM DEVICE CURRENT # OF UNITS TOTAL

4194 Contact 1mA

4192SD Photo Smoke 0.4 mA

4192SDT Smoke w/Heat 0.4 mA

4192CP Ion Smoke 0.4 mA

4275 Dual PIR 1 .0mA

4278 Quad PIR 1.0 mA

4190 2-Zone RPM 1 mA (LOW);

4190 2-Zone RPM 2 mA (HIGH)

4208 8-Zone RPM 16 mA

4191SN Recessed Contact 1.0 mA

4939SN Surface Mount

Contact 1.0 mA

TOTAL Cannot exceed 128MA*

* The total current cannot exceed 128mA. If total load exceeds 128mA, then a 4297 Loop Extender

Module can be used. This module is powered from the panel's auxiliary power, and provides a separate

polling loop output, which can support an additional 128mA load. Note that the total number of polling

loop points connected to the panel cannot exceed 120.

– +

12V

BATTERY

– +

12V

BATTERY

(if required)

– +

BLK RED

BATTERY TABS

BLACK

RED

MAIN PCB

DUAL BATTERY

HARNESS

(2 PAIRS SUPPLIED)

▲

OBSERVE POLARITY !

USE THE 2nd PAIR OF BATTERY

TABS AND THE 2nd PAIR OF

BATTERY HARNESSES SUPPLIED

TO CONNECT ONE OR TWO

ADDITIONAL BATTERIES IN

PARALLEL

▲

NOTE: WHEN CONNECTING BATTERIES IN PARALLEL:

• USE BATTERIES FROM THE SAME MANUFACTURER AND

WITH THE SAME VOLTAGE AND CAPACITY RATING.

• USE BATTERIES WITH APPROXIMATELY SAME AGE AND

STATE OF CHARGE.

• USE CABLES PROVIDED AND OBSERVE POLARITY!

• IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT ALL BATTERIES BE REPLACED

AT SAME TIME, EVEN IF ONLY ONE BATTERY HAS BECOME

WEAK.

• AS LONG AS ONE GOOD BATTERY REMAINS CONNECTED,

THE ONCE PER 60 SECOND BATTERY TEST WILL NOT

DETECT THE DISCONNECTION OF REMAINING BATTERIES.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

20-4

Total Control Panel Load Worksheets

To calculate the total current for the Aux. Power 1, Aux Power 2, Bell 1 and Bell 2 outputs

and polling loop current, multiply the each device's standby and/or alarm current by the

number of units used.

1. Enter devices used on

Aux. Power 1 output,

calculate standby and

alarm currents, then

add to get Aux. Power

1 current subtotal.

AUX. POWER 1 OUTPUT Total Current

Device Model # Device Current X # of Units

Standby Alarm

Aux. Power 1 Output Subtotal

(terminals 10 & 11) 1.0A max 1.7A max

2. Enter devices used on

Aux. Power 2 output,

calculate standby and

alarm currents, then

add to get Aux. Power

2 current subtotal.

AUX. POWER 2 OUTPUT Total Current

Device Model # Device Current X # of Units

Standby Alarm

Aux. Power 2 Output Subtotal

(terminals 10 & 11) 1.0A max 1.7A max

Section 20 – Final Power-Up Procedure

20-5

3. Enter devices

connected to Bell 1

output, calculate alarm

currents, then add to

get Bell 1 output

current subtotal.

BELL 1 OUTPUT Total Current

Device Model # Device Current X # of Units

Standby Alarm

XXXXXX

Bell 1 Output Subtotal (terminals 3 & 4) 1.7 amp max XXXXXX

4. Enter devices

connected to Bell 2

output, calculate

alarm currents, then

add to get Bell 2

output current

subtotal.

BELL 2 OUTPUT Total Current

Device Model # Device Current X # of Units

Standby Alarm

XXXXXX

Bell 2 Output Subtotal (terminals 5 & 6) 1.7 amp max XXXXXX

5. Enter the total

polling loop using

values calculated in

the polling loop

worksheet.

POLLING LOOP Total Current

Standby Alarm

(Enter worksheet total, both standby & alarm columns)

Polling Loop Subtotal

6. Enter total

calculated subtotals

of all listed outputs,

then add to get the

combined current.

COMBINED AUX. POWER, BELL AND Total Current

POLLING LOOP Standby Alarm

Aux . Power 1 Output Subtotal

Aux . Power 2 Output Subtotal

Bell 1 Output Subtotal

Bell 2 Output Subtotal

Polling Loop Subtotal

Add all subtotals

(Cannot exceed 1.0 amp max. standby; 2.3 amp max. alarm)

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

20-6

These values are fixed. VISTA-128FB PCB CURRENT Total Current

Standby Alarm

Includes 2-wire smoke detector loading on zones 1 & 2 and

trigger output currents 300mA 470mA

5140DLM Backup Dialer Module 5mA

(inactive) 15mA

(inactive)

*5140DLM actually draws 55mA when active. However, since VISTA-128FB

PCB current includes built-in main dialer current, and since main dialer is

inactive when 5140DLM is active, 5140DLM imposes only 15mA added

current on power supply.

7. Enter the calculated

combined current, then

add to total PCB

current.

TOTAL CONTROL PANEL LOAD Total Current

Standby Alarm

Combined aux. power, bell, and polling loop total

Total PCB current

Total control panel load

1. When not using the PS24, the total control panel standby load must be limited to 1.27A for

24-hour standby time, or to 510mA for 60-hour standby time using a 12V, 34.3AH battery

connected to the control.

2. When using the PS24, skip the worksheet shown below and fill out the worksheets found in

the PS24’s instructions instead. The total control panel standby load must be limited to

919mA for 24-hour standby time or 345mA for 60-hour standby time using two 12V, 17.2AH

batteries connected to the PS24.

Battery Capacity Calculation Worksheet

For burglary installations requiring 4-hour standby time followed by 15-minute alarm time,

use a 12AH battery to support all loads up to and including the maximum system load (i.e.,

1.3A standby/2.8A alarm total control panel load). For fire installations requiring 24-hour or

60-hour standby time, use the worksheet below to calculate the required battery capacity.

8. Using the total

calculated power

supply load (step 8),

calculate the battery

capacity required for

the installation.

Capacity Formula Calc Value

Standby Capacity total standby load X 24 or 60 hours X 1.1 contingency

factor (use total standby load from previous

worksheet)

Alarm Capacity total alarm load XX 0.083 hours (5 minutes) or 0.250

hours (15 minutes)

(use total alarm load from previous worksheet)

Total Capacity Add standby and alarm capacities

Section 20 – Final Power-Up Procedure

20-7

Battery Selection Table

(The following batteries will fit inside the VISTA-128FB cabinet)

9. Using the battery

capacity value from

step 8, select the

appropriate battery.

12 AH Yuasa NP12-12

14 AH Yuasa NP7-12 (connect 2 in parallel)

17.2 AH Yuasa NPG18-12

24 AH Yuasa NP12-12 (connect 2 in parallel)

28 AH Yuasa NP7-12 (connect 4 in parallel)

34.4 AH Yuasa NPG18-12 (connect 2 in parallel)

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

20-8

21-1

SECTION 21

The Mechanics of Programming

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

Using Data Field Program Mode

♦

System and Communication Defaults

♦

Entering Data Field Programming Mode

♦

Moving from One Page of Programming to Another

♦

Viewing Data Fields

♦

Entry Errors

♦

Programming System-Wide Data Fields

♦

Programming Partition-Specific Data Fields

♦

#93 Menu Mode Programming

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Using Data Field Program Mode

Data Field Program Mode is the program mode through, which many system options are

programmed. The field numbers on the program form show the number of entries required

for each field. When an entry is completed, the keypad beeps three times and advances to

the next field. At this point, you can either make the required entry in the new field, or press

[*] + the next field number you want to program.

There are several "question and answer" modes, which we call "Menu" modes, that can be

accessed once Data Field Program Mode has been entered. These modes prompt the user for

information, and for this reason, a 2-line alpha keypad (6139/6139R) is required.

System and Communication Defaults

• The system is shipped with a set of pre-programmed default values that are designed to

meet the needs of many installations. If desired, these can be changed by the installer to

suit specific needs.

• There are four sets of pre-programmed communication defaults available, including Low

Speed, 4+2 Express, ADEMCO High Speed, and ADEMCO Contact ID. Loading one of

these defaults automatically programs industry standard codes that will suit most of

your needs.

• These defaults can be changed directly from the 6139(R) Alpha Keypad or they can be

changed by using V-LINK or Compass downloading software (be sure that the software

version used includes the VISTA-128FB). Downloading can be performed either remotely

from an IBM-compatible computer (using an approved modem) or at the job site (direct-

wire download using the 4100SM Serial Module).

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

21-2

The factory-loaded defaults (*97) enable keypad addresses 00-01 only. A keypad set to one of

these addresses must be used to program the system.

Entering Data Field Programming Mode

Enter Program Mode using either method A or B:

A. Press both the [*] and [#] keys at the same time within 30 seconds after power is

applied to the control.

B. Enter the [Installer Code] + [8] + [0] + [0] + [0]. The factory installer code can be

changed once in the Program Mode (field *00).

Local keypad programming can be disabled through V-LINK or Compass downloading software. If

this is done, programming can only be accomplished via the downloading software.

Moving from One Page of Programming to Another

The data fields are grouped into four levels (referred to as "pages"). The first page is

accessed as soon as Programming Mode is entered.

The second, third, and fourth pages of data fields are indicated at the keypad by a 1, 2, and 3,

respectively, in front of the 2-digit field address. The words "ALT PROGRAM MODE" is

displayed along with a "100,"200," or "300," depending on which page of program fields is

accessed, to indicate the higher page of fields.

1. To access the next level of fields, press *94.

2. Then press [✴] + [XX], where XX = the last two digits of the program field, and make the

desired entry.

3. To return to the previous page of fields, press *99.

press *94 to move to 2nd page; press *99 to move back to 1st page

second page of fields

(1*01-1*77)

press *94 to move to 3rd page; press *99 to move back to 2nd page

third page of fields

(2*00-2*24)

press *94 to move to 4th page; press *99 to move back to 3rd page

fourth page of fields

(3*00-3*85)

Viewing Data Fields

To view the contents of a data field, press [#] plus the 2-digit field address. The field's entries

will be displayed, but no changes can be made.

Section 21 - The Mechanics of Programming

21-3

Entry Errors

• If an invalid address is entered, the keypad will display “FC.”

• If a program entry is improperly entered (for example, a larger number than that which

is permitted), the entry position of the keypad display will go blank.

• In either of the above cases, simply re-enter [✴] + the correct field number and enter the

correct data.

SUMMARY OF DATA FIELD PROGRAMMING COMMANDS

*91 Select partition for programming partition-specific fields

*92 Will display the software revision level of the control panel

*93 Enters Menu Mode Programming

*94 Go to next page of fields

*99 Go back to previous page of fields or exit Programming Mode with

no Installer Code lockout

*98 Exit Programming Mode with Installer Code lockout

Programming System-Wide Data Fields

Values for some programming fields are system-wide (global), and some can be different for

each partition (partition-specific). Note that the partition-specific programming fields are

automatically skipped when programming the global fields. If the system has only 1

partition, the partition-specific fields will not be automatically skipped. To program system-

wide data fields, do the following:

1. Enter Program Mode: [Installer code] + 8 0 0 0.

2. After entry into the Program Mode, the following will be displayed:

Program Mode

*Fill # View -00

3. If the control has not been programmed before, enter *97 to load factory defaults.

4. Press [✴] and enter the first field number to be programmed (for example, *00,

Installer's Code). Make the desired entry. When the field is complete, the keypad will

beep three times and will advance to the next field. If you do not desire to change the

next field, press [✴] and enter the next field number to be programmed.

First Page of fields

(*00-*90)

press *99 or *98 to exit Program Mode

5. If the number of digits that you enter in a data field is fewer than the maximum

permitted (for example, a phone number), the keypad displays the last entry and waits.

To proceed, enter [✴] + the next data field you wish to program (e. g., press *08).

Partition-specific programming fields are skipped unless entered specifically or the

system is set up for 1 partition only.

6. To change to the next page of fields, press *94. To return to the previous page of fields,

press *99.

Programming Partition-Specific Data Fields

To program partition-specific data fields once in Program Mode, do the following:

1. Press *91, which will prompt you for the partition number desired.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

21-4

2. Enter a partition-specific field number (e.g., *09) to begin programming. When the first

field’s entry is completed, the next partition-specific field will automatically be displayed.

When all partition-specific fields are programmed, the system returns to the global

programming fields (page 1 fields). To return to the global program fields before

finishing all fields, enter any global field number.

3. Repeat this procedure for each partition in the installation.

PROGRAMMING PARTITION-SPECIFIC FIELDS

Press *91 to select a partition.

↓

Enter the partition to be programmed.

↓

Enter a partition-specific field # and make entry.

↓

After partition-specific fields are programmed,

press *91 to select next partition.

Enter any global field number to return to the global fields at any time.

#93 Menu Mode Programming

The #93 Menu Mode is a mode through which much of the system's programming is done. It

offers main menu selections for the following:

• Zone Programming

• Sequential Mode Programming

• Report Code Programming

• Alpha Programming

• Device Programming

• Relay Programming

• Relay Voice Descriptors

• Custom Index Programming (VIP Module substitute words)

• Clear Serial RF

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES) in response to the displayed menu selection. Pressing 0 will display

the next choice in sequence. The keypad will then prompt you with questions regarding the

programming of a particular zone or device. (Refer to the #93 Menu Mode Programming

section to program each option shown.)

The following is a list of commands used while in the Menu Mode.

#93 Menu Mode Key Commands

#93 Enters Menu Mode.

[✴]Serves as ENTER key. Press to have keypad accept entry.

[#] Backs up to previous screen.

0 Press to answer NO.

1 Press to answer YES.

00+[✴]Escapes from Menu Mode, back into Data Field Programming

Mode, if entered at the first prompt of each main menu option.

22-1

SECTION 22

Zone Type Definitions

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

Zone Number Designations

♦

Zone Type Definitions

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Zone Number Designations

The VISTA-128FB supports up to 128 zones of hardwire, polling loop and/or wireless

protection, distributed among up to 8 partitions. The following table lists the zone numbers

and the types of sensors that can be used with each in this system, and some alternate

functions the zones may be used as:

Zone Sensors

1 & 2 2-wire Smoke Detectors (if used)

5 Audio Alarm Verification (if used)

6 Cabinet Tamper/Ground Fault (if used)

7 Keyswitch (if used)

8 Latching-Type Glassbreak Detectors (if used)

1-8 Traditional Hardwired Zones

1-63 5700 Series Wireless Devices

1-128 5800 Series Wireless Devices

9-128 Polling Loop Devices

995 * + 1 Panic

996 # + 3 Panic

999 * + # Panic

Zone Type Definitions

Each zone must be assigned a zone type, which defines the way in which the system

responds to faults in that zone. In addition, there are three keypad-activated zones (panic

keys; see note) for each partition, a polling loop supervision zone, and four RF supervisory

zones, two for each RF receiver installed. Zone types are defined below.

Type 00: Zone Not Used

Program a zone with this zone type if the zone is

not used.

Type 01: Entry/Exit #1 Burglary

This zone type provides entry delay whenever the

zone is faulted if the control is armed in the

AWAY or STAY Mode. When the panel is armed

in the INSTANT or MAXIMUM Mode, no entry

delay is provided. Exit delay begins whenever the

control is armed, regardless of the arming mode

selected. These delays are programmable. This

zone type is usually assigned to sensors or

contacts on doors through which primary entry

and exit will take place.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

22-2

Type 02: Entry/Exit #2 Burglary

This zone type provides a secondary entry delay

whenever the zone is faulted if the panel is armed

in the AWAY and STAY Mode. When the panel is

armed in the INSTANT or MAXIMUM Mode, no

entry delay is provided. Secondary exit delay

begins whenever the control is armed, regardless

of the arming mode selected. These delays are

programmable. This zone type is usually assigned

to sensors or contacts on doors through which

more time is needed to get to and from the

keypad. Delay times for this zone type must be

greater than zone type 01 (e.g., a garage, loading

dock, or basement door).

Type 03: Perimeter Burglary

This zone type gives an instant alarm if the zone

is faulted when the panel is armed in the AWAY,

STAY, INSTANT or MAXIMUM Mode. This zone

type is usually assigned to all sensors or contacts

on exterior doors and windows.

Type 04: Interior, Follower

This zone type gives a delayed alarm (using the

programmed entry/exit time) if the entry/exit zone

is faulted first. Otherwise this zone type gives an

instant alarm. This zone type is active when the

panel is armed in the AWAY or MAXIMUM Mode.

MAXIMUM Mode eliminates the entry delay.

This zone type is bypassed automatically

when the panel is armed in the STAY or

INSTANT Mode. This zone type is usually

assigned to a zone covering an area such as a

foyer, lobby, or hallway through which one must

pass upon entry or exit (after faulting the

entry/exit zone to reach the keypad to disarm the

system). Since this zone type is designed to

provide an instant alarm if the entry/exit zone is

not violated first, it will protect an area in the

event an intruder hides on the premises prior to

the system being armed, or gains access to the

premises through an unprotected area.

Type 05: Trouble by Day/Alarm by Night

This zone type will give an instant alarm if

faulted when armed in the AWAY, STAY,

INSTANT or MAXIMUM (night) Mode. During

the disarmed state (day), the system will provide

a latched trouble sounding from the keypad (and a

central station report, if desired). This zone type

is usually assigned to a zone that contains a foil-

protected door or window (such as in a store), or to

a zone covering a "sensitive" area such as a stock

room, drug supply room, etc. It can also be used

on a sensor or contact in an area where immediate

notification of an entry is desired.

Type 06: 24-Hour Silent Alarm

This zone type sends a report to the Central

Station but provides no keypad display or

sounding. This zone type is usually assigned to a

zone containing an Emergency button.

Type 07: 24-Hour Audible Alarm

This zone type sends a report to the central

station; and provides an alarm sound at the

keypad and an audible external alarm. This zone

type is usually assigned to a zone that has an

Emergency button.

Type 08: 24-Hour Auxiliary Alarm

This zone type sends a report to central station

and provides an alarm sound at the keypad. (No

bell output is provided.) This zone type is

usually assigned to a zone containing a button for

use in personal emergencies, or to a zone

containing monitoring devices such as water

sensors, temperature sensors, etc.

Type 09: Supervised Fire (Without Verification)

This zone type provides a fire alarm on short

circuit and a trouble condition on open circuit. The

bell output must be programmed to pulse when

this zone type is shorted. This zone type is always

active and cannot be bypassed.

Type 10: Interior W/Delay

This zone type gives entry and exit delays (using

the programmed entry/exit time), if tripped when

the panel is armed in the AWAY Mode. This zone

type is also active during MAXIMUM Mode, but

no entry delay is provided (alarms occur

immediately if zone is tripped). This zone type is

automatically bypassed when the panel is

armed in the STAY or INSTANT Mode. Delay

begins whenever sensors in this zone are violated,

regardless of whether or not an entry/exit delay

zone was tripped first.

Type 16: Fire With Verification

This zone type is used when smoke alarm

verification is desired on hardwire and polling

loop zones containing only 2-wire or 4-wire smoke

detectors. An open will initiate a trouble response

and a short will initiate a fire alarm response.

Initial short detection causes 7-second smoke

detector power reset. Subsequent short detection

within 90 seconds of reset causes fire alarm.

Section 22 – Zone Type Definitions

22-3

Type 17: Fire Waterflow

An open on this zone causes a trouble response.

Shorts which remain present longer than the

programmed time delay (fields 3*16 and 3*18)

cause a fire alarm response. This zone can either

be silenced by pressing [Code] + OFF or when

waterflow restores (programmed in field 3*14).

Type 18: Fire Supervisory

This zone type is assigned to a zone having

sensors that monitor fire sprinkler systems (i.e.,

PIV switches, etc.). A short on this zone causes a

supervisory response. Opens can be programmed

either for a trouble or a supervisory response

based on the entry in data field 3*13.

Type 19: 24-Hour Trouble

An open or short on this zone type causes a

trouble response. No external alarm sounders are

activated.

Type 20: Arm-STAY*

This is a special-purpose zone type used with 5800

Series wireless transmitters, which will result in

arming the system in the STAY Mode when the

zone is activated.

Type 21: Arm-AWAY*

This is a special-purpose zone type used with 5800

Series wireless transmitters, which will result in

arming the system in the AWAY Mode when the

zone is activated.

Type 22: Disarm*

This is a special-purpose zone type used with 5800

Series wireless transmitters, which will result in

disarming the system when the zone is activated.

Type 23: No Alarm Response

This zone type can be used on a zone when an

output relay action is desired, but with no

accompanying alarm (e.g., for lobby door access).

Type 27: Access Point

This zone type indicates that an input device

(hardwired zone, wireless zone, keypad, access

control relay, etc.) is controlling an access point

entry (e.g., a door). The access point entry relay

can be assigned to an access control relay

(controlled by the VISTA-128FB), ECP relay

(4204), or to the access control system

independent of the VISTA-128FB.

Type 28: Main Logic Board (MLB) Supervision

This zone type assigns a zone to supervise the

MLB. If communication between the MLB and the

Vista Gateway Module (VGM) fails, this zone will

be displayed on the keypad as “CHECK 8XX”

(XX = the ECP address the VGM is set to). Also, if

this zone fails, all access control system (ACS)

input zones will also display a “CHECK.”

* Note that these zone types are for use by 5800

Series devices only!

NOTE FOR PANIC KEYS: Keypad panic zones

share the same zone response type for all 8

partitions, but panics may be individually

enabled for each partition.

IMPORTANT! FAULT ANNUNCIATION

Polling loop and RF troubles (zones 988, 990 &

997) will report as trouble conditions only, and as

such, should be assigned zone type 19 if

annunciation is desired. See Polling Loop

Supervision in the Polling Loop Expansion

section and RF System Operation and

Supervision in the Wireless Zone Expansion

section for more information.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

22-4

23-1

SECTION 23

Zone Index/Zone Type Defaults

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

Zone Index

♦

Zone Type Defaults

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Zone Index

The VISTA-128FB has 128 protection zones, as well as supervisory zones for relays, ECP

devices (devices which communicate through the keypad terminals), and system troubles.

These zones are designated as follows:

ZONE # RANGE ZONE FUNCTION ACTUAL ZONE

001 - 128 Protection zones As indicated

601 - 632 Relay Supervisory Zones 6 + 2-digit Relay Number; e.g.,

Relay Number 03, if supervised, is

zone 603.

800 - 831 ECP Device Supervisory Zones

(includes keypads, wireless

receivers, VIP Module, relay

modules, etc.)

8 + 2-digit Device Address; e.g.,

Device Address 01, if supervised, is

zone 801. The 4285/4286 VIP

Module is zone 804 (since its Device

Address must be set to 4).

900 - 990 & 997 System Supervisory Zones 970: Bell Output 1

971: Bell Output 2

972: Earth Ground

973: J2 Input 1 (LRR)

974: Dialer 1

975: Dialer 2

976: Auxiliary Relay

977: J2 LRR Trigger Outputs

988: 2nd Wireless Receiver - not

receiving signals

990: 1st Wireless Receiver - not

receiving signals

997: Polling Loop (short circuit)

991 - 999 Keypad Panics 995: 1 + ✴ panic (A key)

996: 3 + # panic (C key)

999: ✴ + # panic (B key)

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

23-2

Response types for zones are enabled in Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode section.

Supervisory zones should be given a response type of either 19 (24-Hr. Trouble) or 05

(Trouble by Day, Alarm by Night).

Zone 976 is assigned to the built-in auxiliary relay output for the purpose of allowing the operation

of the relay to be bypassed. Zone 977 is assigned to the J2 LRR Output Triggers for the purpose

of allowing the operation of the outputs to be bypassed.

Zone Type Defaults

Following are the zone type defaults for zones on the VISTA-128FB:

Zone # Zone Type Zone # Zone Type

001 09

002 09

003 03

004 03

005 03

006 03

007 03

008 03

009–128 00

601-632 19

800-831 00

970 00

971 19

972 19

973 19

974 19

975 00

988 00

990 00

995 00

996 00

997 19

999 06

24-1

SECTION 24

Data Field Descriptions

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

The following is a description of all data fields provided by this control. If you have followed

earlier instructions during the installation of the various devices, many of these fields will

already have been programmed.

If you need more information about actual programming procedures, see The Mechanics of

Programming section.

*00 INSTALLER CODE [5140] |||

The Installer's Code is a 4-digit code reserved for installation company use. This is the

only code that can be used to enter the Program Mode from the keypad. This code cannot

be used to disarm the system if not used to arm the system. This code cannot reenter

Programming Mode if exited by the *98 command.

*08 TEMPORAL SIREN PULSE [0]

If either bell is selected for pulsing (program field 3*15), this field will determine the

rhythm and rate of pulsing as follows: If enabled (1), pulse rate will be three dings and a

pause, repeated. If disabled (0), the pulse rate will be 1 sec. on, 1 sec. off.

*09 ENTRY DELAY #1 (partition-specific) [02] |

Entry delay defines the delay time which allows users to re-enter the premises through a

door that has been programmed as an entry delay door and disarm the system without

sounding an alarm. The system must be disarmed within this period or an alarm will

occur. Enter the entry delay time (01-15 multiplied by 15 seconds, or 00 for no delay), up

to a maximum delay of 225 seconds (15 multiplied by 15 seconds), for zones assigned to

Zone Type 01.

*10 EXIT DELAY #1 (partition-specific) [03] |

Exit delay defines the delay period that allows users to leave the premises through a door

that has been programmed as an entry/exit delay door after arming the system without

setting off the alarm. Enter the exit delay time (01-15 multiplied by 15 seconds or 00 for

no delay), up to a maximum delay of 225 seconds, for zones assigned to Zone Type 01.

*11 ENTRY DELAY #2 (partition-specific) [06] |

Entry Delay #2 is used for a secondary door requiring a longer delay than those assigned

to Entry Delay #1. This delay may not exceed 45 seconds for UL commercial burglary

installations.

*12 EXIT DELAY #2 (partition-specific) [08] |

Exit Delay #2 is used for a secondary door requiring a longer delay than those assigned

to Exit Delay #1. This delay may not exceed 60 seconds for UL commercial burglary

installations.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

24-2

*13 BELL 1 TIMEOUT (partition-specific) [04] |

Defines the length of time Bell Output 1 and the keypad's sounder will sound for all

audible alarms (multiply entry 01-15 by 2 minutes for actual duration).

Must be a minimum of 16 minutes for UL commercial burglary installations, and 6

minutes for UL commercial fire installations.

*15 KEYSWITCH ASSIGNMENT [0]

Enter the partition number 1-8 in which the keyswitch is being used. Enter 9 if

keyswitch is to be used to silence fire bells in the event of a fire alarm. Otherwise, enter

Requires the use of zone 7 wired loop (zone 7 is no longer available as protection zone

when used for keyswitch operation). If the keyswitch is used, the fire and panic alarm

voltage triggers automatically become ARMING and READY status outputs for support

of the Keyswitch LEDs.

Reports openings/closing by user "0" if reporting is enabled in field *40.

*16 BELL 1 CONFIRMATION OF ARMING DING (part.-specific) [0]

Enter 1 to enable 1/2 second external alarm sounding ("ding") at the end of exit delay (or

after kissoff from the central station, if sending closing reports). Otherwise enter 0.

Must be 1 for UL commercial burglary installations. Bell test on arming is required in

UL commercial burglary installations.

*17 AC LOSS KEYPAD SOUNDING [0]

Enter 1 to enable sounding at the keypad (rapid beeping) when AC power is lost

(sounding occurs about 2 minutes after actual AC loss).

Enter 0 if no AC power loss keypad sounding is desired.

*19 RANDOMIZE AC LOSS REPORT [2]

Selecting this option helps prevent an overload of AC loss messages at the central station

during a community blackout.

Enter 1 to randomize AC loss reporting between 10 and 40 min. after an actual AC loss.

Enter 2 for 6-12 hours after AC loss. Enter 0 for normal AC loss reporting (about 2

minutes after actual AC loss).

*20 VIP MODULE PHONE CODE [00, 11] ||

If a 4285/4286 Voice Module is being used, enter the 2-digit phone code used to access the

system.

Enter 01-09 for first digit, and enter 11 (for ✴) or 12 (for #) for second digit.

To disable the voice module, enter 00 for the 1st digit and enter 11 for the 2nd digit of

the code (disable code = 00,11). Must be disabled for commercial fire and UL commercial

burglary installations.

*22 KEYPAD PANIC ENABLES (partition-specific) [001] ||

995 996 999

Enter 1 to enable the appropriate keypad panics used in this partition.

Otherwise enter 0.

Section 24 – Data Field Descriptions

24-3

*23 MULTIPLE ALARMS (partition-specific) [1]

Determines whether or not more than one alarm can be sounded in a given zone during

an armed period. Note that multiple alarm soundings will not occur more frequently

than allowed by the programmed alarm sounder duration. This selection applies to local

sounding and has no impact on the number of communication messages transmitted.

Refer to ∗84 Swinger Suppression for limiting communication messages. Enter 1 if this

feature is desired. Enter 0 if not desired. Must be 1 for UL installations.

*24 IGNORE EXPANSION ZONE TAMPER [0]

Enter 1 to disable (ignore) tamper.

Enter 0 if tamper detection is desired. Must be 0 for UL installations.

Note: Only applicable to certain polling loop sensors with tamper switches or 5800 Series

transmitters. This option is used to disable tamper detection on these devices.

*25 BURG. TRIGGER FOR RESPONSE TYPE 8 [1]

Enter 1 to allow optional triggering of the voltage output on Pin 3 of the J2 header to

include zone response type 8 (24-hr. auxiliary).

Enter 0 if only burglary and audible panic alarms (zone type 7) will trigger Pin 3.

*26 INTELLIGENT TEST REPORTING [0]

Enter 1 if no test report is to be sent if any other type of report was sent since the last

test report.

Enter 0 if test reports are to be sent at the set intervals, regardless of whether or not

other reports have been sent. Must be 0 for UL applications.

*27 TEST REPORT INTERVAL [024] ||

Enter the test reporting interval in hours, 001-999.

Enter 000 if no test reporting is desired. If a test report is desired, enter a test code in

Report Code Programming in the #93 Menu Mode Programming section.

Set first test report time in field *83.

Max. 024 for commercial fire and UL commercial burglary installations.

*28 POWER UP IN PREVIOUS STATE [1]

Enter 1 if upon power-up, after a prolonged power loss which caused the system's battery

to discharge, the system will assume the system status prior to the power loss.

Enter 0 if the system is always to power up in a disarmed state. When the system

powers up armed, an alarm will occur 3 minutes after arming if a zone is faulted. When

so armed, the system reports closing as User #0 if Open/Close reporting for installer was

enabled in field *39. Note that if the previous state was armed AWAY or STAY, the

system may not respond to sensor changes for a small period of time (1-3 min.), which

allows sensors such as PIRs to stabilize.

Note: Must be 1 for UL applications. Note that authority levels 0 or 5 cannot be used to

disarm the system if the control powers up armed.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

24-4

*29 QUICK ARM (partition-specific) [1]

Enter 1 to enable arming of the burglary system in AWAY, STAY, INSTANT or

MAXIMUM modes by using the # key instead of the user code. When armed, the system

reports closing as User 0 if Open/Close reporting for User #2 (typically a Master level

user) was enabled for a given partition. Enter 0 if Quick Arm is not desired. (The user

code must always be used to disarm the system.) Note that if Quick Arm is used, the

Installer Code and Authority Level 5 codes cannot disarm the system.

*30 MAIN DIALER (TOUCHTONE OR ROTARY DIAL) [0]

Enter 1 if TouchTone service is being used.

Enter 0 if rotary phone service is used.

If selecting TouchTone, make sure the subscriber has requested and is paying for TouchTone

service. Note that whether or not TouchTone dialing for call placement is permitted, communication

by the use of DTMF signaling (ADEMCO High Speed) will still take place. See field 1*33 for

TouchTone w/Rotary backup.

*31 PABX ACCESS CODE ||||

This field is used to enter up to four 2-digit numbers 00-09; B-F (11-15). If not required,

enter nothing and proceed to next address; otherwise, enter prefix needed to obtain an

outside telco line.

*32 PRIMARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT # (partition-specific) ||||

Enter 00-09; B-F (11-15) [15 15 15 15]

Enter a 3- or 4-digit (depending on report format) primary subscriber account number

00-09; B-F (11-15). Each number requires a 2-digit entry so as to allow entry of

hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3-digit account number is to be used, enter data only in the

first 3 locations, leaving the last one unfilled, by entering a *.

*33 PRIMARY PHONE NUMBER ||||||||||||||||

This field is used to enter the primary central station phone number, up to 17 digits, 0-9;

enter #11 for *, #12 for #, and #13 for a 2-sec. pause. This is the phone number the

control will use to transmit Alarm and status messages to the central station. Do not fill

unused spaces.

Note: Backup reporting is automatic only if a secondary phone number is entered, and

no dual/split options have been programmed (the number of attempts to the primary

number before dialing the secondary number is determined by field 3*21).

*34 SECONDARY PHONE NUMBER

||||||||||||||||

This field is used to enter the secondary phone number, up to 17 digits, 0-9; enter #11

for *, #12 for #, and #13 for a 2-sec. pause. The secondary phone number is used if

communication on the primary number is unsuccessful, or if split/dual reporting is

desired. Do not fill unused spaces. If this field is programmed, a secondary subscriber

account number (field *90) must also be programmed (can be the same as the primary

account number).

Section 24 – Data Field Descriptions

24-5

*35 DOWNLOAD PHONE NUMBER

||||||||||||||||

This field is applicable only if downloading will be utilized.

Enter the downloading phone number, up to 17 digits, 0-9; enter #11 for *, #12 for #,

and #13 for a 2-sec. pause. Do not fill unused spaces.

*36 DOWNLOAD ID NUMBER

||||||||

Enter eight digits, 00-09; A-F (10-15). Default is [15, 15, 15, 15, 15, 15, 15, 15]. Only

applicable if downloading will be utilized. Make entries as 2-digit numbers as follows:

00=0 02=2 04=4 06=6 08=8 10=A 12=C 14=E

01=1 03=3 05=5 07=7 09=9 11=B 13=D 15=F

*37 DOWNLOAD COMMAND ENABLES

Dialer

Shutdown

System

Shutdown

Not

Used

Remote

Bypass

Remote

Disarm

Remote

Arm

Upload

Program

Download

Program

Each of the various remote functions can either be enabled or disabled through the

keypad for usage by V-LINK or Compass downloading software. Disabling a function

means that you will not be able to perform that function from the V-LINK or Compass.

Enter 1 to enable a function, and 0 to disable a function. See field 1*53 to disable the

Download Callback option. For commercial fire and UL commercial burglary

installations, all entries must be 0. Default is [11011111].

*38 PREVENT ZONE XXX BYPASS (partition-specific) [000] ||

Entering a zone number (001-128) prevents that zone from being bypassed by the user.

Enter 000 if this feature is not desired (all zones can be bypassed).

*39 ENABLE OPEN/CLOSE REPORT FOR INSTALLER CODE(partition-specific) [1]

Enter 1 if Open/Close reporting for the installer is desired.

Otherwise enter 0.

*40 OPEN/CLOSE REPORTING FOR KEYSWITCH [0]

Enter 1 to enable Open/Close reporting for the keyswitch.

Enter 0 if reporting is not desired.

*41 NORMALLY CLOSED OR EOLR (ZONES 3-8) [1]

Enter 0 if end-of-line resistors are to be used.

Enter 1 if end-of-line resistors are not to be used, in which case only normally closed

devices must be used.

Must be 0 for commercial fire and UL installations.

*42 DIAL TONE PAUSE [0]

This field sets the time the system will wait for dial tone before dialing. Applies if true

dial tone is not selected in field *43 or the dial tone is not actually detected.

Enter the desired wait time for dial tone detection as follows:

Enter single digit: 0 = 5 seconds; 1 = 11 seconds; or 2 = 30 seconds. Must be 0 for

commercial fire and UL installations.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

24-6

*43 DIAL TONE DETECTION [1]

Determines whether the control will wait for a true dial tone before dialing, or if it will

wait for a predetermined delay before dialing (delay is programmed in Dial Tone Pause

field *42). The latter may be necessary in high-noise environment telco networks where

noise can be confused with dial tone, resulting in premature dialing.

Enter 1 for true dial tone wait. If no dial tone is detected, will dial at end of pause

programmed in field *42.

Enter 0 to pause for seconds entered in field *42, then dial.

*44 RING DETECTION COUNT [00] |

Only applicable if using a 4285/4286 VIP Module and/or if station-initiated downloading

will be used.

Enter 00 to disable ring detection.

Enter 01-14 for ring counts of 1-14.

Enter 15 to select Answering Machine Defeat Mode, which allows the system to receive

calls even when a telephone answering machine is connected to the same phone line. In

the Answering Machine Mode, the caller should let the phone ring once, then hang up,

and call again within 30 seconds. The system, upon hearing one ring followed by nothing,

will not answer the first call, but will ready itself to pick up on the first ring of the next

incoming call that is received within 30 seconds (i.e., the downloader calling again).

Must be 00 for commercial fire & UL commercial burglary installations.

Note: Do not enter 00 if a 4285/4286 is installed.

*45 PRIMARY FORMAT [0]

This field selects the reporting format for use on the primary telephone number.

Enter the appropriate number for the primary format as follows: 0=Low Speed;

1=Contact ID; 2=ADEMCO High Speed; 3=ADEMCO Express

*46 LOW SPEED FORMAT (PRIMARY) [0]

Enter the appropriate value: 0=ADEMCO Low Speed; 1=Sescoa/Radionics

*47 SECONDARY FORMAT [0]

This field selects the reporting format for the secondary telephone number.

Enter the appropriate number for the secondary format as follows: 0=Low Speed;

1=Contact ID; 2=ADEMCO High Speed; 3=ADEMCO Express

*48 LOW SPEED FORMAT (SECONDARY) [0]

Enter the appropriate value: 0=ADEMCO Low Speed; 1=Sescoa/Radionics

*49 CHECKSUM VERIFICATION [0,0]

Enter 1 for either or both primary/secondary formats to send a verification digit to

validate the message at the receiver without having to send two message rounds.

Selection is valid for 3+1, 4+1, and 4+2 reports.

Enter 0 if not desired.

Section 24 – Data Field Descriptions

24-7

*50 SESCOA/RADIONICS SELECT [0]

Enter 0 if Radionics format is to be used with hexadecimal 0-9, B-F reporting. Enter 1 if

Sescoa format is to be used with only numeric reporting (0-9). Note that selection applies

to both primary and secondary phone numbers.

*51 DUAL REPORTING [0]

This field allows all reports to be sent to both primary and secondary phone numbers.

Enter 1 if all reports are to be sent to both primary and secondary phone numbers. If

used with Split Reporting option 1 (1*34), Alarms go to both primary and secondary

numbers, while all other reports go to secondary only. If used with Split Reporting option

2, alarms go to both lines, Open/Close and Test messages go to secondary only, while all

other reports go to primary. If used with Split Reporting option 3, Fire Alarms and

Supervisory reports go to primary, all reports go to secondary.

*52 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT PRIMARY

Alm Rst Byp Trbl Opn/Cls Low Batt

Enter 0 for standard or 1 for expanded reporting for the primary phone number; default

is 0. Default is [000000].

Note: Expanded overrides 4+2 format.

*53 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT SECONDARY

Alm Rst Byp Trbl Opn/Cls Low Batt

Enter 0 for standard or 1 for expanded reporting for the secondary phone number;

default is 0. Default is [000000].

Note: Expanded overrides 4+2 format.

*56 USE ONLY LRR (LONG RANGE RADIO) [0]

Enter 1 if the built-in dialer is not being used and only the LRR will be used to

communicate. Otherwise enter 0.

*57 USE LRR (LONG RANGE RADIO) IF DIALER FAILS [0]

Enter 1 if LRR is to be used as a backup to the built-in dialer if the dialer fails. The

radio messages begin transmitting the same time as the dialer. Once the dialer receives

a kissoff, the LRR will stop transmitting no matter where it might be within its

sequence. Otherwise enter 0.

*58 LONG RANGE RADIO CENTRAL STATION #1 CATEGORY ENABLE

Alm Trbl Byp Opn/ClsSyst Test

Enter 1 to enable reports for primary Subscriber ID of Long Range Radio. Otherwise,

enter 0. Default is [000000].

*59 LONG RANGE RADIO CENTRAL STATION #2 CATEGORY ENABLE

Alm Trbl Byp Opn/ClsSyst Test

Enter 1 to enable reports for secondary Subscriber ID of Long Range Radio. Otherwise,

enter 0. Default is [000000].

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

24-8

*64 ALPHA NUMERIC PAGER INSTALLED [0]

Enter 1 if the alpha numeric pager interface is installed. Otherwise enter 0.

*65 PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR ALARMS

||||||||||||||||

This field is used to enter the alpha numeric paging service phone number for Alarm

reports. Enter up to 17 digits, 0-9; enter #11 for *, #12 for #, and #13 for a 2-sec.

pause. Do not fill unused spaces. Enter * after the last digit of the phone number.

*66 PAGER ID NUMBER FOR ALARMS

This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for Alarm reports. Enter up to 10 digits.

If fewer than 10 digits are required, enter * after the last digit, (i.e., pager pin number).

*67 PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR TROUBLES

||||||||||||||||

This field is used to enter the alpha numeric paging service phone number for Trouble

reports. Enter up to 17 digits, 0-9; enter #11 for *, #12 for #, and #13 for a 2-sec.

pause. Do not fill unused spaces. Enter * after the last digit of the phone number.

*68 PAGER ID NUMBER FOR TROUBLES

This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for Trouble reports. Enter up to 10

digits. If fewer than 10 digits are required, enter * after the last digit, (i.e., pager pin

number).

*69 PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR BYPASSES

||||||||||||||||

This field is used to enter the alpha numeric paging service phone number for Bypass

reports. Enter up to 17 digits, 0-9; enter #11 for *, #12 for #, and #13 for a 2-sec.

pause. Do not fill unused spaces. Enter * after the last digit of the phone number.

*70 PAGER ID NUMBER FOR BYPASSES

This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for Bypass reports. Enter up to 10 digits.

If fewer than 10 digits are required, enter * after the last digit, (i.e., pager pin number).

*71 PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR OPENS/CLOSES

||||||||||||||||

This field is used to enter the alpha numeric paging service phone number for

Open/Close reports. Enter up to 17 digits, 0-9; enter #11 for *, #12 for #, and #13 for

a 2-sec. pause. Do not fill unused spaces. Enter * after the last digit of the phone

number.

*72 PAGER ID NUMBER FOR OPENS/CLOSES

This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for Open/Close reports. Enter up to 10

digits. If fewer than 10 digits are required, enter * after the last digit, (i.e., pager pin

number).

*73 PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR SYSTEM

||||||||||||||||

This field is used to enter the alpha numeric paging service phone number for System

reports. Enter up to 17 digits, 0-9; enter #11 for *, #12 for #, and #13 for a 2-sec.

pause. Do not fill unused spaces. Enter * after the last digit of the phone number.

Section 24 – Data Field Descriptions

24-9

*74 PAGER ID NUMBER FOR SYSTEM

This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for System reports. Enter up to 10 digits.

If fewer than 10 digits are required, enter * after the last digit, (i.e., pager pin number).

*75 PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR TEST

||||||||||||||||

This field is used to enter the alpha numeric paging service phone number for Test

reports. Enter up to 17 digits, 0-9; enter #11 for *, #12 for #, and #13 for a 2-sec.

pause. Do not fill unused spaces. Enter * after the last digit of the phone number.

*76 PAGER ID NUMBER FOR TEST

This field is used to enter the Pager ID number for Test reports. Enter up to 10 digits. If

fewer than 10 digits are required, enter * after the last digit, (i.e., pager pin number).

*79 ZONE TYPE RESTORES FOR ZONE TYPES 1-8

12345678

Enter 1 to enable Restore reporting for individual zone types.

Enter 0 if no Restore report is desired for a zone type. Default is [00000000].

*80 ZONE TYPE RESTORES FOR TYPES 9/10

910

Enter 1 to enable restore reporting for individual zone types.

Enter 0 if no restore report is desired for a zone type. Default is [00].

*83 FIRST TEST REPORT TIME [00, 12, 00] |||

Enter the day (00-07) and time (00-23 hours/00-59 min.) that the first test report shall

be transmitted.

Enter 00 in all locations if the test report is to be sent immediately upon exiting.

Enter 00 in the day location if the report is to be sent at the next occurrence of the time

that is set.

Note: that day 01=Monday. See Report Code Programming (System Group 1) in the #93

Menu Mode Programming section for assigning the Test Report Code.

*84 SWINGER SUPPRESSION (partition-specific) [03] |

This option limits the number of messages (alarms or troubles) sent for a specific channel

in an armed period (Swinger Suppression). Enter 01-15. If 00 is selected, all alarm or

trouble codes are reported.

Must be 00 (disabled) for commercial fire and UL installations.

*85 ENABLE DIALER REPORTS FOR PANICS & DURESS [0000]

(partition-specific) 995 996 999 Duress

Enter 1 for each panic/duress for which reporting is desired.

Note: To enable Duress reporting a non-zero report code must be assigned to Zone 992

(duress) in Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode Programming section.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

24-10

*87 ENTRY WARNING (partition-specific) [1]

Enter 0 for 3 short beeps, or 1 for slow beeps that continue for the entire entry delay

period.

*88 BURG. ALARM COMM. DELAY (partition-specific) [0]

Enter 0 for no delay on burglary alarm communication. Enter 1 for 16-second delay (no

delay on 24-hour reports). Must be 0 for UL installations.

*89 RESTORE REPORT TIMING [0]

Enter 0 for instant Restore report as zone restores.

Enter 1 for reporting after bell timeout if zone restored. Enter 2 for Restore report when

system is subsequently disarmed. Must be 2 for commercial fire or UL commercial

burglary installation.

*90 SECONDARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT # ||||

(partition-specific) Enter 00-09; B-F (11-15) [15 15 15 15]

Enter the 3- or 4-digit number (depending on report format) for the secondary subscriber

account: 00-09; B-F (11-15). Each number requires a 2-digit entry to allow entry of

hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3-digit number is to be used, enter data only in the first 6

locations, leaving the last two unfilled. Default=15 15 15 15. Erase the field by entering

*90*. NOTE: This field must be programmed if a secondary phone number is used (field

*34). This account number can be the same as the primary account number.

1*17 LOBBY PARTITION [0]

Enter the Common Lobby Partition (1-8).

Enter 0 if none.

1*18 AFFECTS LOBBY (partition-specific) [0]

Enter 1 if this partition “affects” the common lobby. The system will not arm the lobby

unless this partition is armed already. Also, will cause lobby to disarm when this

partition disarms.

Enter 0 if it does not.

1*19 ARMS LOBBY (partition-specific) [0]

Enter 1 if arming this partition causes the system to attempt to arm the common lobby

partition automatically. Can only arm lobby if all other affecting partitions are armed.

To enable this field, field 1*18 must also be enabled (partition-specific).

Enter 0 if arming this partition will not attempt to arm the common lobby partition.

1*20 EXIT ERROR LOGIC ENABLE [0]

Enter 1 to enable (entry/exit doors and interior points will be bypassed if left open).

Enter 0 if Exit Error Logic is not desired. Must be 0 for UL commercial burglary

installations.

1*21 EXIT DELAY RESET [0]

Enter 1 to reset exit delay to 60 seconds after door is closed.

Enter 0 if exit delay not to be reset. Must be 0 for UL commercial burglary installations.

Section 24 – Data Field Descriptions

24-11

1*22 CROSS ZONING PAIR ONE [00,00] ||

Enter the first pair of zones, which must both be faulted within a five-minute period of

each other to cause an alarm.

Enter 00,00 to disable. Must be 00,00 for UL burglary Installations.

1*23 CROSS ZONING PAIR TWO [00,00] ||

Enter the second pair of zones, which must both be faulted within a five-minute period of

each other to cause an alarm.

Enter 00,00 to disable. Must be 00,00 for UL burglary Installations.

1*24 CROSS ZONING PAIR THREE [00,00] ||

Enter the third pair of zones, which must both be faulted within a five-minute period of

each other to cause an alarm.

Enter 00,00 to disable. Must be 00,00 for UL burglary Installations.

1*25 CROSS ZONING PAIR FOUR [00,00] ||

Enter the fourth pair of zones, which must both be faulted within a five-minute period of

each other to cause an alarm.

Enter 00,00 to disable. Must be 00,00 for UL burglary Installations.

1*26 PANIC BUTTON OR SPEEDKEY [00,00,00,00] ||||

ABCD

For each lettered key A-C, enter 00 to assign that key’s respective panic function, or

enter a speedkey macro number 01-32 to assign a particular macro to that key. For the D

key, enter 00 to use the D key to select a macro to execute when key is pressed, or enter a

macro number 01-32 to execute a particular macro with the D key.

Instead of the 32 macros, the A, B, and C keys can be programmed for any of 3 other

functions.

Choice 33 = fire sounder silence. The key, when pressed, will silence fire alarms.

Choice 34 = display next fire alarm. The key, when pressed, will display the next fire

alarm present in the system.

Choice 35 = display previous fire alarm. The key, when pressed, will display the

previous fire alarm present in the system.

Note: Choices 34 and 35 should be used in conjunction with field 3*01 Fire Display Lock.

1*28 RF TX LOW BATTERY SOUND [0]

Enter 0 if audible beep and display upon RF transmitter low battery condition is desired

only in disarmed state.

Enter 1 if audible beep and display is desired in both armed and disarmed states.

Must be 1 for UL.

1*29 RF TX LOW BATTERY REPORTING [0]

Enter 1 if a Trouble message for RF transmitter low battery condition is to be sent to the

central station.

Enter 0 if no report for transmitter low battery is desired. Note that a Trouble message

will be sent for a transmitter supervision failure, independent of this selection.

Must be 1 for UL.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

24-12

1*30 RF RCVR SUPERVISION CHECK-IN INTERVAL [02] |

Enter the check-in monitoring interval in 2-hour increments.

Enter 02-15 times 2 hours (4-30 hours).

Failure of a receiver to receive any RF signal within the time entered will result in

activation of the response type programmed for zone 990 for the first receiver and zone

988 for the second receiver and their related communication reports.

Enter 00 to disable receiver supervision.

Max. "2" (4 hr) for UL.

1*31 RF TRANSMITTER CHECK-IN INTERVAL [02] |

Enter the check-in monitoring interval in 2-hour increments.

Enter 02-15 times 2 hours (4-30 hours).

Failure of an individual transmitter to send a supervision signal within the time entered

will result in a trouble response and related communication report. Enter 00 to disable

transmitter supervision.

Max. "2" (4 hr) for UL.

1*32 RF RECEIVER TYPE [0]

Enter 0 if no receiver is being used.

Enter 1 if using 4281 Series receivers.

Enter 2 if using 5881 Series receivers.

Important: the 4281 Microprocessor must have part number N5334Vx, where x is any

number.

1*33 TOUCH-TONE W/ROTARY BACKUP [0]

Enter 1 to enable rotary backup dialing if communicator is not successful in dialing using

TouchTone DTMF on first attempt.

Enter 0 if this option is not desired.

1*34 COMM. SPLIT REPORT SELECTION [0]

This field allows certain reports to be directed to either the primary or secondary phone

number.

Enter 0, 1, or 2, in accordance with the following:

0 = split reporting disabled;

1 = Alarm, Alarm Restore and Cancel reports sent to primary telco number, all others to

secondary telco number;

2 = Open/Close and Test reports sent to secondary telco number and all other reports to

primary;

3 = Fire Alarms and Fire Restore reports sent to primary telco number, all reports to

secondary.

See *51 for split/dual reporting combinations.

1*42 CALL WAITING DEFEAT [0]

Enter 1 for the panel to defeat Call Waiting on the first attempt (DO NOT enable unless

Call Waiting is being used).

Otherwise, enter 0.

Section 24 – Data Field Descriptions

24-13

1*43 PERMANENT KEYPAD DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING (partition-specific) [0]

Enter 1 if backlighting for the keypad display is to remain on at all times.

Enter 0 if the display should remain unlit unless a key is pressed. The backlighting then

turns off again after a period of keypad inactivity. Note that when a key is pressed,

display backlighting turns on for all keypads in that partition.

1*44 WIRELESS KEYPAD TAMPER DETECT [0]

Enter 1 to enable tamper detection on wireless keypad.

Enter 0 if tamper detection is not desired. If more than 40 key depressions are received

without a valid sequence (arm, disarm, etc.), the control panel will disable the wireless

keypad. The inhibit is removed once a valid key sequence is received from a wired

keypad.

1*45 EXIT DELAY SOUNDING (partition-specific) [0]

Enter 1 if beeps from the keypads during exit delay are desired. Enter 0 for no keypad

sound during exit delay.

1*47 CHIME ON BELL 1 (partition-specific) [0]

Enter 1 for chime annunciation using the external alarm sounder. If not desired, enter 0.

1*48 WIRELESS KEYPAD ASSIGNMENT [0]

Enter the partition in which RF keypad is used, 1-8.

Enter 0 if no RF keypad is used.

1*49 SUPPRESS TX SUPERVISION SOUND [1]

Enter 1 to disable trouble sounding for transmitter check-in failure.

Enter 0 if audible trouble sounding is desired.

Must be 0 for UL.

1*52 SEND CANCEL IF ALARM + OFF (partition-specific) [0]

Enter 1 if Cancel reports are to be sent when the system is disarmed after an alarm,

regardless of how much time has gone by.

Enter 0 if Cancel reports are to be sent within bell timeout period only.

1*53 DISABLE DOWNLOAD CALLBACK [0]

Enter 1 to disable the callback requirement for downloading.

Enter 0 to require a callback.

Must be 0 for commercial fire and UL commercial burglary installations.

1*56 AC 60Hz or 50Hz [0]

Enter 1 for 50 Hz Standard or 0 for 60 Hz Standard. Must be set to 0 for U.S.

installations (this is the default).

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

24-14

1*57 ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON GLOBAL ARM [0]

Enter 1 to have the system arm/disarm in accordance with the button's user's global

arming settings.

Enter 0 if the button is not to be used to global arm the system (however, home partition

arming will still occur).

1*58 ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON FORCE ARM [0]

Enter 1 to allow the RF button user to force a bypass of all faulted zones when arming

the system. When attempting to arm the system, the keypad will beep once after

pressing the button if any faulted zones are present. If this feature is enabled, the user

should then press the button again within 4 seconds to force-bypass those zones and arm

the system.

Enter 0 if RF button force bypass is not desired.

1*60 ZONE 5 AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION [0]

Enter 1 if 2-way audio (AAV) is being used.

Enter 0 if AAV is not being used. Must be 0 for commercial fire and UL.

1*70 EVENT LOG TYPES

Alm Chck Byps O/C Systm Test

Enter 1 for each type of event for which event logging is desired.

Otherwise enter 0. Default is [100010].

Note: Events will also be logged into the PassPoint system, if installed.

1*71 12/24 HOUR TIME STAMP FORMAT [0]

Select the type of time stamping desired:

0=standard 12 hour; 1= 24-hour format.

1*72 EVENT LOG PRINTER ON-LINE MODE [0]

Enter 1 to have the printer print events as they occur.

Enter 0 to enable the printer such that the logs are printed only upon request.

1*73 PRINTER BAUD RATE [0]

Enter 0 if printer is set for 1200 baud (preferred).

Enter 1 if printer is set for 300 baud.

Note: Must be 1200 if using the alpha numeric pager interface.

1*74 RELAY TIMEOUT XXX MINUTES [000] ||

Enter the relay time-out, 000-127 in multiples of 2 minutes, desired for #80 Menu Mode

time driven event relay command numbers "04/09" and Relay Programming output

command "56" (refer to #93 Menu Mode Programming and Scheduling Options sections).

1*75 RELAY TIMEOUT YYY SECONDS [000] ||

Enter the relay time-out, 000-127 seconds, desired for #80 Menu Mode time driven event

relay command numbers "05/10" and Relay Programming output command "57" (refer to

#93 Menu Mode Programming and Scheduling Options sections).

Section 24 – Data Field Descriptions

24-15

1*76 ACCESS RELAY # (partition-specific) [00] |

The system can be programmed to provide user-activated access control. If enabled, the

assigned relay will pulse for 2 seconds when the user enters his code and presses 0. Enter

the relay number (01-32) for the relay that will be used for access control. Enter 00 if not

used in this partition. This function has not been UL Listed for use with the VISTA-

128FB control. Must be 00 for commercial fire and UL.

Note: See the Access Control section for enhanced access control capability.

1*77 LOG FIRST MAINTENANCE SIGNAL [0]

Enter 0 for no logging.

Enter 1 to log first maintenance signal from each smoke detector.

2*00 NUMBER OF PARTITIONS [1]

Enter the number of partitions (1-8) to be used in the system.

2*01 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME START/END MONTH [04,10] ||

Enter the months (00-12) in which daylight savings time starts and ends.

Enter 00, 00 if daylight savings time does not apply to the user's region. Standard

setting for U.S. is 04,10.

2*02 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME START/END WEEKEND [1,5]

Enter the start and end weekends for daylight savings time as follows: 1=first; 2=second;

3=third; 4=fourth; 5=last; 6=next to last; 7=third from last. Standard setting for U.S. is

1,5.

ULFields 2*05 – 2*08 must be set to 0 for UL installations.

2*05 AUTO-ARM DELAY (partition-specific) [15] |

Enter the time between the end of the arming window and the start of auto arm warning

time in values of 01-14 times 4 minutes.

Enter 00 if no delay is desired.

Enter 15 if auto arming is not desired.

2*06 AUTO-ARM WARNING PERIOD (partition-specific) [15] |

Enter the time 01-15 in one-minute increments during which the user is warned by a

keypad sounding and display to exit the premises prior to auto arming of the system.

Enter 00 to disable the warning period.

2*07 AUTO-DISARM DELAY (partition-specific) [15] |

Enter the time between the end of the disarming window and the start of auto disarming

of the system in values of 01-14 times 4 minutes.

Enter 00 if no delay is desired.

Enter 15 if auto disarming is not desired.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

24-16

2*08 FORCE ARM ENABLE (FOR AUTO-ARM) (partition-specific) [0]

Enter 1 if the system should automatically bypass any faulted zones when it attempts to

auto-arm. Otherwise enter 0.

2*09 OPEN/CLOSE REPORTS BY EXCEPTION (partition-specific) [0]

Enter 1 if Open/Close reports are to be sent only if the openings/closings occur outside

the arm and disarm windows. Open reports will also be suppressed during the closing

window in order to prevent false alarms if the user arms the system, then reenters the

premises to retrieve a forgotten item. Note that openings and closings are still recorded

in the event log. Enter 0 if exception reporting is not desired. Note: This field must be

set to 1 if No Opening and No Closing reports are to be sent.

2*10 ALLOW DISARMING ONLY DURING ARM/DISARM WINDOWS (partition-specific) [0]

Enter 1 if disarming of the system should be allowed only during the arming/disarming

windows, or if the system is in alarm (if 2*11 is set to 1). Note that this applies only to

operator level users. Installer, Master and Manager level users can disarm the system at

any time. Enter 0 if disarming can occur at any time.

0=disable for displayed partition; 1=enable for displayed partition

2*11 ALLOW DISARM OUTSIDE WINDOW IF ALARM OCCURS [0]

Used only if field 2*10 (partition-specific field) is set to 1.

Enter 1 to allow the system to be disarmed outside the programmed disarm (opening)

window if an alarm has occurred.

Enter 0 to allow disarming only during the disarm window, regardless of system status.

If field 2*10 is set to 0 for a partition, this field (2*11) has no effect for that partition.

2*18 ENABLE GOTO FOR THIS PARTITION (partition-specific) [0]

Enter 1 if this partition is to be accessed from another partition's keypad using the

GOTO command. Otherwise enter 0.

2*19 USE PARTITION DESCRIPTOR [0]

Enter 1 if partition descriptors will be programmed. If enabled, the normal keypad

display will include a partition number and four-digit descriptor.

Enter 0 to cause the keypads to display a nonpartitioned system type of display (no

partition number will appear).

2*20 ENABLE J2 TRIGGERS FOR PARTITION (partition-specific) [1]

2*21 SUPERVISION PULSES FOR LRR [00000] | | | |

F B P S T

Used for supervised connection to 7920SE.

Enter 1 to enable pulses for each type of LRR trigger (Fire, Burglary, silent Panic,

Supervisory, Trouble). This option causes the control to send periodic short pulses on the

J2 radio triggers. These pulses are used by the 7920SE to determine that its connection

to the control is still intact.

Enter 0 if not desired.

Must be 1 for commercial fire and UL.

Section 24 – Data Field Descriptions

24-17

2*22 DISPLAY FIRE ALARMS OF OTHER PARTITIONS (partition-specific) [0]

Enter 1 to allow fire alarms that occur on other partitions to be displayed at this

partition's keypad(s). Otherwise, enter 0.

2*23 DISPLAY BURG & PANIC ALARMS OF OTHER PARTITIONS [0]

Enter 1 to allow burglary and panic alarms that occur on other partitions to be displayed

at this partition's keypad(s). Otherwise, enter 0.

2*24 DISPLAY TROUBLES OF OTHER PARTITIONS [0]

Enter 1 to allow troubles that occur on other partitions to be displayed at this partition's

keypad(s). Otherwise, enter 0.

3*00 CHECK OR TRBL DISPLAY [0]

Enter 1 to display the letters “TRBL” instead of “CHECK” when a zone or system trouble

occurs.

Enter 0 to display “CHECK.”

3*01 FIRE DISPLAY LOCK [0]

Enter 0 to scroll all alarms.

Enter 1 to lock display of first fire alarm (press * to display other alarms).

3*12 ZN TYPE 18 DELAY USE [1]

Enter 0 if there is to be no delay for zone type 18.

Enter 1 to use delay set in field 3*16 for zone type 18.

Note: For UL Listed installations, combined initiating device’s delay and this field’s

delay cannot exceed 90 seconds.

3*13 SUPERVISORY ON OPEN & SHORT [0]

Enter 0 if you want a supervisory response on a shorted zone and a trouble response on

an open zone. Enter 1 if you want a supervisory response on either a shorted or an open

zone.

3*14 WATERFLOW ALARM SILENCE OPTION [0]

Enter 0 if you want waterflow supervisory zones to be silenced by entering the [Code] +

OFF. Enter 1 if you want waterflow supervisory zones to silence automatically when

waterflow ceases. This feature may only be set to 1 by permission of the local authority.

3*15 ALARM SOUNDS BELL 1, 2 [1,0]

Bell 1 Bell 2

Enter 0 for pulsing, 1 for steady output on Bell Outputs 1 and 2. If pulsing is selected,

field *08 applies.

3*16 ZONE TYPES 17 & 18 DELAY [00] |

Enter 01-15 times 2 seconds if a delay is desired for waterflow and fire supervisory

zones. This may help prevent alarms due to minor fluctuations in waterflow. Otherwise,

enter 00.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

24-18

3*17 ZONE 6 ALTERNATE FUNCTION ENABLE [0]

Enter 1 to enable Zone 6 as a tamper zone (Bell Tamper).

3*18 EXTENDED DELAY FOR TYPES 17 & 18 [0]

This option allows the delay programmed in field 3*16 for Waterflow & fire Supervisory

zones to be extended by 4 times.

Enter 1 to multiply delay by 4.

Enter 0 to use delay programmed in field 3*16.

ULFor a Waterflow alarm, total maximum allowable time delay (device and panel) is 90 seconds.

For a supervisory signal, total maximum allowable time delay (device and panel) is 200 seconds.

3*19 AUXILIARY INPUT ALTERNATE FUNCTION ENABLE [0]

Enter 1 to enable pins 5 & 9 as printer RXD & DTR. Enter 0 if pins are to function as

selected in 3*20.

3*20 TRIGGER OUTPUTS FUNCTION SELECTION [0]

Enter 0 for Long Range Radio outputs and Remote Keypad Sounder. Enter 1 for limited

LORRA outputs & Keyswitch LEDs. Enter 2 for LORRA Fire output only and 5140LED

connection.

3*21 MAX # OF DIALER ATTEMPTS [8]

Enter the maximum number of attempts to each telephone number, 1-8. Must be 3, 4, or

5 for NFPA72-compliant systems if a secondary number is programmed.

3*30 DIALER SELECTION [1,0]

Main Backup

Enter 1 to enable each dialer that exists in the system.

3*31 BACKUP DIALER TOUCHTONE/ROTARY [0]

Enter the dialing method for the system's backup dialer.

Enter 1 for TouchTone, 0 for Rotary.

3*50 ZONE TYPE RESTORE ENABLES FOR ZONE TYPES 16-18

16 17 18

Enter 1 for each zone type to send a Restore message to the central station. Default is

[000]. (Must be 1 for commercial fire and UL commercial burglary installations.)

3*55 RESET ON SECOND OFF FOR BELL 1 [0]

Enter 0 and the first OFF sequence ([Security Code] + OFF) after a fire alarm to de-

activate sounders and/or strobe lights connected to Bell 1 output.

Enter 1 and the second OFF sequence ([Security Code] + OFF) after a fire alarm to de-

activate sounders and/or strobe lights connected to Bell 1 output.

Section 24 – Data Field Descriptions

24-19

3*56 RESET ON SECOND OFF FOR BELL 2 [0]

Enter 0 and the first OFF sequence ([Security Code] + OFF) after a fire alarm to de-

activate sounders and/or strobe lights connected to Bell 2 output.

Enter 1 and the second OFF sequence ([Security Code] + OFF) after a fire alarm to de-

activate sounders and/or strobe lights connected to Bell 2 output.

3*57 CONFIRMATION OF ARMING DING BELL 2 & AUX RELAY [0,0]

Enter 1 to enable 1/2 second external alarm sounding ("ding") at the end of exit delay (or

after kissoff from the central station, if sending Closing reports.) Otherwise enter 0.

(Must be 1 for UL.)

3*59 ENABLE BELL 2 & AUX RELAY CHIME ANNUNCIATION [0,0]

Enter 1 to enable the chime function on Bell Output 2 and the aux. relay. Otherwise

enter 0.

3*60 BELL 2 & AUX RELAY TIMEOUT [00,00] ||

Defines the length of time Bell Output 2 and the aux. relay will sound for all audible

alarms (multiply entry 01-15 by 2 minutes for actual duration).

Minimum 16 minutes for UL burglary installations.

3*61 AUX RELAY FUNCTION SELECTION [1]

Select the condition that will trigger the auxiliary relay. Options are: 0 =

Trouble/Supervisory; 1 = Alarm, silenced by [Code] + OFF; 2 = Smoke detector reset; 3 =

Battery save; 4 = Alarm, silenced by [Code] + #67.

3*82 BURG FEATURES ON PARTITION 1 ENABLE [1]

Enter 1 to enable burglary features on partition 1.

Enter 0 to disable Arm AWAY, STAY, INSTANT, MAXIMUM, Test, and Chime functions

(burglary features are automatically enabled on other partitions).

3*85 SYSTEM ZONE BYPASS INHIBIT [1]

Enter 0 to prevent bypass of fire and system supervisory zones.

Enter 1 to allow only the Installer Code to bypass.

Enter 2 to allow Installer or Master Code to bypass.

Note: Applies only to fire zone types 9, 16, 17, and 18 and system zones 970-977. Applies

to Partition 1 only.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

24-20

25-1

SECTION 25

#93 Menu Mode Programming

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

#93 Main Menu Options

♦

Zone Programming

♦

Sequential Mode Programming

♦

Report Code Programming

♦

Alpha Descriptors Programming

♦

Device Programming

♦

Relay Programming

♦

Zone List Programming

♦

Relay Voice Descriptors

♦

Custom Word Substitutes for VIP Module Annunciation

♦

RF Serial Number Clear Mode

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

#93 Main Menu Options

The following fields should be programmed before beginning: 2*00: Number of Partitions; 1*32:

RF Receiver Type.

ULFor commercial fire and UL Installations, verify that wireless and audio alarm verification features

are disabled.

After programming all system-related programming fields in the usual way, press #93 while

still in Programming Mode to display the first choice of the menu-driven programming

options, which are as follows:

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

25-2

ZONE PROG?

0=No 1=Yes

For programming the following:

• Zone number

• Zone response type

• Partition number for zone

• Dialer Report Code for zone

• Bell/aux. relay assignment for zone

• Input device type for zone (whether RF, polling loop, etc.)

• Enrolling serial numbers of 5800 Series transmitters and

serial polling loop devices into the system (all other zone

characteristics must be pre-programmed).

SEQUENTIAL LEARN?

0=No 1=Yes

For programming the following:

• Input device type for zone (whether RF, polling loop, etc.)

• Enrolling serial numbers of 5800 Series transmitters and

serial polling loop devices into the system (all other zone

characteristics must be pre-programmed).

REPORT CODE PROG?

0=No 1=Yes

For programming the following:

• Alarm report codes for zones

• Restore and supervisory codes

• All other system report codes

ALPHA PROG?

0=No 1=Yes

For entering alpha descriptors for the following:

• Zone descriptors

• Installer's message

• Custom words

• Partition descriptors

• Relay descriptors

DEVICE PROG?

0=No 1=Yes

For defining the following device characteristics for addressable

devices, including keypads, RF receivers (4281/5881), 4204

Output Relay Modules, 4285/4286 VIP Module and VGM:

• Device address

• Device type

• Keypad options (includes partition assignment)

• RF House ID

RELAY PROG?

0=No 1=Yes

For defining output relay functions.

RLY VOICE DESCR?

0=No 1=Yes

For entering voice descriptors for relays to be used with the

4285/4286 VIP Module.

Section 25 - #93 Menu Mode Programming

25-3

CUSTOM INDEX ?

0=No 1=Yes

For creating custom word substitutes for VIP Module

annunciation.

CLEAR RF SERIAL#?

1=Yes 0=No

For deleting all RF serial numbers presently enrolled in the

system.

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES) in response to the displayed menu selection. Pressing 0 will display

the next choice in sequence. Refer to the Zone Programming part of this section for

instructions on how to program zone characteristics; the Device Programming part if this

section for instructions on how to program addressable devices; and the Alpha Programming

part of this section for programming alpha descriptors.

The following is a list of commands used while in the Menu Mode.

#93 Menu Mode Key Commands

#93 Enters Menu Mode

[✴] Serves as ENTER key. Press to have keypad accept entry.

[#] Backs up to previous screen.

0 Press to answer NO.

1 Press to answer YES.

000 Escapes from Menu Mode, back into Data Field Programming

Mode, if entered at the first prompt of each main menu option.

Zone Programming

Enter Programming Mode [Installer Code] + 8 0 0 0. The following fields should be

programmed before beginning:

• 2*00: Number of Partitions.

• 1*32: RF Receiver Type.

Also, before programming wireless zones, the RF receiver must be enabled in Device

Programming (see later in this section).

Then press #93 to display "ZONE PROG?".

ZONE PROG?

1=Yes 0=No

Press 1 to enter Zone Programming. The following screens will

appear. Press [*] to display the next screen. Press # to display a

previous screen.

If the system has been set up to use 5800 Series RF, and a program tool has not been

programmed, the following “PROGRAM TOOL” prompt will be displayed. If the system has not

been set up to use 5800 Series RF or a program tool has already been programmed, the system

will advance to the “ENTER ZN NO.” prompt.

PROGRAM TOOL?

0 = NO, 1 = YES 0

If a program tool is being used, enter 1. If not using a tool,

enter 0. When a 0 is entered, the system will advance to the

“ENTER ZN NO.” prompt.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

25-4

000 INPUT S/N: L

Axxx-xxxx

If 1 is entered, the system will prompt for the unit’s serial

number. Enter the program tool’s serial number using one of

the following methods:

a) Enter the 7-digit serial number for the transmitter.

b) Press any button on the transmitter. The keypad

should beep three times and display the serial number

of the tool.

000 PROG AS BR: 3

A123-4567 3

In this example, the serial number is A123-4567. Once

enrolled, the upper left-hand button of the program tool can be

pressed to ready the system for enrolling a device into the

system.

The serial number for the program tool will only remain in the

system until the programming mode is exited. (Entering ✱97

will not delete the tool.)

Press [*] to continue or press the [#] key to back the system up

to the “PROGRAM TOOL? “ prompt.

ENTER ZN NO.

000 = QUIT 010

Zone 010 entered ↑

Enter the 3-digit zone number that you wish to program. As an

example, zone 010 is shown here.

Press [*] to continue.

010 ZT P RC B INL

00 – –– – –– –

A display will appear, showing a summary of that zone's

programming. ZT=Zone Type, P=Partition, RC=Report Code, B

= Bell/Aux Relay assignment for zone, IN=the input type of

device, and L=the device's loop number to which the sensor is

connected. Some devices can support more than one zone by

means of individual loops (for example 5801, 5804, 5816, 5817,

etc.). If the zone is not programmed, the display will appear as

shown here. If checking a zone's programming, and it is

programmed satisfactorily, press [#] to back up one step and

enter another zone number, if desired.

Otherwise, press [*] to continue.

Do not install batteries in wireless transmitters until ready to enroll. After enrolling, batteries need

not be removed.

Section 25 - #93 Menu Mode Programming

25-5

↓ Zone Number

010 ZONE RESPONSE

Perimeter 03

Zone Type 03 entry shown

Each zone must be assigned a zone type, which defines the way

in which the system responds to faults in that zone. Refer to

the Zone Type Definitions section for detailed definitions of

each zone type. Enter the zone type desired (or change it, if

necessary). Available zone types are listed below.

00 = Assign for Unused Zones 17 = Fire Waterflow

01 = Entry/Exit #1, Burglary 18 = Fire Supervisory

02 = Entry/Exit #2, Burglary 19 = 24-Hour Trouble

03 = Perimeter, Burglary 20 = Arm–STAY†

04 = Interior Follower, Burglary 21 = Arm AWAY†

05 = Trouble Day/Alarm Night 22 = Disarm†

06 = 24-Hr. Silent Alarm 23 = No Alarm Response

07 = 24-Hr. Audible Alarm (e.g., relay activation)

08 = 24-Hr. Auxiliary 27 = Access Point

09 = Fire Without Verification 28 = MLB Supervision

10 = Interior Delay, Burglary (if VGM installed)

16 = Fire With Verification

† These are special zone types used with 5800 Series Wireless

Pushbutton Units which will result in arming the system in the

STAY or AWAY mode, or disarming of the system, depending

on the selection made.

Press [*] to continue.

010 ACCESS POINT

(00-31) 01

If response type 27 was selected, this prompt will be displayed.

Enter the access point to be controlled by the input type (00-

31).

010 ENTRY OR EXIT

Select whether the access point is an entry or exit point.

0 = entry

1 = exit

010 PARTITION

Enter the partition number (1–8) you are assigning this zone

to.

Press [*] to continue.

010 REPORT CODE

1st 03 2nd 12 3C

Enter the report code. The report code consists of 2

hexadecimal digits, each in turn consisting of 2 numerical

digits. For example, for a report code of "3C," enter 03 for 3 and

12 for C.

(Refer to the System Communication section for more

information about report codes and report code formats.)

Press [*] to continue.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

25-6

010 BELL/RLY SEL

Each zone can be assigned to activate either one or both bell

outputs and/or the system's auxiliary relay. Enter one of the

following assignments:

0=none; 1=Bell 1; 2=Bell 2; 3=Bells 1 & 2; 4=Aux Relay; 5=Bell

1 & Aux Relay; 6=Bell 2 & Aux Relay; 7=Bells 1 & 2 & Aux

Relay.

Press [*] to continue.

010 INPUT TYPE

RF Xmitter 3

Note that input types 4 & 5

are valid for certain 5800

Series transmitters only (e.g.,

5801, 5802, 5802CP & 5803).

When using 5700 Series

transmitters, always set the

input type to 3 (RF). The zone

number of the transmitter

identifies whether or not

supervision is required (e.g.,

5700 wireless zone number 63

is not supervised).

Input type 10 is applicable

only if PassPoint ACS is

installed with the Vista

Gateway Module.

Enter the input device type as follows:

00 = not used

01 = hardwired

03 = supervised RF transmitter (RF type)

04 = unsupervised RF transmitter (UR type)

05 = RF button-type transmitter (BR type)

06 = serial number polling loop device (SL type)

07 = DIP switch-type polling loop device

08 = right loop of DIP switch-type device.

09 = keypad input (code + #73, code + #74)

10 = PassPoint ACS input

Right loops refer to the use of the right loop on a 4190WH Zone

Expander Module and/or 4278 PIR, which allow hardwired

devices to be monitored by the polling loop.

If programming hardwired, DIP switch polling loop, or 5700

Series devices, the summary display appears after completing

this entry.

Press [*] to continue.

010 CONS ECP ADDR

(01-31) 01

If input type 09 was selected, this prompt will be displayed.

Enter the ECP address of the keypad that is being used for

entry/exit for this access point (01-31).

010 ACS ZONE NO

(00-31) 01

If input type 10 was selected, this prompt will be displayed.

Enter the PassPoint ACS zone ID that this VISTA zone maps

to (00-31).

010 SMART CONTACT

1 = YES 0 = NO

If input type selected was a serial number type, this prompt

will be displayed. Enter 1 for devices that monitor maintenance

signals (e.g., 4192SDM, 4192SDTM, 4192CPM, 5808).

Otherwise, enter 0.

Press [*] to continue.

Section 25 - #93 Menu Mode Programming

25-7

010 LOOP #

The cursor should now be flashing on the loop number. The

default is 1. To accept this, press [*]. If a different loop

number is being used on this device, enter the loop number (1-

4) and press [*] to continue. (The loop designations for various

RF transmitters are shown in Figure 25-1.) The loop number

must be entered here, whether using Zone Programming

or Sequential Mode to "enroll" serial numbers. If you

want to delete the serial number, enter 0 and press [*]. The

system will then prompt, "DELETE S/N?" Press 1 (YES) to

complete the delete sequence. This process deletes the serial

number only, not the loop number. The assumption is that the

proper loop number was programmed, but the wrong serial

number was enrolled.

(ALWAYS USE)

LOOP

5801

ENROLL AS "UR" OR "RF"

LOOP

5802/5802CP

ENROLL AS "BR"

LOOP

5802MN

ENROLL AS "UR" OR "RF"

5804BD

ENROLL AS "BR"

LOOP

5806/5807/5808

(5806 SHOWN)

ENROLL AS "RF"

5817

ENROLL AS "RF"

LOOP

(PRIMARY)

(AUX. CENTER)

(AUX. RIGHT)

5818

ENROLL AS "RF"

LOOP

5849

ENROLL AS "RF"

LOOP

(MOTION)

LOOP

(MOTION)

5890

ENROLL AS "RF"

5816

ENROLL AS "RF"

LOOP

(REED)

LOOP 1

(TERMINALS)

5827

SET HOUSE CODE

5827BD

SET HOUSE CODE

5816MN

ENROLL AS "RF"

LOOP

(REED)

LOOP 1

(TERMINALS)

5819

ENROLL AS "RF"

LOOP

(REED)

LOOP 1

(TERMINALS)

ALTERNATE

POSITION

FOR LOOP 2

LOOP 3

(TERMINALS)

YOU MUST

ENROLL THIS

BUTTON

LOOP 3

LOOP 1

LOOP 2

LOOP 4

5804

ENROLL AS "BR"

LOOP 3

LOOP 1

LOOP 2

LOOP 4

SET

HOUSE

CODE

•

••

•

•••

Figure 25-1: RF Transmitter Loop Designations

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

25-8

010 LEARN S/N?

1 = YES, 0 = NO 1

If the device’s serial number has not been previously “enrolled,”

you may enter the enrollment mode now by either entering 1

(YES) or by pressing the upper left-hand button of the program

tool. If using the program tool, move to the physical

location of the device to be enrolled before pressing the

button. A single short beep will verify that the button has

been pressed. The system will respond to the first serial

number transmitted after the 1 key on the keypad or the

button of the program tool is pressed. Enter 0 (NO) to enroll

later. (If 0 is entered, the system will advance to the summary

screen prompt.)

010 INPUT S/N

Axxx-xxxx

This prompt is displayed if 1 (YES) is entered in response to

the "LEARN S/N?" prompt. The serial number may be enrolled

by one of two methods:

a) Enter the 7-digit serial number printed on the device

using an alpha keypad.

b) Activate the device by faulting or restoring the input you

wish to use for that zone (e.g., press a button, open or

close a door, etc.).

010 INPUT S/N

A022-4064

The system will enroll the serial number of the first device

heard.

If the serial and loop number combination is already present in the system, the keypad will sound a

single long beep and display the word "DUPLICATE" along with the serial number, and the

number of the zone containing the serial/loop number combination.

The system will then enter an optional confirmation mode so that the operation of the actual

programmed input can be confirmed. Activate the loop input or button that corresponds to

this zone. We recommend that you confirm the programming of every device before

proceeding to the next zone.

010 CONFIRM RF:1

A022-4064 1

When the system sees activity on the appropriate input, it will

beep three times and display the confirmation message.

At any time during this step, you may press the

[*]

key on the keypad or the upper left-hand button

of the program tool if you are satisfied with the serial and loop number combination that has been

enrolled, regardless of whether or not the enrolled input has been "confirmed."

If the incorrect device has been enrolled, press the [#] key on the keypad or upper right-hand

button on the program tool to delete the serial number and return to the "LEARN S/N" prompt. A

single long beep will be heard from the keypad to verify pressing of the upper right-hand button.

Then, press 1 (Yes) or press the upper left-hand button of the program tool (a single short beep

will verify the system is ready for enrolling) and re-activate the proper device loop input.

Section 25 - #93 Menu Mode Programming

25-9

010 ZT P RC B INL

s 03 2 3C 0 RF1

The summary screen for the zone will appear. Note that an "s"

indicates that a serial number has, in fact, been enrolled. Press

[*] to accept the zone information.

If you want to delete the serial number, press [#]. This will

bring you back to the “INPUT TYPE” prompt. Press [*] to

change input type, loop number, and serial number.

When you have finished programming all zones, test each using the system's Test mode. Do not

use the Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode for this, as it will only check for transmission of one zone on a

particular transmitter, NOT the zones assigned to each additional loop, and will not verify polling

loop type zones.

Sequential Mode Programming

Usually, serial numbers are enrolled during Zone Programming. If not, use #93 Menu Mode

to enroll serial numbers (for example, if all other programming was done via downloading).

Use this mode only after all other zone information has been programmed, including transmitter

loop numbers.

1. Enter Data Field Programming Mode: [Installer Code] + 8 0 0 0.

2. From Data Field Programming Mode, press #93 to display the "ZONE PROG?" prompt.

3. Press 0 (NO) repeatedly until the "SEQUENTIAL LEARN?" prompt appears.

SEQUENTIAL LEARN?

0=no 1=yes

To enroll or delete a device's serial number, enter 1 (yes). Enter

0 to skip to the next main menu option.

If the system has been set up to use 5800 Series RF, and a program tool has not been

programmed, the following “PROGRAM TOOL” prompt will be displayed. If the system has not

been set up to use 5800 Series RF or a program tool has already been programmed, the system

will advance to the “TECHNOLOGY TYPE” prompt.

PROGRAM TOOL?

0 = NO, 1 = YES 0

If a program tool is being used, enter 1. If not using a tool,

enter 0. When a 0 is entered, the system will advance to the

“TECHNOLOGY TYPE” prompt.

000 INPUT S/N: L

Axxx-xxxx

If 1 is entered, the system will prompt for the unit’s serial

number. Enter the program tool’s serial number using one of

the following methods:

a) Enter the 7-digit serial number for the transmitter.

b) Press any button on the transmitter. The keypad should

beep three times and display the serial number of the

tool.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

25-10

000 PROG AS BR: 3

A123-4567 3

In this example, the serial number is A123-4567. Once

enrolled, the upper left-hand button of the program tool can be

pressed to ready the system for enrolling a device into the

system.

The serial number for the program tool will only remain

in the system until the Programming Mode is exited.

(Entering ✱97 will not delete the tool.)

Press [∗] to continue or press the [#] key to back the system up

to the “PROGRAM TOOL ?” prompt.

TECHNOLOGY TYPE

WIRELESS 0

Default ↑

Enter the type of device(s) to be enrolled as follows:

0 = Wireless (Default)

1 = Polling Loop

2 = Both

Press [∗] to continue.

ENTER ZN NO.

(000 = QUIT) 010

Zone Number Entered

↑

Enter the first zone number to be enrolled (e.g., zone 010).

Press [∗] to continue.

The system will, starting with this zone number, search for the

first device which has all of the following attributes pre-

programmed in Zone Programming:

a) An input type of RF, UR, BR, or SL (if serial

polling loop devices enabled) programmed

b) A loop number programmed

c) No serial number programmed

If the first zone number entered does

not

have

all

of the above attributes, the system will search

its database for the first zone that does and will display it on the next screen.

010 INPUT S/N

Axxx xxxx

This prompt is displayed when the system has found the next

zone which needs to be enrolled. The system will respond to

the first serial number transmitted. A serial number may be

enrolled by one of two methods:

a) Enter the 7-digit serial number printed on the device.

b) Activate the device by faulting or restoring the input

you wish to use for that zone (e.g., press a button, open

or close a door, etc.).

If you do

not

wish to enroll the zone displayed, press [#] on the keypad or the upper right-hand

button on the program tool (a long beep will be heard to verify). The following prompt will appear:

Section 25 - #93 Menu Mode Programming

25-11

010 LEARN S/N?

0 = NO, 1 = YES 0

To enroll now, enter 1 (YES). If 0 (NO) is entered, the following

prompt will appear:

ENTER ZN NUM.

(000 = QUIT) 010

Zone Number Entered ↑

Enter the next zone number to be enrolled (e.g., zone 010). The

system will search for that zone and will display the “ENTER ZONE

NO.” prompt.

If you wish to exit the enrollment mode completely, enter 000 and

press [∗].

010 INPUT S/N

A 022-4064

↑

Serial #

The system will enroll the first serial number heard, display

the serial numbers, and cause the keypad to beep twice.

If the serial and loop number combination is already present in the system, the keypad will sound a

single long beep and display the word "DUPLICATE" along with the serial number, and the

number of the zone containing the serial/loop number combination.

The system will then enter an optional confirmation mode so that the operation of the actual

programmed input can be confirmed. Activate the loop input or button that corresponds to

this zone. We recommend that you confirm the programming of every device before

proceeding to the next zone.

010 CONFIRMED SL:1

A022-4064

When the system sees activity on the appropriate input, it will

beep three times and display the confirmation message. Press

[∗] or the upper left-hand button of the program tool when you

are ready to enroll the next serial number device.

At any time during this step, you may press [∗] on the keypad or the upper left-hand button of the

program tool if you are satisfied with the serial and loop number combination that has been

enrolled, regardless of whether or not the enrolled input has been "confirmed." This will ready the

system to enroll the next serial number device.

If the incorrect device has been enrolled, press [#] on the keypad or the upper right-hand button of

the program tool to delete the serial number and return to the "LEARN S/N?" prompt. A single

long beep will be heard from the keypad to verify pressing of the upper right-hand button. Then,

press 1 (Yes) or press the upper left-hand button of the program tool (a single short beep will verify

the system is ready for enrolling) and re-activate the proper device or device loop input.

The system will search for the next zone that does not have a serial number associated with

it. If one is found, the system will return to the “INPUT S/N” prompt for the remaining

zones.

After all zones have been displayed, whether enrolled or not, the "ENTER ZN NO." prompt

will appear. Enter 000 to exit the Sequential Mode and return to Data Field Programming

Mode.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

25-12

When you have finished programming all zones, test each using the system's Test Mode. Do not

use the Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode for this, as it will only check for transmission of one zone on a

particular transmitter, NOT the zones assigned to each additional loop, and will NOT verify polling

loop type.

Report Code Programming

All report codes are entered using #93 Menu Mode Programming, either through Report Code

Programming, or through the Zone Programming while entering other zone information. In

the VISTA-128FB, reports are divided into six categories. These categories represent the

main menu options found in the Report Code Programming. Reports and the categories in

which they are found are as follows:

ALARM CODES RESTR, SUPV. CODES

(for groups of 16 zones)

SYSTEM GROUP #1

Zone Alarm Reports Alarm Restore

Trouble

Trouble Restore

Bypass

Bypass Restore

Closing (arm away)

Opening (disarm)

System Low Battery

Low Battery Restore

AC Loss

AC Restore

Periodic Test

Power

Cancel

Program Tamper

SYSTEM GROUP #2 SYSTEM GROUP #3 SYSTEM GROUP #4

Arm STAY

Time Set, Log Reset

Log 50%, 90% Full

Event Log Overflow

Exit Error by Zone

Exit Error by User

Recent Close

Early Open

Early Close

Late Open

Late Close

Failed to Open

Failed to Close

Auto-Arm Failed

Schedule Change

Fire Walk Test Start

Fire Walk Test End

Off-Normal

The programming sequence that follows assumes that you will be entering all reports for the

system at one time. In actuality, you may skip from one main menu option to another by

pressing 0 (N) at each main menu option. Main menu options are highlighted in bold text.

To enter report codes, do the following:

Enter Program Mode [Installer Code] + 8 0 0 0. Then press #93. Enter 0 (N) at each main

menu option until the REPORT CODE PROG prompt is displayed.

REPORT CODE PROG

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Press 1 (Y) to enter to Report Code Programming.

Section 25 - #93 Menu Mode Programming

25-13

Zone Alarm Reports

ALARM, ID DIGIT?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Press 1 (Y) to enter Alarm Report Codes for zones. Press 0 (N)

to skip to the next main menu option.

ENTER ZONE NO.

000 = QUIT 001

Enter the zone number for which you are entering the report

code.

Press [∗] to continue.

001 REPORT CODE

1st 00 2nd 00 000

Enter the first digit of the Alarm report code (double-digit

entry) and press [∗]. Enter the 2nd digit of the Alarm Report

code.

Press [∗] to continue.

ENTER ZONE NO.

000 = QUIT 001

Enter the zone number for which you are entering the report

code. When all zone Alarm Codes have been programmed,

enter 000 to Quit.

Press [∗] to continue.

QUIT REPORT MENU

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

If you have completely finished entering report codes, press 1

(Y) to quit Report Code Programming. If you wish to enter

other system report codes, enter 0 (N).

Press [∗] to continue.

Restore/Supervisory Codes

RESTR, SUPV. CODE

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Press 1 (Y) to enter Restore and Supervisory Codes for zones.

ENTER ZN FOR GRP

000 = QUIT 001

Enter one zone for each group of 16 zones (001-016, 017-032,

etc.).

ALARM RESTORE

GRP 001-016 000

Enter the first digit of the Alarm Restore Report Code for this

group of zones (double-digit entry). The second digit will be the

ID (second) digit of the Alarm Report Code for each zone (if

programmed).

Press [∗] to continue.

TROUBLE

GRP 001-016 000

Enter the first digit of the Trouble Report Code for this group of

zones (double-digit entry). The second digit will be the ID

(second) digit of the Alarm Report Code for each zone (if

programmed).

Press [∗] to continue.

TROUBLE RESTORE

GRP 001-016 000

Enter the first digit of the trouble restore code (single-digit

entry) and press [∗]. The second digit will be the ID (second)

digit of the alarm report code for each zone (if programmed).

Press [∗] to continue.

BYPASS

GRP 001-016 000

Enter the first digit of the Bypass Report Code (double-digit

entry) and press [∗]. The second digit will be the ID (second)

digit of the Alarm Report Code for each zone (if programmed).

Press [∗] to continue.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

25-14

BYPASS RESTORE

GRP 001-016 000

Enter the first digit of the Bypass Restore Report Code (double-

digit entry) and press [∗]. The second digit will be the ID

(second) digit of the Alarm Report Code for each zone (if

programmed).

Press [∗] to continue.

ENTER ZN FOR GRP

000 = QUIT 017

Enter one zone for each group of 16 zones. When finished

entering Restore and Supervisory Codes for all zone groups,

enter 000.

Press [∗] to continue.

QUIT REPORT MENU

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

If you have completely finished entering report codes, press 1

(Y) to quit Report Code Programming. If you wish to enter

other system report codes, enter 0 (N).

Press [∗] to continue.

System Group 1 Codes

SYSTEM GROUP #1?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

To enter System Group #1 codes, press 1 (Y).

1st 00 2nd 00

Enter the first digit of the Closing (Arm-AWAY) report. Press

[∗]. Enter the second digit of the report. If the user number is

desired as the second digit, enter 01 (not necessary for Contact

ID or High Speed formats).

Press [∗] to continue.

Enter the rest of the codes in the same manner. Other report codes in System Group #1 are:

• Opening (Disarm)

• System Low Battery

• Low Battery Restore

• AC Loss

• AC Restore

• Periodic Test

• Power

• Cancel

• Program Tamper

Once you have entered these report codes, the system will prompt:

QUIT REPORT MENU

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

If you have completely finished entering report codes, press 1

(Y) to quit Report Code Programming. If you wish to enter

other system report codes, enter 0 (N).

Press [∗] to continue.

System Group 2 Codes

SYSTEM GROUP #2 ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

To enter System Group #2 codes, press 1 (Y).

Section 25 - #93 Menu Mode Programming

25-15

STAY

1st 00 2nd 00

Enter the first digit of the Arm-STAY report. Press [∗]. Enter

the second digit of the report. If the user number is desired as

the second digit, enter 01 (not necessary for Contact ID or High

Speed formats).

Press [∗]to continue.

Enter the rest of the codes in the same manner. Other codes in System Group #2 are:

• Time Set, Log Reset

• Log 50%, 90% Full

• Event Log Overflow

• Exit Error by Zone

• Exit Error by User

• Recent Close

Once you have entered these report codes, the system will prompt:

QUIT REPORT MENU

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

If you have completely finished entering report codes, press 1

(Y) to quit Report Code Programming. If you wish to enter

other system report codes, enter 0 (N).

Press [∗] to continue.

System Group 3 Codes

SYSTEM GROUP #3 ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

To enter System Group #3 codes, press 1 (Y).

EARLY OPEN

1st 00 2nd 00

Enter the first digit of the Early Opening Report Code. Press

[∗]. Enter the second digit of the report code. If the user

number is desired as the second digit, enter 01 (not necessary

for Contact ID or High Speed formats).

Press [∗] to continue.

Enter the rest of the codes in the same manner. Other codes in System Group #2 are:

• Early Close

• Late Open

• Late Close

• Failed to Open

• Failed to Close

• Auto-Arm Failed

• Schedule Change

Once you have entered these report codes, the system will prompt:

QUIT REPORT MENU

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

If you have completely finished entering report codes, press 1

(Y) to quit Report Code Programming. If you wish to enter

other system report codes, enter 0 (N)

Press [∗] to continue.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

25-16

System Group 4 Codes

SYSTEM GROUP #4 ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

To enter System Group #3 codes, press 1 (Y).

WALK TEST START

1st 00 2nd 00

Enter the first digit of the Fire Test Start Report Code. Press

[∗]. Enter the second digit of the report code.

Press [∗] to continue.

Enter the rest of the codes in the same manner. Other codes in System Group #2 are:

• Walk-Test End

• Off-Normal

Once you have entered these report codes, the system will prompt:

QUIT REPORT MENU

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

If you have completely finished entering report codes, press 1

(Y) to quit Report Code Programming.

QUIT MENU MODE?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to exit back to normal programming mode. Enter 0 to

stay in Menu Mode.

Alpha Descriptors Programming

General Information

• You can program a user-friendly English language description/location for all protection

zones, relays, keypad panics, polling loop short, and RF receiver supervision troubles.

• Each description can be composed of a combination of words (up to 3) that are selected

from a vocabulary of 244 words stored in memory, and any word can have an "s" or " 's "

added to it.

NOTE: Due to the use of 3-digit zone numbers, the first word of the descriptor is limited to 6

characters if you want it to fit on the top line of the display.

• In addition, up to 20 installer-defined words can be added to those already in memory.

Thus, when an alarm or trouble occurs in a zone, an appropriate description for the

location of that zone will be displayed at the keypad.

• A custom installer's message can be programmed for each partition which will be

displayed when the system is "Ready" (e.g., THE PETERSON'S).

1. To program alpha descriptors, enter Programming mode, then press #93 to display

"ZONE PROG?"

2. Press 0 (NO) twice to display "ALPHA PROG?".

3. Press 1 to enter Alpha Programming.

There are 6 sub-menu selections that will be displayed one at a time.

Press 1 to select the mode desired.

Press 0 to display the next mode available. The alpha menu selections are:

ZONE DESCRIP? for entering zone descriptors.

DEFAULT SCREEN? for creating custom message; displayed when system ready.

CUSTOM WORD? for creating custom words for use in descriptors.

Section 25 - #93 Menu Mode Programming

25-17

PART DESCRIP? for creating 4-character partition names.

EXIT EDIT MODE? Press 1 to exit back to #93 Menu Mode.

4. Refer to the sections that follow for procedures for adding alpha descriptors.

Zone Descriptors

1. Select ZONE DESCRIPTOR mode.

The keypad keys perform the following functions:

[3] Scrolls both alphabet and actual words in ascending alphabetical order.

[1] Scrolls both alphabet and actual words in descending alphabetical order.

[2] Adds or removes an "s" or " 's " to a vocabulary word.

[6] Switches between alphabet and actual word list; used to accept entries.

[8] Saves the zone description in the system's memory.

[#] [#] plus zone number displays the description for that zone.

2. Enter the zone number to which you want to assign a descriptor.

For example key [∗]001 to begin entering the description for Zone 1, (key [∗]002 for

Zone 2, [∗]003 for Zone 3 etc.). The following will be displayed: * ZN 001 A.

Note that the first letter of the alphabet appears after the zone number, and that the

zone number is automatically included with the description.

3. Enter the descriptor for that zone.

Use one of two methods as follows:

(Assume, for example, that the desired description for Zone 1 is BACK DOOR)

a) Press [#] followed by the 3-digit number of the first word from the fixed

dictionary shown later in this section (e.g., [0][1][3] for BACK).

Press 6 in order to accept the word and proceed, or press 8 to store the

complete descriptor and exit;

b) Select the first letter of the desired description (note that "A" is already

displayed). Use the 3 key to advance through the alphabet and the 1 key to

go backward.

Press 3 key repeatedly until "B" appears (press 1 to go backwards if you

happen to pass it), then press 6 to display the first available word beginning

with B.

Press 3 repeatedly to advance through the available words until the word

BACK is displayed.

To add an "s" or " 's," if you need to, press 2. The first depression adds an "s," the second

depression adds an " 's, " the third depression displays no character (to erase the character), the

fourth depression adds an "s," etc.

4. Accept the word.

To accept the word, press 6, which switches back to the alphabet list for the next

word, or press 8 to store the complete descriptor and then exit.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

25-18

5. Select the next word.

For selection of the next word (DOOR), repeat step 3a (word #057) or 3b, but

selecting the word "DOOR.”

To accept the word, press 6, which again switches back to alphabet list.

6. Store the descriptor.

When all desired words have been entered, press 8 to store the description in

memory.

To review the zone descriptors, key [#] plus zone number (e.g., #001).

To edit zone descriptors, key [∗] plus zone number (e.g., *001)

7. Exit Zone Description Mode: enter 000.

Custom Words

Up to 20 installer-defined words can be added to the built-in vocabulary. Each of the 20

"words" can actually consist of several words, but bear in mind that a maximum of 10

characters can be used for each word string.

1. Select CUSTOM WORD Mode. The keys perform the following functions:

[3] Advances through alphabet in ascending order.

[1] Advances through alphabet in descending order.

[6] Selects desired letter; moves the cursor 1 space to the right.

[4] Moves the cursor one space to the left.

[7] Inserts a space at the cursor location, erasing any character at that location.

[8] Saves the new word in the system's memory.

[*] Returns to Description Entry Mode.

2. Enter the custom word number (01-20) you want to create.

For example, if you are creating the first word (or word string), enter 01; when creating

the second word, enter 02, and so on. A cursor will now appear at the beginning of the

second line.

3. Type the word using one of two methods as follows:

a) Press [#], followed by the 2-digit entry for the first letter you would like to

display (e.g., 6 5 for "A").

When the desired character appears, press 6 to select it. The cursor will then

move to the right, in position for the next character. Press [#] plus the 2-digit

entry for the next letter of the word.

b) Press 3 to advance through the list of symbols, numbers, and letters.

Press 1 to move back through the list.

When you have reached the desired character, press 6 to select it. The cursor

will then move to the right, in position for the next character.

4. Repeat step 3 to create the desired custom word (or words).

Press 4 to move the cursor to the left if necessary.

Press 7 to enter a blank (or to erase an existing character).

Each word or word string cannot exceed 10 characters.

5. Save the word by pressing 8.

This will return you to the “CUSTOM WORD?” display. The custom word (or string of

words) will be automatically added to the built-in vocabulary at the end of the group of

words beginning with the same letter.

Section 25 - #93 Menu Mode Programming

25-19

Custom words are retrieved as word numbers 250 to 269 for words 1 to 20, respectively,

when using method 3a to enter alpha descriptors.

When using method 3b to enter alpha descriptors, each word will be found at the end of

the group of words that begin with the same letter as it does.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create up to a maximum of 20 custom words (or word

strings).

7. Exit Custom Word Mode by entering 00 at the “CUSTOM WORD” prompt.

Partition Descriptors

1. Select "Part DESCRIPT." Mode. The system will ask for the partition number desired.

Enter the number as a single-key entry 1-8.

2. Follow the same procedure as for custom words, except that partition descriptors are

limited to 4 characters (e.g., WHSE for warehouse).

Custom Message Display (Installer's Message)

Normally, when the system is in the disarmed state, the following display is present on the

keypad.

****DISARMED****

READY TO ARM

Part or all of the above message can be modified to create a custom installer message for

each partition. For example, “****DISARMED****” on the first line or “READY TO ARM” on

the second line could be replaced by the installation company name or phone number for

service. Note that there are only 16 character spaces on each of the two lines. To create a

custom display message, proceed as follows:

1. Select Default Screen Mode.

The keypad will ask for the partition number for this message.

Enter the partition number. Press [∗] to accept entry.

The following will appear:

****DISARMED****

READY TO ARM

A cursor will be present at the extreme left of the first line (over the first "star"). Press 6

to move the cursor to the right and 4 to move the cursor to the left. Press 7 to insert

spaces or erase existing characters.

2. Create the message.

For example, to replace “READY TO ARM” with the message

“SERVICE 424-0177,” proceed as follows:

Press 6 to move the cursor to the right, and continue until the cursor is positioned over

the first location on the second line.

Press 3 to advance through the alphabet to the first desired character (in this case, "S").

Press 1 to go backward, when necessary. When the desired character is reached, press 6.

The cursor will then move to the next position, ready for entry of the next character (in

this example, "E"). When the cursor reaches a position over an existing character, press 3

or 1 to advance or back up from that character in the alphabet.

Proceed in this manner until all characters in the message have been entered.

3. Save the message.

Store the new display message in memory by pressing 8.

4. The system will ask for a new partition number.

Enter 0 to quit or 1-8 for a new partition number.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

25-20

ALPHA DESCRIPTOR VOCABULARY

(For entering alpha descriptors. To select a word, press [#] followed by the word's 3-digit number.)

NOTE: This vocabulary is not to be used for relay voice descriptors. See the Relay Voice Descriptors

section when programming relay voice descriptors.

000 (Word Space)

• 001 AIR

• 002 ALARM

003 ALCOVE

004 ALLEY

005 AMBUSH

006 ANTENNA

• 007 AREA

• 008 APARTMENT

009 ART

• 010 ATTIC

011 AUDIO

012 AUX

013 AUXILIARY

• 014 BABY

• 015 BACK

• 016 BAR

017 BARN

• 018 BASEMENT

• 019 BATHROOM

• 020 BED

• 021 BEDROOM

022 BELL

023 BELL 1

024 BELL 2

• 025 BLOWER

• 026 BOILER

027 BOTTOM

028 BOX

029 BREAK

• 030 BUILDING

031 BURNER

032 CABINET

• 033 CALL

034 CAMERA

035 CAR

036 CASE

037 CASH

038 CCTV

039 CEILING

040 CELLAR

• 041 CENTRAL

042 CIRCUIT

043 CLIP

• 044 CLOSED

045 COIN

046 COLD

047 COATROOM

048 COLLECTION

049 COMBUSTION

• 050 COMPUTER

051 CONTACT

• 052 DAUGHTERS

053 DELAYED

• 054 DEN

055 DESK

• 056 DETECTOR

057 DIALER 1

058 DIALER 2

• 059 DINING

060 DISCRIMINATOR

061 DISPLAY

062 DOCK

• 063 DOOR

064 DORMER

• 065 DOWN

• 066 DOWNSTAIRS

067 DRAWER

• 068 DRIVEWAY

069 DRUG

• 070 DUCT

• 071 EARTH

• 072 EAST

073 ELECTRIC

074 EMERGENCY

075 ENTRY

• 076 EQUIPMENT

077 EXECUTIVE

• 078 EXIT

079 EXTERIOR

• 080 FACTORY

081 FAILURE

082 FAMILY

• 083 FATHERS

• 084 FENCE

085 FILE

• 086 FIRE

• 087 FLOOR

088 FLOW

089 FOIL

• 090 FOYER

091 FREEZER

• 092 FRONT

093 FUR

094 FURNACE

095 GALLERY

• 096 GARAGE

• 097 GAS

098 GATE

• 099 GLASS

• 100 GROUND

101 GUEST

102 GUN

• 103 HALL

• 104 HEAT

105 HIGH

106 HOLDUP

107 HOUSE

108 INFRARED

• 109 INSIDE

110 INTERIOR

111 INTRUSION

112 JEWELRY

• 113 KITCHEN

• 114 LAUNDRY

• 115 LEFT

116 LEVEL

• 117 LIBRARY

• 118 LIGHT

119 LINE

120 LIQUOR

• 121 LIVING

• 122 LOADING

123 LOCK

124 LOOP

125 LORRA

126 LOW

• 127 LOWER

• 128 MACHINE

129 MAGNETIC

130 MAIDS

131 MAIN

• 132 MASTER

133 MAT

• 134 MEDICAL

135 MEDICINE

136 MICROWAVE

137 MONEY

138 MONITOR

• 139 MOTHERS

• 140 MOTION

141 MOTOR

142 MUD

• 143 NORTH

144 NURSERY

• 145 OFFICE

146 OIL

• 147 OPEN

148 OPENING

• 149 OUTSIDE

150 OVERFLOW

151 OVERHEAD

152 PAINTING

• 153 PANIC

154 PASSIVE

• 155 PATIO

156 PERIMETER

• 157 PHONE

158 PHOTO

159 POINT

160 POLICE

161 POOL

• 162 POWER

163 QUAD

164 RADIO

• 165 REAR

166 RECREATION

167 REFRIG

168 REFRIGERATION

169 RELAY 1

170 RF

• 171 RIGHT

• 172 ROOM

173 ROOF

174 SAFE

175 SCREEN

176 SENSOR

• 177 SERVICE

• 178 SHED

179 SHOCK

• 180 SHOP

181 SHORT

182 SHOW

• 183 SIDE

184 SKYLIGHT

185 SLIDING

• 186 SMOKE

187 SONIC

• 188 SONS

• 189 SOUTH

190 SPRINKLER

191 STAMP

• 192 STATION

193 STEREO

194 STORE

• 195 STORAGE

196 STORY

197 STRESS

198 STRIKE

199 SUMP

200 SUPERVISED

201 SUPERVISION

202 SWIMMING

203 SWITCH

204 TAMPER

205 TAPE

206 TELCO

207 TELEPHONE

208 TELLER

• 209 TEMPERATURE

210 THERMOSTAT

• 211 TOOL

212 TRANSMITTER

213 TRAP

214 TRIGGERS

215 ULTRA

• 216 UP

• 217 UPPER

• 218 UPSTAIRS

• 219 UTILITY

220 VALVE

221 VAULT

222 VIBRATION

223 VOLTAGE

224 WALL

225 WAREHOUSE

226 WASH

• 227 WEST

• 228 WINDOW

229 WINE

• 230 WING

231 WORK

232 XMITTER

233 YARD

234 ZN-1

• 235 ZONE

236 0

237 1

238 1ST

239 2

240 2ND

241 3

242 3RD

243 4

244 4TH

245 5

246 5TH

247 6

248 6TH

249 7

250 7TH

251 8

252 8TH

253 9

254 9TH

255 Custom Word 1

274 Custom Word 20

CHARACTER (ASCII) CHART

(For Adding Custom Words)

32 (space)

33 !

34 "

35 #

36 $

37 %

38 &

39 '

40 (

41 )

42 *

43 +

44 ,

45 -

46 .

47 /

48 0

49 1

50 2

51 3

52 4

53 5

54 6

55 7

56 8

57 9

58 :

59 ;

60 <

61 =

62 >

63 ?

64 @

65 A

66 B

67 C

68 D

69 E

70 F

71 G

72 H

73 I

74 J

75 K

76 L

77 M

78 N

79 O

80 P

81 Q

82 R

83 S

84 T

85 U

86 V

87 W

88 X

89 Y

90 Z

Section 25 - #93 Menu Mode Programming

25-21

*Notes: This factory-provided vocabulary of words is subject to change.

Bulleted words in bold face type are those that are also available for use by the 4285/4286 VIP

Module. If using a VIP Module, and words other than these are selected for alpha descriptors, the

Voice Module will not provide annunciation of those words.

Device Programming

This menu is used to program keypads, receivers and relay modules.

From Data Field Programming Mode, press #93 to display "ZONE PROG?". Press 0

repeatedly to display "DEVICE PROG?".

DEVICE PROG?

1=YES 0=NO

Press 1 to enter Device Programming.

DEVICE ADDRESS

01-31, 00=QUIT

The device address identifies the device to the control. Enter

the 2-digit device address number to match the device's

physical address setting (01-30).

Press [∗] to accept entry.

Note: Device Address 04 must be used for the 4285/4286 Voice

Module, if one is installed. If not, it can be used for another

device type.

Device Address 00 is always set as an alpha keypad assigned to Partition 1 with no sounder

suppression options, and these settings cannot be changed.

DEVICE TYPE Select the type of addressable device as follows:

0 = device not used

1 = alpha keypad (6139/6139R)

3 = RF receiver (4281/5881)

4 = output relay module (4204)

5 = Voice (VIP) Module (4285/4286)

6 = Long Range Radio

9 = Vista Gateway Module (VGM)

Press [∗] to accept entry.

Alpha Keypad

CONSOLE PART. If device type 1 (alpha keypad) is selected, this prompt will

appear. Enter the addressable device's default partition

number (01 to maximum number of partitions programmed for

system in field 2*00). This is the primary partition for which

the device is intended to be used. Enter 9 to make this keypad

a "master" keypad for the system.

Press [∗] to accept entry.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

25-22

SOUND OPTION If device type 1 (alpha keypad) is entered, this prompt will

appear. Keypads can be individually programmed to suppress

arm/disarm beeps, entry/exit beeps and chime mode beeps. This

helps prevent unwanted sounds from disturbing users in other

areas of the premises.

Enter a number 00-03 for the keypad sounding suppression

options desired for the keypad as follows:

00 = no suppression.

01 = suppress arm/disarm & entry/exit beeps.

02 = suppress chime mode beeps only.

03 = suppress arm/disarm, entry/exit and chime mode

beeps.

Press [∗] to accept entry.

KEYPAD GLBL? If device type 1 (alpha keypad) is entered, this prompt will

appear. Each keypad can give users with access to multiple

partitions the ability to arm and disarm those partitions from

it. To enable this keypad for global arming/disarming, enter 1.

To prevent the ability to use this keypad for global

arming/disarming, enter 0.

Press [∗] to accept entry.

RF Expander

RF EXPANDER

HOUSE ID XX

If device type 3 (RF Receiver) is selected, this prompt will

appear. Enter the 2-digit House ID (00-31). This is required

for 5700 Series systems only, or if using a wireless keypad

(5827/5827BD) with a 5800 Series system.

Press [∗] to accept entry.

Output Relay Module

SUPERVISED CF? If device type 4 (relay module) is selected, this prompt will

appear. Enter 1 if the unit is a 4204CF. If not, enter 0. If 1 is

entered, only Relay 1 (Output A) and relay 3 (Output B) on

each module are able to be programmed for functions. This

module is usually used to add two additional supervised bell

outputs to the system.

Press [∗] to accept entry.

Section 25 - #93 Menu Mode Programming

25-23

Long Range Radio

If device type 6 is chosen, the 6139 Keypad will function similar to the 7720PLRR

Programming Tool. See Figure 25-2 for the functions of the keys on the 6139.

READYARMED

897

AB C

456

123

DE F

ST X

SPACE ENTER

SHIFT

BS/ESC

N/Y

SHIFT function indicated by turning on READY LED.

Figure 25-2 6139 Key Functions for Programming 7820 Radio

Each key has two possible functions: a normal function and a SHIFT function. To perform a

normal key function, simply press the desired key. To perform a SHIFT key function, press

SHIFT key, then press desired function key.

Normal and SHIFT key Functions:

Key Normal Key Function SHIFT Key Function

BS/ESC [BS]: Press to delete entry [ESC]: Press to quit Program Mode.

Also, can reset EEPROM defaults *

↓/↑[↓]: Scroll down programming [↑]: Scroll up programming

N/Y [N]: Press for "NO" answer. [Y]: Press SHIFT-Y for "YES" answer

SHI

FT Press before pressing a SHIFT key function. Will light READY LED. LED goes out

once a key is pressed. Press again for each SHIFT function desired.

1/A [1]: For entering the number 1 [A]: Used for entering C.S. ID number

2/B [2]: For entering the number 2 [B]: Used for entering C.S. ID number

3/C [3]: For entering the number 3 [C]: Used for entering C.S. ID number

4/D [4]: For entering the number 4 [D]: Used for entering C.S. ID number

5/E [5]: For entering the number 5 [E]: Used for entering C.S. ID number

6/F [6]: For entering the number 6 [F]: Used for C.S. ID & FAST Mode

7/S [7]: For entering the number 7 [S]: Press to display diagnostic status

8/T [8]: For entering the number 8 [T]: Press to send TEST messages

9/X [9]: For entering the number 9 [X]: Press to reset the 7820

*/SPACE [*]: Not used with 7820 [SPACE]: Not used with 7820

0 [0]: For entering the number 0 No SHIFT function

#/ENTER [#/ENTER]: Press to accept entries No SHIFT function

* Active only when the "REVIEW?" prompt is displayed.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

25-24

The 6139 Keypad will display the following prompts, which are sent by the Long Range

Radio transmitter to the control.

DEVICE ADDRESS Enter the device address of the radio. The default address is 3.

ID #

(1234)

Enter the 4-digit customer account number, 0001-9999. This

ID number will appear in the messages generated by the radio.

Messages generated by the panel and transmitted by the radio

will contain the ID number programmed into the panel. The

radio and the panel should have the same ID number, if

possible.

If a different 4-digit customer account number is used in the radio than is programmed into the

alarm control, the radio will transmit radio-specific messages (power-on reset, AC fail, etc.) using

the radio customer number, and alarm messages using the control panel’s customer number. If

these numbers are different, you will be billed for two AlarmNet radio accounts.

ODD [Y/N]

(N)

Enter Y for odd system flag; N for even system flag.

Alarmnet (Y/N)

(Y)

Enter Y if an AlarmNet installation. Enter N for private

system users (skip to Question 7).

CS ID

(11)

Enter the primary central station’s system ID number, 1-7F

(will not be displayed for private system users).

BAT PRESENT [Y/N]

(N)

Enter Y if optional battery will be used. Must be Y for UL

installations (a battery must be installed).

USE RADIO # [Y/N]

(N)

If Y is selected, the Radio ID number will replace the panel

Subscriber ID in panel-generated messages with the Radio ID

number.

If N is selected, the radio will send panel-generated messages

with the panel Subscriber ID number.

2ND CS ID

(12)

This must be programmed with a value, even if it is the

same as the primary central station. The alarm panel has

the option to send a selected message to the second central

station.

REVIEW (Y/N)

(N)

Enter Y to review the programming options and to ensure that

the correct responses have been made. Parameters can be

changed during review.

Enter N to end programming session.

Section 25 - #93 Menu Mode Programming

25-25

VIP Module and VISTA Gateway Module

MODULE PART. If device type 5 (VIP Module) or type 9 (VGM) is selected, this

prompt will appear. Enter the partition number 1-8 in which

the module is located.

Press [∗] to accept entry.

Press 00 + [∗] to exit Menu Mode.

Press ∗99 to exit Program Mode.

Relay Programming

The system supports up to 32 relay outputs. Relays can be used to perform many different

functions and actions. Each relay must be programmed to begin one of four types of

ACTIONS at a designated START event, and end that ACTION at a designated STOP event.

The options used to start and stop these devices are described below, followed by the actual

screen prompts and available entries.

The letter(s) in parentheses after each function described below, such as (A) after ACTION,

are those that appear in the various summary displays of programmed data during

programming.

ACTION (A) The "ACTION" of the device is how the device will respond when it is

activated by the "START" programming. You may want the device to

activate momentarily, to pulse on and off continuously, or to remain

activated until some other event occurs to stop it. There are five different

choices of actions:

• ACTIVATE for 2 SECONDS and then reset.

• ACTIVATE and REMAIN ACTIVATED until stopped by some other

event.

• PULSE ON and OFF until stopped by some other event.

• NO RESPONSE when the device is not used.

• TOGGLE on and off alternately with each activation of event.

START (STT) The "START" programming determines when and under what conditions

the device will be activated. The following START options are available:

1) EVENT (EV) is the condition (alarm, fault, trouble) that must occur

to a zone or group of zones (zone list) in order to activate the device.

These conditions apply only when a zone list is used. The different

choices for "EVENT" are listed below and in “Programming Relays”

later in this section.

• ALARM Relay action begins upon any alarm in an

assigned zone in the zone list.

• FAULT Relay action begins upon any opening of an

assigned zone in the zone list.

• TROUBLE Relay action begins upon any trouble

condition in an assigned zone in the zone list.

• NO RESPONSE Relay action is not dependent upon one of the

above events.

ZONE LIST (ZL) is a group of zones to which the “EVENT” applies in

order to activate a particular device. Note that there are a total of 8

zone lists that can be programmed; when the selected EVENT (alarm,

fault or trouble) occurs in any zone in the selected “Start” ZONE LIST

(1-8), activation of the selected device will START.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

25-26

2) ZONE TYPE/SYSTEM OPERATION (ZT). If all zones to be used to

start the device have the same response type, and there are no other

zones of this type which are not to activate this device, then “ZONE

TYPE” may be used instead of using a "ZONE LIST" and "EVENT” to

activate the device.

If a System Operation, such as “DISARMING” or “ANY FIRE

ALARM,” is to activate the device, the appropriate choice would also

be entered under the “ZONE TYPE” option.

The “ZONE TYPE/SYSTEM OPERATION” option functions

independently of the “EVENT/ZONE LIST” combination.

If a specific "ZONE TYPE" is chosen, any zone of that response type

going into alarm, trouble, or fault will cause the device to activate as

selected in "ACTION.” If the same “ZONE TYPE” is also chosen for the

STOP programming, any zone of that type that restores will de-

activate the device.

If a "SYSTEM OPERATION" is chosen, that operation will cause the

device to activate as selected in "ACTION.” The different choices for

"ZONE TYPE" and "SYSTEM OPERATION" are listed in

“Programming Relays” later in this section, and on the Programming

Form.

3) PARTITION No. (P). The device's "Start" ZONE TYPE/SYSTEM

OPERATION may be limited to an occurrence on one partition (1-8),

or any partition (0).

STOP (STP): The "STOP" programming determines when and under what conditions

the device will be de-activated. The following options are available:

1).RESTORE ZONE LIST (ZL). If a "ZONE LIST" is used as the “Stop”

event, the device will de-activate when all the zones in that list

restore from a previous fault, trouble, or alarm condition. This will

occur regardless of what is programmed to "START" the device;

therefore, a "RESTORE ZONE LIST" would normally only be used

when a "ZONE LIST" is used to start the device.

2).ZONE TYPE/SYSTEM OPERATION (ZT). Instead of using a

"RESTORE ZONE LIST," a specific zone (response) type or system

operation action can be selected to de-activate the device.

If a specific "ZONE TYPE" is chosen, any zone of that response type

that restores from a previous alarm, trouble, or fault condition will

cause the device to de-activate.

If a "SYSTEM OPERATION" is chosen, that operation will cause the

device to de-activate. The different choices for "ZONE TYPE" and

"SYSTEM OPERATION" are listed in “Programming Relays” later in

this section, and in the Programming Form.

3) PARTITION No. (P). The device's "Stop" Zone Type/System

Operation may be limited to an occurrence on one partition (1-8), or on

any partition (0).

The “ZONE TYPE/SYSTEM OPERATION” option functions

independently of the “EVENT/ZONE LIST” combination.

Section 25 - #93 Menu Mode Programming

25-27

Relay Output Devices Programming

From Data Field Programming Mode, press #93 to display the "ZONE PROG?" prompt.

Press 0 (NO) to each menu option until the "RELAY PROG?" prompt appears. Press 1

(YES).

While in this mode, press [∗] to advance to next screen. Press [#] to backup to the previous

screen.

ENTER RELAY NO.

(00=QUIT) 01

Enter the relay (output device) identification number 01-16.

This is a reference number only, used for identification

purposes. The actual module address and relay number on the

module are programmed in the last two prompts.

Press [∗] to continue.

02 A EV ZL ZT P

STT 0 0 0 00 Press [∗] to continue.

02 A ZL ZT P

STP 0 0 00

The keypad will display a summary STOP screen.

Press [∗] to continue.

02 RELAY ACTION

NO RESPONSE

The Relay Action is the way in which the relay will respond

when activated by the "start" event. Enter the desired action

for this relay as follows:

0=not used; 1=close for 2 secs.; 2=stay closed; 3=pulse on/off;

4= toggle on and off alternately

02 START EVENT

NOT USED

A relay may be activated either by an Event used in

conjunction with a Zone List, and/or by a Zone Type/System

Operation. If using an Event/Zone List combination, enter the

event code as follows:

0=not used; 1=alarm; 2=fault; 3=trouble

If not using a Zone List to activate the relay, enter 0.

Press [∗] to continue.

02 START: ZN LIST

NO LIST

A Zone List is a set of zones that can be used to initiate the

start or stop relay action. If a zone list is being used to start

this relay action, enter the Zone List number 1-8. If a zone list

is not being used, enter 0.

Press [∗] to continue.

02 START: ZN TYPE A Zone Type/System Operation can be used instead of or in

addition to an Event/Zone List combination to start the relay

action. If a Zone Type/System Operation is being used, enter

the 2-digit code as listed below.

Press [∗] to continue.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

25-28

Choices for Start/Stop Zone Types: Choices for Start/Stop System Operation:

00 = No Response (Not Used)

01 = Entry/Exit #1

02 = Entry/exit #2

03 = Perimeter

04 = Interior Follower

05 = Trouble Day/Alarm Night

06 = 24-Hr. Silent

07 = 24-Hr. Audible

08 = 24-Hr. Auxiliary

09 = Fire Alarm or Trouble

10 = Interior W/Delay

16 = Fire With Verification

17 = Fire Waterflow

23 = No Alarm Response

(for output relay activation, such

as for access control purposes)

27 = Access Point

(allows more than one relay to be

controlled by activation if access

point request)

18 = Fire Supervisory

19 = 24-Hr. Trouble

20 = Arming-STAY

21 = Arming-AWAY

22 = Disarming ([Code] + Off)

30 = On Second Off

31 = End of Exit Time

32 = Start of Entry Time

33 = Any Burglary Alarm

34 = Code + [#] + 71 Key Entry

35 = Code + [#] + 72 Key Entry

36 = At Bell Timeout **

37 = 2 Times Bell Timeout**

38 = Chime

39 = Fire Alarm

40 = Bypassing

41 = AC Power Fail

42 = System Battery Low

43 = Communication failure

44 = RF Low Battery

45 = Polling Loop Failure

51 = RF Receiver Failure

52 = Kissoff

54 = Fire Zone Reset

55 = Disarm + 1 Minute

56 = XX Minutes (enter XX in field 1*74

stop condition only)

57 = YY Seconds (enter YY in field 1*75

stop condition only)

58 = Duress

60 = Audio Alarm Verification (must

be selected for both START

and STOP operation)

61 = Code + [#] + 67 Key Entry

62 = Bell 2 Timeout

63 = Aux. Relay Timeout

** Or at Disarming, whichever occurs

earlier

If using options 57 and/or 58 (usually as the STOP Zone Type), data fields 1*74 and 1*75 for the

respective relay timeouts for minutes and seconds must be programmed.

02 START: ACS PT

(00-31) 00

If the start zone type selected was 27 (access point), this

prompt will be displayed. Enter the access point (00-31) which

will start the relay action.

02 START PART If the starting event will be limited to occurring on a specific

partition, enter the partition number (1-8) in which the start

event will occur. Enter 0 for any partition.

Press [∗] to continue.

02 STOP: ZN LIST

NO LIST

If a zone list is being used to stop this relay action, enter the

zone list number 1-8. The restore of a zone on the zone list

will stop the relay. If a zone list is not being used, enter 0.

Press [∗] to continue.

02 STOP: ZN TYP If a Zone Type/System Operation is being used to stop the relay

action, enter the 2-digit code as listed in the “Choices for

Start/Stop Zone Type/System Operation” table.

Press [∗] to continue.

02 STOP: ACS PT

(00-31) 00

If the stop zone type selected was 27, (access point), this

prompt will be displayed. Enter the access point (00-31), which

will stop the relay action.

02 STOP PART This is the partition to which the stop condition will be limited.

Enter 0 for any partition. Enter 1-8 for specific partition

number.

Press [∗] to continue.

Section 25 - #93 Menu Mode Programming

25-29

RELAY GROUP Relays may be grouped for common activation by time-driven

events (commands 06-10). Enter 0 (no group) or 1-8 for a

specific group number.

Press [∗] to continue.

01 FIRE BELL?

1 = YES 0 = NO

If this relay is on a supervised 4204CF Module, it may be used

as an additional fire bell. Enter 1 (Y) if it is; enter 0 if it is not.

This tells the system which relays are to be activated during a

fire drill or Fire Walk-Test.

Press [∗] to continue.

RESTRICTION

1=YES 0=NO

The system may have some devices, which are not intended to

be under end user control, such as relays activating fire doors

or machinery. Enter 1 if the end user will be restricted from

accessing this relay group. If this is a fire bell, it will be

restricted automatically.

Press [∗] to continue.

RELAY TYPE Enter 1 for relay modules (4204/4204CF). Enter 3 for

relays/triggers on the PassPoint ACS system.

VGM ECP ADDRESS If 3 was selected for the relay type, this prompt will be

displayed. Enter the ECP address of the Vista Gateway Module

(VGM). (00-30).

RLY/TRIG SEL Enter 0 for ACS relay. Enter 1 for ACS trigger.

ACS RLY/TRIG # Enter the PassPoint ACS relay number or trigger number,

(00-31).

ECP ADDRESS For relay modules (4204/4204CF), enter the actual relay

module's address (01-15) as set by its DIP switches. Up to 8

modules can be installed in a system.

MODULE RELAY # For 4204 Relay Outputs, enter the specific relay number on

that module (1-4). For 4204CF outputs, enter only module

relay number 1 (Output A) or relay number 3 (Output B).

These are the only two programmable relays on the 4204CF

Module.

Press [∗] to continue. The keypad will display the Start and

Stop summary screens again.

Press [∗] to continue.

When all relays have been programmed, enter 00 at the "ENTER RELAY NO." prompt.

If defining a zone list, continue to the next section. If not, enter 00 + [∗] at the next two

prompts. You will then be asked "Quit Menu Mode?" Enter 1 for "Yes," 0 for "No." Then

enter *99 to exit programming completely.

If supervision of the 4204CF Relay Output is desired, enter a response type for that output's

corresponding supervisory zone. This is equal to 600 + [Relay ID No.]. For example, if you

are programming Relay ID No. 1, the relay's supervisory zone would be 601. Program this

zone for response type 19 (24-Hr. Trouble) in Zone Programming.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

25-30

Zone List Programming

After all relays have been programmed, upon entering 00 at the "ENTER RELAY NO."

prompt, you will be asked to enter a zone list. If a zone list number was used to start or stop

a relay, you must define the zones belonging to that list as follows:

Enter Zone LIST

00=QUIT 00

Enter the zone list number 01-08. Enter 00 to quit.

001 Enter Zn Num.

000=QUIT 000

Using 3-digit entries, enter each zone to be included in this

zone list. Press [∗] after each zone number is entered.

When all zones have been entered, enter 000.

Press [∗] to continue.

001 Del Zn LIST?

0=No 1=Yes

Enter 0 to save the zone list entered. Enter 1 to delete that

zone list.

001 Delete Zone?

0=No 1=Yes

Enter 1 to delete one or more zones in that zone list. Enter 0 if

no changes are necessary. If 1 is entered, the following screen

will appear, otherwise the "Enter Zone LIST" prompt will

reappear.

001 Zn to Delete?

000=QUIT 000

Enter each zone number to be deleted from the zone list,

pressing [∗] after each number.

View Zn LIST

00=QUIT 00

This will appear if 00 is pressed at the “Enter Zone LIST”

prompt. Enter the zone list number that you wish to view.

Press [∗] to continue.

XXX Assigned Zone

000=QUIT 000

Press [∗] to scroll through all zones in that list. Enter 000 +[∗]

to quit.

Press *99 to exit Program Mode.

Relay Voice Descriptors

If using the 4285/4286 VIP Module, voice descriptors can be programmed for each of the 32

relays used in the system. These descriptors will be announced by the voice module when

accessing the relays via the # 70 Relay Access Mode via telephone.

Each voice descriptor can consist of up to 3 words selected from the relay voice descriptor

vocabulary list (later in this section).

The index numbers from this vocabulary list are to be used for relay voice descriptors only. For

normal system voice annunciation (e.g., alarms, troubles, status), use the highlighted words in the

alpha vocabulary list in the

Alpha Programming

part of this section.

To enter relay voice descriptors, do the following:

1. From Data Field Programming Mode, press #93 to display the "ZONE PROG?" prompt.

2. Press 0 (NO) to each menu option until the "RLY VOICE DESCR?" prompt is displayed.

Follow the instructions below. While in this mode, press [∗] to advance to next screen.

Press [#] to back up to previous screen.

Section 25 - #93 Menu Mode Programming

25-31

RLY VOICE DESCR?

0=no 1=yes

Press 1 to program voice descriptors for relays.

ENTER RELAY NO.

00=QUIT 01

Enter the 2-digit relay number (01-32) for the relay desired, or

enter 00 to quit Relay Voice Descriptor Programming Mode.

Press [∗].

01 ENTER DESC d1 From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list, enter the 3-

digit index number for the first word of the relay descriptor

phrase. Press [∗] to accept entry.

01 ENTER DESC d2 From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list, enter the 3-

digit index number for the second word of the relay descriptor

phrase. If second word is not desired, press 000.

Press [∗] to accept entry.

01 ENTER DESC d3 From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list, enter the 3-

digit index number for the third word of the relay descriptor

phrase. If third word is not desired, press 000.

Press [∗] to accept entry. The “ENTER RELAY NO.” prompt

will appear. Enter the next relay number to be programmed.

When all output devices have been programmed, enter 00 to

quit.

Enter *99 to exit Program Mode.

Relay Voice Descriptors and Custom Word Substitutes Vocabulary

Word Index

Air

....................

116

Alarm

...............

255

And

...................

067

Apartment

.......

117

Appliances

.......

161

Area

..................

118

Attic

..................

119

Baby

.................

120

Back

.................

121

Bar

...................

122

Basement

.........

021

Bathroom

.........

051

Battery

.............

053

Bed

...................

092

Bedroom

...........

015

Blower

..............

123

Boiler

................

124

Bright

...............

162

Building

...........

125

Burglary

...........

039

Call

...................

009

Central

.............

089

Chime

...............

054

Closed

...............

126

Computer

.........

127

Console

.............

066

Word

Index

Daughter's

.......

208

Den

...................

052

Detector

...........

128

Device

..............

060

Dim

..................

163

Dining

..............

031

Door

..................

016

Down

................

008

Downstairs

......

184

Driveway

.........

130

Duct

..................

131

East

..................

132

Eight

................

077

Eighth

..............

221

Equipment

.......

133

Exit

...................

004

Factory

.............

134

Father's

............

211

Fence

................

135

Fifth

.................

218

Fire

...................

040

First

................

136

Five

..................

074

Floor

.................

029

Four

..................

073

Fourth

..............

217

Foyer

................

137

Word

Index

Front

................

087

Garage

.............

023

Gas

...................

138

Glass

................

139

Hall

..................

050

Heat

.................

010

Inside

...............

209

Kitchen

............

022

Laundry

...........

140

Left

...................

027

Library

.............

141

Light

.................

019

Living

...............

030

............

142

Lower

...............

094

Machine

...........

143

Master

..............

144

Medical

............

014

Mother's

...........

212

Motion

..............

145

Nine

.................

078

Ninth

................

222

Word

Index

.....................

165

North

................

146

Not

...................

012

Off

....................

011

Office

................

147

.....................

058

One

...................

070

Open

.................

148

Outside

............

210

Panic

................

013

Partition

..........

090

Patio

.................

149

Phone

...............

061

Power

...............

063

Pump

................

166

Rear

.................

088

Right

................

028

Room

................

018

.......................

007

Second

..............

056

Service

.............

150

Seven

...............

076

Seventh

............

220

Shed

.................

151

Shop

.................

152

Word

Index

Side

...................

153

Six

.....................

075

Sixth

..................

219

Smoke

...............

024

Son's..................223

South.................155

Stairs

................

006

Station

..............

156

Storage

..............

157

Sun

....................

154

System

..............

062

Temperature.....158

Third

.................

159

Three

.................

072

Tool

...................

213

Two

...................

071

.....................

025

Upper

................

187

Upstairs

............

183

Utility

...............

185

West

..................

215

Window

.............

017

Wing

..................

216

Zero

...................

069

Zone

..................

002

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

25-32

Custom Word Substitutes for VIP Module Annunciation

A substitute word can be programmed for each of the 20 custom words used in your alpha

zone descriptions. The VIP Module will announce this substitute word in place of the custom

word that is displayed on the alpha keypad. For example, an alarm display of "John's

Bedroom" could be announced as "Son's Bedroom," since there is no annunciation for the

custom word "John." Note that if a substitute word is not assigned, the VIP Module will not

annunciate the zone descriptor at all, but will only annunciate the zone number.

To enter custom word substitutes, do the following:

1. From Data Field Programming Mode, press #93 to display the "ZONE PROG?" prompt.

2. Press 0 (NO) to each menu option until the "CUSTOM INDEX ?" prompt is displayed.

CUSTOM INDEX ?

0=no 1=yes

Enter 1 at this prompt.

CUSTOM WORD NO.

00=QUIT

Enter the custom word number (01-20) for which a voice

substitute is desired. Enter 00 to quit this Programming Mode.

Press [∗] to accept entry.

01 ENTER INDEX # Enter the 3-digit substitute word index number from the relay

voice descriptor and custom word substitutes vocabulary list

found in the Relay Voice Descriptors part of this section.

Press [∗] to accept entry.

The "CUSTOM WORD NO." prompt will be displayed. Enter

the next custom word number to be substituted or enter 00 to

quit.

RF Serial Number Clear Mode

This mode may be used in the event that an undesired transmitter has been enrolled during

sequential enrolling, causing each subsequent serial number to be assigned to an incorrect

zone. Performing this operation will delete all RF serial numbers, leaving all other zone

information intact. You may then return to Sequential Mode to re-enroll wireless

transmitters.

The RF Serial Number Clear Mode will

not

delete polling loop serial numbers.

To clear all RF wireless serial numbers, do the following:

1. Enter Data Field Programming Mode: [Installer Code] + 8 0 0 0.

2. From Data Field Programming Mode, press #93 to display the "ZONE PROG?" prompt.

3. Press 0 (NO) repeatedly until the "CLEAR RF SERIAL #?" prompt appears.

CLEAR RF SERIAL#?

1 = YES, 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to clear all RF wireless serial numbers. The "ARE

YOU SURE?" prompt is displayed as follows:

ARE YOU SURE?

1 = YES, 0 = NO 0

Enter 1 to clear all RF serial numbers. Re-enter the Sequential

Mode to enroll wireless transmitters.

26-1

SECTION 26

Scheduling Options

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

Introduction to Scheduling

♦

Time Window Definitions

♦

Open/Close Definitions

♦

Scheduling Menu Mode

♦

Scheduling Menu Structure

♦

Time Windows

♦

Daily Open/Close Schedules

♦

Holiday Schedules

♦

Time-Driven Events

♦

Limitation of Access Schedules

♦

Temporary Schedules

♦

User Schedule Menu Mode

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Introduction to Scheduling

This section describes the scheduling features provided with this control panel.

UL1. You must program Bypass and Auto-Arm Fail reports for UL installations.

2. Auto-disarming is not for use in UL installations.

General

• The scheduling features allow certain operations to be automated, such as auto-arming,

auto-disarming, auto-bypassing and unbypassing of zones, and activating relay outputs

(using 4204 modules).

• The system uses time windows (a programmed period of time with a start and stop time)

for defining open/close schedules, holiday schedules, user-defined temporary schedules

and access schedules for users.

• Scheduled events are programmed by user-friendly menu modes of programming (#80,

#81 and #83 modes), explained in detail in this section. These menus take you step by

step through the options.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

26-2

Auto Arming

• The system can automatically arm (AWAY Mode) a partition at the end of a pre-

determined closing (arming) time window.

• Auto arming can be delayed three ways: by use of the auto arm delay, the auto arm

warning, or by manually extending the closing (arming) time window with a keypad

command.

• The system can also automatically bypass any open zones when auto arming.

Auto-Arm Delay

• Auto-arm delay provides a delay (grace period) before auto arming.

• It starts at the end of the closing time window.

• The delay is set in 4-minute increments, up to 56 minutes in partition-specific program

field 2*05.

• At the expiration of this delay, the auto-arm warning will start.

Auto-Arm Warning

• The auto-arm warning causes the keypad sounder to warn the user of an impending

auto-arm.

• The warning can be set from 1 to 15 minutes prior to the arming in partition-specific

program field 2*06.

• During this period the keypad beeps every 15 seconds and displays "AUTO ARM

ALERT.” During the last 60 seconds, the keypads begin to beep every 5 seconds.

• The panel arms at the conclusion of the auto-arm warning period.

Extend Closing Window

• A user can manually delay the arm (closing) time window by 1 or 2 hours.

• This is done by entering a keypad command ([User Code} + #82), which then prompts the

user to enter the desired extension time of 1 or 2.

• This feature is useful if a user must stay on the premises later than usual.

• The auto-arm delay and warning periods will begin at the end of the extension.

Force Arm

• The force arm option causes the panel to attempt to bypass any faulted zones prior to

auto-arming (panel will perform a force-arm).

• This option is set in partition-specific program field 2*08.

Auto Disarming

• The system can automatically disarm a partition at the end of a pre-determined opening

(disarm) time window.

• The disarming time can be delayed by using the auto-disarm delay feature.

Disarm Delay

• Auto-disarm delay provides a delay before auto disarming. This delay is added to the end

of the disarm time window.

• The delay is set in 4-minute increments, up to 56 minutes, in partition-specific program

field 2*07.

Section 26 – Scheduling Options

26-3

Restrict Disarming

• This option allows disarming by users only during the disarm time window and during

the arming time window (in case user needs to re-enter premises after manually arming

the partition).

• This option is set in partition-specific field 2*10.

• If field 2*10 is set, it is highly recommended to set field 2*11 as well. This field allows

the partition to be disarmed outside the arm/disarm time windows only if the partition is

in alarm.

Exception Reports

• This option allows the reporting of openings and closings to the central station only if the

arming and disarming occurs outside of the predetermined opening and closing time

windows.

• This option is set in partition-specific field 2*09.

• The system can be programmed to send No Opening and No Closing reports if the

partition is not armed or disarmed by the end of the corresponding time window.

Time-Driven Events

• By using the time windows, the system can automatically activate and de-activate relays

at predetermined times to turn lights or other devices on and off.

• The time-driven events can be activated at different times in relation to the time window:

1. At the beginning of a time window

2. At the end of a time window

3. During a time window active period only (on at beginning of window, off at

end)

4. At both the beginning and end of the time window (e.g., to sound a buzzer at

the beginning and end of a coffee break)

• The system can perform the same actions on a daily basis, or can be made to perform an

action only once (i.e., turn on the porch light this Wednesday at 8:00 pm).

• The system also provides up to 20 programmable "timers" available to the end user for

the purpose of activating output devices at preset times and on preset days.

Limitation of Access of Users by Time

• A user's access can be limited to a certain time period, during which he can perform

system functions. Outside this time, that user's code will be inactive.

• The system provides up to 8 access schedules, each consisting of two time windows

(typically one for opening, one for closing) for each day of the week and two time windows

for holidays.

• The access schedules are programmed in the #80 Menu Mode, and enabled for a given

user when that user’s access code is added to the system.

• If a user tries to operate the system outside of the schedule, the alpha keypad will

display "Access Denied."

Time Window Definitions

General

• Scheduled events are based on time windows, which are simply periods of time during

which an event may take place.

• A time window is defined by a “Start” time and a “Stop” time.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

26-4

• The system supports up to 20 time windows.

• The windows are shared by all 8 partitions, and are used when programming the various

schedules (open/close, limitation of access), as well as for time-driven event control.

Scheduling Example

To understand scheduling, take, for example, a store that has the following hours:

Monday to Thursday: 9am to 6pm

Friday 9am to 9pm

Saturday 10am to 4pm

Sunday Closed

Holidays Closed

Assume the owner desires the following time windows to allow time for employees to arm or

disarm the system:

Monday to Thursday: Open (disarm) 8am to 9am

Close (arm) 6pm to 6:30pm

Friday Open (disarm) 8am to 9am

Close (arm) 9pm to 9:30pm

Saturday Open (disarm) 9am to 10am

Close (arm) 4pm to 4:30pm

Sunday & Holidays Closed

To provide these schedules, the following five time windows need to be programmed:

Window Start Stop Purpose

1 8am 9am Monday-Friday open window

2 9am 10am Saturday open window

3 4pm 4:30pm Saturday close window

4 6pm 6:30pm Monday-Thurs. close window

5 9pm 9:30pm Friday close window

Using the #80 Menu Mode (described later in this section), the installer can program

open/close schedules by assigning each time window to a day of the week (windows are

entered as 2-digit entries):

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Hol

Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl

01/04 01/04 01/04 01/04 01/05 02/03 00/00 00/00

Note: 00 is entered for those days on which the store is closed.

Employees can arm and disarm the system, when programmed, within the open and close

time windows without causing a report to be sent to the central station (reporting by

exception, field 2*09). The system can be programmed to automatically arm/disarm in case

an employee fails to arm/disarm manually (auto-arm/auto-disarm).

Open/Close Definitions

General

• The open/close scheduling is controlled by one of three schedules. Each schedule consists

of one time window for openings and one time window for closings.

• There are three types of schedules available: Daily, Holiday, and Temporary.

Daily Schedule

• Each partition can have one daily schedule consisting of one opening window and one

closing window per day.

Section 26 – Scheduling Options

26-5

Holiday Schedule

• A holiday schedule will override the regular daily schedule on selected holidays

throughout the year.

• The opening and closing windows are programmed in the daily schedule, but the holidays

themselves are defined in the Holiday Schedule Programming in the #80 Menu Mode.

Temporary Schedule

• The temporary schedule provides a method for the end user to override the daily and

holiday schedules.

• It consists of one opening window and one closing window for each day of the week.

• The schedule takes effect for up to one week, after which it is automatically deactivated.

• This schedule is programmed using the #81 Temporary Schedule Menu Mode.

Additional Schedules

• Additional opening and closing schedules can be programmed using the Time-Driven

Event Programming. For example, a schedule for normal store openings/closings can be

programmed with a daily open/close schedule, and another open/close schedule for a

lunch hour can be programmed using the time-driven event schedule programming.

• Refer to “Time-Driven Events” later in this section for detailed information.

Open/Close Reports by Exception

• The system can help reduce communication traffic to the central station by using the

Open/Close Reports by Exception feature.

• The Open/Close by Exception option suppresses these reports from being sent to the

central station if an arm or disarm is done within the expected time window. Reports

are only sent if the arm or disarm occurs outside the assigned time window.

• The system keeps a record of all openings/closings in its event log.

• If a disarming occurs during a closing window (a person who arms the system forgets

something and has to reenter), the Opening report (although outside of the opening

window) will not be sent (as long as that disarming occurs within the closing window).

• This option is programmed in partition-specific program field 2*09.

The following chart gives an example of how the Open/Close by Exception reporting works.

Example of Open/Close Exception Reporting & Scheduling

6:01PM 5:59AM 6AM 9AM 9:01AM 3:59PM 4PM 6PM 6:01PM 5:59AM

Early Opening reports will

be sent if system is

manually disarmed before

opening window begins.

* Early and Late Opening

and Closing reports are

programmable options in

the Report Code

programming section.

They are not dependent

on the programming of

the Exception Reporting

option.

Opening Window

No reports sent if

system disarmed

during this time

window.

If an arming occurs, a

Closing report is sent

to the central station

regardless of how the

Exception Reporting

option is set.

Auto-disarm delay begins.

Auto-disarm occurs after delay

(if auto-disarm is enabled).

Missed Opening reports will be

sent if manual disarming has not

occurred at expiration of

opening window.

Late Opening reports will be

sent if disarm occurs after the

opening window expires.

Early Closing reports will be

sent if manual arming occurs

before the closing window

begins.

* Missed Opening/Closing type

reports are programmed in the

Report Code programming

section. The Exception

Reporting option must be set for

these to be sent.

Closing Window

No reports sent if

system is armed*

during this time

window.

* or disarmed if user

needs to re-enter

premises.

Auto-arm delay begins.

Auto-arm warning begins.

Auto-arm occurs after

warning expires (if auto-

arm is enabled).

Missed Closing reports will

be sent if manual arming

has not occurred at

expiration of closing

window.

Late Closing reports will be

sent if system is manually

armed after the closing

window expires.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

26-6

Scheduling Menu Mode

The #80 Scheduling Menu Mode is used to program most of the scheduling and timed-event

options. To enter this mode, the system must first be in the normal operating mode (all

partitions disarmed). Enter [Installer Code] + [#] + 8 + 0.

The following can be programmed while in this mode:

• Define time windows

• Assign open/close schedules to each partition

• Assign holiday schedules

• Program time-driven events (for system functions and relay activation)

• Assign limitation of access schedules

Some scheduling features are programmed in Data Field Programming Mode ([Installer

Code] + 8 0 0 0). The general Programming Mode scheduling fields are listed below.

System-Wide Fields: 1*74 -1*75 Relay time-out values

2*01-2*02 Daylight savings time options

2*11 Allow disarming outside window if alarm occurs

Partition-Specific fields: 1*76 Access control relay for this partition

2*05 Auto-arm delay value

2*06 Auto-arm warning time

2*07 Auto-disarm delay value

2*08 Force-arm enable

2*09 Open/Close Reporting by Exception

2*10 Restrict disarm only during windows

Report Code Programming in #93 Menu Mode

(System Group #3) Scheduling related report codes

Event-driven relay activation options are programmed using the Relay Programming in the

#93 Menu Mode. These actions are in response to a programmed action. However, relay

activation can also be time-driven, and thus be used to initiate a desired action. Time-driven

relay activation options are programmed using the #80 Menu Mode. Refer to the Time-

Driven Event Programming for procedures.

Steps To Programming Scheduling Options

This section contains examples of the worksheets only. For complete worksheets, see the Quick

Start guide accompanying these Installation Instructions.

In order to use #80 Scheduling Menu Mode, do the following:

Using the worksheets:

• Define time windows (up to 20)

• Define the daily open/close schedules (one schedule per day, per partition)

• Define the holidays to be used by the system (up to 16)

• Define limitation of access times (up to 8 schedules)

• Define the time-driven events (up to 20)

Note: Temporary schedules are programmed using the #81 Menu Mode.

Section 26 – Scheduling Options

26-7

Use #80 Scheduling Menu Mode to perform the following functions:

• Program the time windows

• Program the open/close schedules

• Program the time-driven events

• Program the access schedules

Scheduling Menu Structure

To program schedules, enter Scheduling Program Mode:

[Installer Code] + [#] + 80.

This mode can only be entered when all partitions are disarmed.

There are 5 sections of scheduling menus, as shown below. Entering 1 at a displayed main

menu prompt will select that menu section. Prompts for programming that scheduling

feature will then appear. Enter 0 to skip a section and display the next menu option.

Time Window ?

1 Yes 0 = No 0

Upon entering Schedule Menu Mode, this prompt will appear.

Enter 1 to program time windows. Refer to Time Windows

Programming later in this section for detailed procedures.

Enter 0 to move to the “O/C Schedules?” prompt.

O/C Schedules ?

1 Yes 0 = No 0

Enter 1 to program opening and closing schedules. Refer to

Open/Close Schedules Programming later in this section for

detailed procedures.

Enter 0 to move to the “Holidays?” prompt.

Holidays ?

1 Yes 0 = No 0

Enter 1 to program holiday schedules. Refer to Holiday

Schedule Programming later in this section for detailed

procedures.

Enter 0 to move to the “Timed Events?” prompt.

Timed Events ?

1 Yes 0 = No 0

Enter 1 to program timed events for relay outputs, additional

schedules, and other system functions. Refer to Time Driven

Event Programming later in this section for detailed

procedures.

Enter 0 to move to the “Access Sched?” prompt.

Access Sched. ?

1 Yes 0 = No 0

Enter 1 to program access schedules. Refer to Limitation of

Access Schedules Programming later in this section for detailed

procedures.

Enter 0 to move to the "Quit?" prompt.

Quit ?

1 Yes 0 = No 0

Enter 1 to quit #80 Scheduling Menu Mode and return to

normal operating mode.

Enter 0 to make any changes or review the scheduling

programming options. If 0 is pressed, the “Time Window?”

prompt is displayed.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

26-8

Time Windows

The system provides 20 time windows that are defined with start and stop times. These

windows are used for various open/close and access schedules, as well as for output controls,

and are the basis of the scheduling system. These windows are shared among all 8 partitions.

Time Windows Worksheet

The following worksheet will help you define time windows and scheduling aspects of this

system before programming the time window definitions for this installation. Note that time

windows can span midnight.

Time Window

Number Start Time

(HH:MM) Stop Time

(HH:MM)

3…..20

A time window must have a start and a stop time.

Time Windows Programming

Enter Scheduling Mode by entering [Installer Code + [#] + 80. The keypad will display the

Time Window Programming prompt.

Time Window ?

1 Yes 0 = No 0

Enter 1 at this main menu prompt to program time windows.

Time Window # ?

01-20, 00 = Quit 01

Enter the 2-digit time window number (01-20) to be

programmed.

Press [∗] to accept the entry.

Enter 00 + [∗] at the "TIME WINDOW #?" prompt to quit time

window programming and display the “Quit ?” prompt.

01 TIME WINDOW

00:00AM 00:00AM

If a time window number was entered, the cursor will be

positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start of window

entry.

Enter the desired start of window hour and press [∗]. The

cursor will move to the minutes. Enter the desired minutes

and press [∗]. Toggle the AM/PM indication by pressing any

key 0-9 while the cursor is under the A/P position and then

press [∗]. Repeat this to program the stop of window entry.

When the entry is completed, the "TIME WINDOW #?" prompt

is displayed again.

Enter the next time window number to be programmed and

repeat the procedure.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 0 at the Quit ? prompt to return to the main menu

choices and continue programming.

Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.

Since the time windows are shared among all partitions, it is important to make sure that

changing a time window does not adversely affect desired actions in other partitions.

Section 26 – Scheduling Options

26-9

Daily Open/Close Schedules

Open/Close Schedule Worksheet

Write in the previously defined time window numbers for open & close for each partition.

Part Mon Tues Wed Thur Fri Sat Sun Hol

Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl

3…8

Open/Close Schedule Programming

Each partition can be assigned one daily open/close schedule, plus a holiday open/close

schedule. Temporary schedules are programmed separately, using the #81 Temporary

Schedule Menu Mode. To program additional open/close schedules, see Time Driven Events

Programming.

After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press 0 until the “O/C Schedules?” prompt appears.

O/C Schedules ?

1 Yes 0 = No 0

Enter 1 to program opening and closing schedules.

Partition # ?

01-08, 00 = Quit 01

Enter the appropriate partition number for which the following

open/close schedules will apply.

Enter 00 + [∗] at the "Partition #?" prompt to quit open/close

schedules programming and display the “Quit ?” prompt.

Mon P1 OP WIND.?

00:00 00:00 00

Enter the time window number 01-20 for the displayed day's

opening schedule beginning with Monday.

Enter 00 if no schedule is desired for a particular day. As the

number is keyed in, the actual time that has been stored for

that window number will be displayed as a programming aid.

Press [∗] to accept the entry.

Mon P1 CL WIND.?

00:00 00:00 00

Enter the time window number for the displayed day's closing

schedule. As the number is keyed in, the actual time that has

been stored for the window number will be displayed.

Press the [∗] key to accept the entry.

Tue P1 OP WIND.?

00:00 00:00 00

The keypad will now prompt for Tuesday's open/close schedule,

etc. Follow the procedure for Monday’s prompts.

When the last day of the week has been programmed, the

holiday opening and closing window prompts are displayed.

Hol P1 OP WIND.?

00:00 00:00 00

Repeat the procedure for the holiday opening and closing time

windows.

Press the [∗] key to accept the entry.

When the entries are completed, the “Partition #?” prompt is

displayed again. Repeat this procedure for each partition in

the system.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

26-10

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu

choices and continue programming.

Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.

Holiday Schedules

A holiday schedule will override the regular daily open/close schedule on the programmed

holidays throughout the year.

Holiday Schedule Worksheet

The system provides up to 16 holidays that can be assigned for the system. Each holiday can

be assigned to any combination of partitions. List the desired holidays in a Month/Day

format on the worksheet. Check the partitions for which these holidays apply.

HOL Partition

Month/Day12345678

3…16 /

Holiday Schedule Programming

After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press 0 until the “Holidays ?” prompt appears.

Holidays ?

1 Yes 0 = No 0

Enter 1 to program holiday schedules.

HOLIDAY NUMBER ?

01-16, 00=Quit 01

Enter the 2-digit holiday number (01-16) to be programmed

and press [∗] to accept entry.

Enter 00 + [∗] at the “Holiday Number?” prompt to quit the

holiday menus and display the “Quit ?” prompt.

01 ENTER DATE

00/00

The cursor will be positioned on the tens of months digit. Enter

the appropriate month, then press [∗] to proceed to the day

field.

Enter the appropriate day for the holiday.

Press [∗] to accept the entry.

Part ? 12345678

Hit 0-8 x x

Holidays can be set for any partition, as follows. Press 0 to

turn all partitions on or off, or use keys 1-8 to toggle the letter

“x” under the partition to which this holiday will apply.

Press the [∗] key when all desired partitions have been

assigned.

The “Holiday Number?” prompt will be displayed again.

Repeat the procedure for each holiday to be programmed.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu

choices and continue programming.

Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.

Section 26 – Scheduling Options

26-11

Time-Driven Events

These are the schedules used to activate outputs, bypass zones, etc. based on a time

schedule. There are 20 of these events that may be programmed for the system, with each

event governed by the previously defined time windows.

The actions that can be programmed to automatically activate at set times are: relay

commands, arm/disarm commands, zone bypassing commands, and open/close access

conditions.

Time-Driven Events Worksheet

Fill out the worksheet using the steps outlined below.

Sched Time Days Action Action Activation

Num. Window M T W T F S S H Desired Specifier Time

3…20

1) First enter the schedule number (01-20) and time window number (01-20), and

note the day of the week the action is desired.

2) Enter the code for the desired action and action specifier. The action codes are the

events that are to take place when the scheduled time is reached. Each action also

requires an action specifier, which defines what the action will affect (relay, relay group,

partition, zone list, user group). The action specifier varies, depending on the type of

action selected.

The following is a list of the "Action Codes” (desired actions) used when programming

time-driven events. Note that these codes are independent of the relay codes programmed

during the Relay Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.

Relay commands

Action Code Action Specifier

01 Relay On Relay #

02 Relay Off Relay #

03 Relay Close for 2 seconds Relay #

04 Relay Close XX minutes (set in field 1*74) Relay #

05 Relay Close YY seconds (set in field 1*75) Relay #

06 Relay Group On Relay Group #

07 Relay Group Off Relay Group #

08 Relay Group Close for 2 seconds Relay Group #

09 Relay Group Close XX minutes (set in field 1*74) Relay Group #

10 Relay Group Close YY seconds (set in field 1*75) Relay Group #

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

26-12

Arm/Disarm Commands

Activation times 1 (Beginning), 2 (End), 3 (During) are the only valid choices for

automatic arming and disarming functions.

"During" can be used to arm or disarm the control for a specific time only. For example, if

"during" is selected with Arm-STAY, the system will automatically Arm-STAY at the

beginning of the window and automatically disarm at the end of the window.

Action Code Action Specifier

20 Arm-STAY Partition(s)

21 Arm AWAY Partition(s)

22 Disarm Partition(s)

23 Force Arm STAY (Auto-bypass faulted zns) Partition(s)

24 Force Arm AWAY (Auto-bypass faulted zns) Partition(s)

1. The auto-arm warning (field 2*06) applies when using time-driven events to auto-arm.

2. Temporary schedules will not override an auto-arming or auto-disarming programmed in time-

driven events.

3. The auto-arming window cannot be extended using the Installer Code + #82 Mode.

Bypass Commands

Activation times 1 (Beginning), 2 (End), 3 (During) are the only valid choices for bypass

commands. If 3 (During) is selected for auto-bypassing, the system will bypass the zone(s)

specified on a particular zone list at the beginning of the window and unbypass the

zone(s) at the end of the window. If it is selected for auto unbypassing, the system will

remove the bypass of the zone(s) at the beginning of the window and will restore the

bypass of the zone(s) at the end of the window.

Action Code Action Specifier

30 Auto bypass - Zone list Zone list #

31 Auto unbypass - Zone list Zone list #

Open/Close Windows

Activation time 3 (During) is the only valid choice for these commands.

Action Code Action Specifier

40 Enable Opening Window by partition Partition(s)

41 Enable Closing Window by partition Partition(s)

42 Enable Access Window for access group Access Group

50 Off-Normal Reminder None

(Starts local keypad beeping if fire off-

normal condition exists)

Section 26 – Scheduling Options

26-13

3) Enter the desired activation time, which refers to when the action is to take place

relative to the time window. Select from:

Activation

time Description

1 Beginning of time window

2 End of time window

3During time window active period only (On at

beginning of window, off at end). This can be used

in conjunction with the arm, disarm or bypass

commands to control a part of the system during

the window.

For example, if bypass is selected to activate during

the window, the zones in the zone list will be

bypassed at the beginning of the window and

unbypassed at the end of the window.

4 Beginning and end of time window (e.g., -a Coffee

break buzzer). In this example, if relay pulse is

selected, the relay will pulse for 2 seconds at the

beginning of the window, signaling the beginning of

the coffee break. At the end of the window it will

pulse again, signaling the end of coffee break.

Time-Driven Event Programming

The following schedules can be used to activate outputs, bypass zones, arm/disarm the

system, etc. based on a time schedule. Up to 20 events can be programmed for the system.

Time windows must first be defined in order to be used to trigger events.

If using time-driven events to control relays, the following menu items must first

be programmed using Relay Programming in the #93 Menu Mode:

Enter Relay No. (reference identification number)

Relay Group (if applicable)

Restriction

Relay Type (4204 or none)

ECP Address

Relay No. if 4204 relays

After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press 0 until the “Timed Events ?” prompt appears.

Timed Events ?

1 Yes 0 = No 0

Enter 1 to program timed events.

TIMED EVENT # ?

01-20, 00=Quit 01

Enter the timed event number to be programmed (01-20).

Press [∗].

The system will then prompt the user to enter the desired

action to be taken.

Enter 00 at the “TIMED EVENT #?” prompt to quit the timed

event menus and display the “Quit ?” prompt.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

26-14

01 ACTION ?

none 00

Enter the action code for this timed-event number from the list

at the left. This could be an output command, an arming

command, or any other time-driven event.

Press [∗]to accept the entry. The prompt for the action specifier

will display.

Action Codes: Action Specifier:

01=Relay On

02=Relay Off

03=Relay Close for 2 seconds

04=Relay Close XX minutes

05=Relay Close YY seconds

Actions 01-05

If actions 01-05 were selected, the

prompt at the right will be

displayed. Enter the relay number.

Press [∗] to accept entry. The “Time

Window ?” prompt appears.

01 RELAY # ?

06=Relay Group On

07=Relay Group Off

08=Relay Group Close for 2

seconds

09=Relay Group Close XX minutes

10=Relay Group Close YY seconds

Actions 06-10

If actions 06-10 were selected, the

prompt at the right will be

displayed. Enter the relay group

number.

Press [∗] to accept entry. The “Time

Window ?” prompt appears.

01 RELAY GRP # ?

Action Codes:

20=Arm-STAY

21=Arm AWAY

22=Disarm

23=Force Arm STAY

24=Force Arm AWAY

40=Enable Open Window by part.

41=Enable Close Window by part.

Actions 21-24 and 40-41

If actions 21-24 or 40-41 were

selected, the prompt at the right

will be displayed. Enter the

partition to which the action

applies. Enter 0 to select all

partitions. Enter a partition number

again to deselect it.

Press [∗] to accept entry. The “Time

Window ?” prompt appears.

PART? 12345678

HIT 0-8 X X

30=Auto bypass - Zone list

31=Auto unbypass - Zone list Actions 30-31

If actions 30-31 were selected, the

prompt at the right will be

displayed. Enter the zone list

number that contains the zones to

be bypassed or unbypassed.

Press [∗] to accept entry. The “Time

Window ?” prompt appears.

01 ZONE LIST ?

ENTER 1-8 1

42=Enable Access Window for

Access group(s) Action 42

If action 42 was selected, the

prompt at the right will be

displayed. Enter the group number

to which the time window will

apply.

Press [∗] to accept entry. The “Time

Window ?” prompt appears.

GROUP ? 12345678

HIT 0-8 X

Section 26 – Scheduling Options

26-15

50=Off-normal Reminder Action 50

No action specifier is required for

this action since the conditions that

this will occur for are system-wide.

01 Time Window ?

00:00 00:00 01

Enter the time window number (01-20) for which this timed

event is to occur. As the number is keyed in, the actual time

that has been stored for the time window number will be

displayed.

Press [∗] to accept entry.

01 Active time ?

Enter the activation time from 1-4 (listed below). As the

number is keyed in, the activation time will be displayed. The

choices are:

1: Trigger at the start of the window.

2: Trigger at the end of the window.

3: Take effect only for the duration of the window.

4: Trigger at both the start and the end of the window.

Example: - coffee break buzzer.

Press [∗] to accept entry.

Days ? MTWTFSSH

Hit 0-8 x x

The system will then ask for which days the event is to be

activated.

Press 0 to toggle all days on or off; or else press keys 1-8 to

toggle the letter “x” under the day on or off (Monday = 1,

Holiday = H = 8).

When all entries have been made, the “TIMED EVENT #?”

prompt is displayed again.

Repeat the procedure for each timed event required for the

installation.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu

choices and continue programming. Enter 1 to quit Scheduling

Menu Mode.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

26-16

Limitation of Access Schedules

Limitation of Access is a means by which a user's access code is limited to working during a

certain period of time. The system provides 8 Access Schedules, each of which consists of two

time windows for each day of the week and two time windows for holidays (typically one for

an opening time window and the second for a closing time window). A user required to follow

a schedule would be assigned to an access group of the same number (1-8; i.e., schedule 1=

group 1). The user’s access code is assigned to a group when that user is added to the

system. If no limitations apply, enter 0.

Limitation of Access Schedule Worksheet

Enter the appropriate time window numbers for each access schedule.

Acc Mon Tues Wed Thurs Fri Sat Sun Hol

SchW1W2W1W2W1W2W1W2W1W2W1W2W1W2W1W2

3…8

NOTE : The holidays used for the access groups are the same as those defined in the holiday

schedule.

Limitation of Access Schedules Programming

To program access schedules, do the following:

Enter Scheduling Menu Mode [Installer Code] + # 80. After entering Scheduling Menu

Mode, press 0 until the “Access Sched. ?” prompt appears.

Access Sched. ?

1 Yes 0 = No 0

Enter 1 to program access schedules.

ACCESS SCHED # ?

01-08, 00 = Quit 01

Enter the access control schedule number between 01 and 08.

Press [∗] to accept entry.

Enter 00 at the “Access Sched #?” prompt to quit the access

control menus and display the Quit ? prompt.

MON A1 Window 1?

00:00 00:00 00

Enter the first time window number (01-20) for this access

schedule for the displayed day. As the number is keyed in, the

actual time that has been stored for the window will be

displayed.

Press [∗] to continue.

MON A1 Window 2 ?

00:00 00:00 00

Enter the second time window number from 01-20 for this

access schedule for the displayed day. As the number is keyed

in, the actual time that has been stored for the window will be

displayed.

Press [∗] to continue.

TUE A1 Window 1?

00:00 00:00 00

Repeat the procedure for the other days of the week. When the

last day of the week has been programmed, the windows for

holidays may be entered.

Section 26 – Scheduling Options

26-17

Hol A1 Window 1 ?

00:00 00:00 00

Enter the first time window number for holidays for this access

schedule. As the number is keyed in, the actual time that has

been stored for the window will be displayed.

Press [∗] to continue.

Hol A1 Window 2 ?

00:00 00:00 00

Enter the second time window number for holidays for this

access schedule. As the number is keyed in, the actual time

that has been stored for the window will be displayed.

Press [∗] to continue.

Quit ?

1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu

choices and continue programming.

Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.

Temporary Schedules

Each partition can be assigned a temporary schedule, which will override the regular

open/close schedule (and the holiday schedule). This schedule takes effect as soon as it is

programmed and remains active for up to one week.

Temporary Schedule Worksheet

Partition/Windows Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun

1Disarm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

Arm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

2Disarm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

Arm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

3…8 Disarm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

Arm Window

Start Time HH:MM

Stop Time HH:MM

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

26-18

Temporary Schedules Programming

Enter [User Code] + [#] + 81 to enter this mode. Note that only users with authority level

of manager or higher can program temporary schedules. A temporary schedule only affects

the partition from which it is entered.

Temporary schedules can also be reused at later dates simply by scrolling (pressing [#]) to

the “DAYS?” prompt (described below) and activating the appropriate days. This should be

considered when defining daily time windows.

Mon DISARM WIND.

00:00AM 00:00AM

This prompt is for entering the start and end times of the

disarm (opening) window for Monday.

Upon entry of this mode, the cursor will be positioned on the

tens of hours digit of the start time of the disarm window.

Enter the desired hour.

Press [∗] to move to the minutes field. The minutes are entered

in the same manner.

Press [∗] to move to the AM/PM position. Pressing any key in

the 0-9 range will toggle the AM/PM indication.

Repeat the procedure for the stop time entry.

Press [∗] to store the entries and move to the arming (closing)

window for Monday.

Pressing [#] will scroll you through the prompts without

making any changes.

Mon ARM WINDOW

00:00AM 00:00AM

This prompt is for entering the start and end times of the arm

(closing) window for Monday.

The cursor will be positioned on the tens of hours digit of the

start time of the arm window. Enter the desired hour.

Press [∗] to move to the minutes field. The minutes are entered

in the same manner.

Press [∗] to move to the AM/PM position. Pressing any key in

the 0-9 range will toggle the AM/PM indication.

Repeat the procedure for the stop time entry.

After the windows for that day have been completed, the

system will prompt for disarm and arm time windows for the

next day.

Press [#] if no changes are desired.

Tue DISARM WIND.

00:00AM 00:00AM

Repeat the procedure described above for all days of the week.

When all the windows for all the days have been completed, the

system will prompt which days of the schedule are to be

activated.

Section 26 – Scheduling Options

26-19

Days ? MTWTFSS

Hit 0-7 x x

This is the prompt that actually activates the temporary

schedule.

To select the days which are to be activated, enter 1-7

(Monday = 1). An "X" will appear under that day, indicating

the temporary schedule for that day is active. Entering a day's

number again will deactivate that day. Pressing 0 will toggle

all days on/off.

The temporary schedule will only be in effect for the days which

have the letter “x” under them. As the week progresses, the

selected days are reset to the inactive state, but all other

entries for the temporary schedule will remain programmed.

Press [∗] to store the entries or press [#] to exit the Temporary

Schedule Entry Mode without making any changes.

User Scheduling Menu Mode

The system provides up to 20 "timers" which will be available to the end user for the purpose

of controlling output devices (4204 relay). These timers are comparable to the individual

appliance timers that might be purchased at a department store. The output devices

themselves are programmed into the system by the installer during Relay Programming in

the #93 Menu Mode. The end user needs only to know the output device number and its

alpha descriptor.

The installer may set certain relays to be "restricted" during Relay Programming in the # 93

Menu Mode. These relays may not be controlled by the end user (this prevents the end user

from controlling doors, pumps, bell outputs, etc.)

To enter this mode, the user enters [Security Code] + # + 83.

Output Timer # ?

01-20, 00=Quit 01

Enter the output timer number to be programmed (01-20).

Press [∗] to accept entry and move to the next prompt.

Enter 00 to quit and return to normal operating mode.

06 07:00P 11:45P

PORCH LITE 04

If that timer number has already been programmed, a

summary screen will appear. In this example:

06 = Timer #

07:00PM = Start Time

11:45PM = Stop Time

PORCH LITE = Descriptor for Output Device # 4

04 = Output Device # affected by this timer

Press [∗] to continue.

06 ENTER OUTPUT#

PORCH LITE 04

Enter the desired output number (01-32).

As the number is entered, the descriptor for that output device

will be displayed.

Press [∗] to continue.

Entering 00 as the output number deletes the timer (Timer 06, in this example) and displays an

output descriptor of "None." Output devices are programmed via #93 Menu Mode.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

26-20

06 ON TIME ?

07:00 PM

The cursor will be positioned on the tens of hours digit of the

ON time. Enter the desired hour.

Press [∗] to move to the minutes field. The minutes are entered

in the same manner.

The AM/PM indication is toggled by hitting any key in the 0-9

range while the cursor is under the AM/PM position.

Press [∗] to continue.

06 OFF TIME ?

11:45 PM

The cursor will be positioned on the tens of hours digit of the

OFF. Enter the desired hour.

Press [∗] to move to the minutes field. The minutes are entered

in the same manner.

The AM/PM indication is toggled by hitting any key in the 0-9

range while the cursor is under the AM/PM position.

Press [∗] to continue.

06 DAYS? MTWTFSS

HIT 0-7 x x

To select the days which are to be activated, enter 1-7

(Monday = 1). An "x" will appear under that day, indicating

the output for that day is active. Entering a day's number

again will deactivate that day. Pressing 0 will toggle all days

on/off.

The outputs will only be in effect for the days which have the

letter “x” under them. As the week progresses, the selected

days are reset to the inactive state, unless the permanent

option is selected (next screen prompt).

When completed, press [∗] to continue.

06 Permanent ?

0 = NO,1 = YES 0

Selecting "Permanent" (1) means that this schedule will be in

effect on a continuous basis. An answer of 0 means that this

schedule will be in effect for one week only. The letter "x"

under the day will then be cleared, but all other entries for the

output device will remain programmed.

Press [∗] to accept entry.

The system will quit User Scheduling Mode and return to

normal operating mode.

27-1

SECTION 27

System Communication

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

A Successful Transmission

♦

Reporting Formats

♦

Loading Communication Defaults

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

A Successful Transmission

When a control panel calls the central station receiver, it waits to hear a “handshake”

frequency from the receiver to confirm that the receiver is on-line and ready to receive its

message. Once the panel hears the handshake it is programmed to listen for, it sends its

message. The panel then waits for a “kissoff” frequency from the receiver acknowledging

that the message was received and understood.

Once the handshake frequency is received and understood by the panel, the panel will send

its message. If there is an error in the transmission (the receiver does not receive a “valid”

message), the kissoff frequency will not be given by the central station receiver.

The panel will make a number of attempts to the primary telephone number and a number of

attempts to the secondary telephone number (if programmed) to get a valid message through.

The number of attempts that are made to each number is determined by the programming of

field 3*21. If the panel is not successful after its numerous attempts, the keypad will display

“Comm Failure.”

Reporting Formats

The following chart defines the three sets of (handshake/kissoff) frequencies that the panel

supports and the different formats that can be sent for each.

FORMAT TIME HANDSHAKE TRANSMITS DATA KISSOFF TRANSMIT

Low Speed

3+1

4+1

4+2

1400Hz 1900Hz (10PPS) 1400Hz Under 15 secs.

(Standard report)

Sescoa/Rad

3+1

4+1

4+2

2300Hz 1800Hz (20PPS) 2300Hz Under 10 secs.

(Standard report)

Express

4+2 1400–2300Hz DTMF (10 cps) 1400Hz Under 3 secs.

High Speed 1400–2300Hz DTMF (10 cps) 1400Hz Under 5 secs.

Contact ID 1400–2300Hz DTMF (10 cps) 1400Hz Under 3 secs.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

27-2

ADVISORY: ADEMCO's Contact ID reporting is capable of uniquely reporting all 128 zones

of information, as well as openings and closings for all 128 users, to central stations equipped

with the ADEMCO 685 receiver using software level 4.4 or higher. Must be level 4.7 or

higher to fully support all new VISTA-128FB report codes. 685 software levels below 4.4

cannot support Contact ID reporting. If you need to update your 685 receiver, contact your

distributor.

The following describes each format in greater detail.

3+1 and 4+1 Standard

Formats Comprised of a 3- (or 4-) digit subscriber number and a single-

digit report code (e.g. Alarm, Trouble, Restore, Open, Close,

etc.).

3+1 and 4+1 Expanded

Formats Comprised of a 3- (or 4-) digit subscriber number and a two-

digit report code. The first digit is displayed on the first line,

followed by a second line where the first digit is repeated 3 (or

4) times and followed by the second digit. This is the

“expanded” digit.

4+2 Format Comprised of a 4-digit subscriber number and 2-digit report

code.

ADEMCO Contact ID

Reporting Format Comprised of a 4-digit subscriber number, 1-digit event

qualifier ("new" or "restore"), 3-digit event code, 2-digit

partition number., and 3-digit zone number, user number, or

system status number.

ADEMCO High Speed Comprised of 13 digits as follows: A 4-digit account number +

eight channels of zone information (1-8 or duress plus 9-15) +

one status channel, which identifies the type of events being

reported in the eight zone locations.

Report 3+1/4+1 3+1/4+1 4+2

Standard Expanded Low Spd or

Express

Alarm SSS(S) A SSS(S) A SSSS AZ

AAA(A) Z

Trouble SSS(S) T SSS(S) T SSSS Tt

TTT(T) t

Bypass SSS(S) B SSS(S) B SSSS Bb

BBB(B) b

AC Loss SSS(S) E SSS(S) E SSSS EAC

EEE(E) AC

Low Batt SSS(S) L SSS(S) L SSSS LLB

LLL(L) LB

Open SSS(S) O SSS(S) O SSSS OU

OOO(O) U

Close SSS(S) C SSS(S) C SSSS CU

CCC(C) U

Test SSS(S) G SSS(S) G SSSS Gg

GGG(G)g

Section 27 – System Communications

27-3

Restore SSS(S) R SSS(S) R SSSS RZ

Alarm RRR(R) Z

AC Restore SSS(S) RASSS(S) RASSSSRA Ac

RARARA(RA)Ac

LoBat Res. SSS(S) RLSSS(S) RL SSSS RLLB

RLRLRL(RL)LB

Trouble Res. SSS(S) RTSSS(S) RT SSSS RTt

RTRTRT (RT)t

Bypass Res. SSS(S) RBSSS(S) RBSSSS RBb

RBRBRB (RB)b

Where:

SSS or SSSS = Subscriber ID C = Close Code - 1st Digit

A = Alarm Code-1st digit U = User Number - 1st & 2nd digits

Z = Typically Zone Number* - 2nd digit Gg = Test Code - 1st & 2nd digits

Tt = Trouble Code - 1st & 2nd digits R = Restore Code (Alarm) - 1st & 2nd digits

Bb = Bypass Code - 1st & 2nd digits RTt = Restore Code (Trbl) - 1st & 2nd digits

EAC = AC Loss Code - 1st & 2nd digits RBb = Restore Code (Byps) - 1st & 2nd digits

LLB = Low Battery Code - 1st & 2nd digits RAAC = Restore Code (AC) - 1st & 2nd digits

O = Open Code - 1st Digit RLLB = Restore Code (Bat) - 1st & 2nd digits

*Zone numbers for: [✴] + [#], or [B] = 999; [3] + [#], or [C] = 996;

[1] + [✴], or [A] = 995; Duress = 992

ADEMCO Contact ID Reporting takes the following format:

CCCC QEEE GG ZZZ

where: CCCC = Customer (subscriber) ID

Q = Event qualifier, where:

E = new event, and R = restore

EEE = Event code (3 hexadecimal digits)

GG = Partition number (system messages show “00”)

ZZZ = Zone/contact ID number reporting the alarm, or user number

for Open/Close reports. System status messages (AC Loss,

Walk-Test, etc.) contain zeroes in the ZZZ location.

ADEMCO High Speed Reporting events by channel:

Channels 1 through 8 could have one of the following conditions:

1 = NEW EVENT

2 = OPENING (Status Channel Always = 2)*

3 = RESTORE

4 = CLOSING (Status Channel Always = 4)*

5 = NORMAL, NO EVENT TO REPORT

6 = PREVIOUSLY REPORTED, NOT YET RESTORED

* NOTE: Channel 1 will contain the user ID 1-9, A-F if Open/Close reporting is enabled.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

27-4

The status channel might have one of the following conditions:

1 = DURESS (For Duress Plus Channels 9-15 Only)

2 = OPENING

3 = BYPASS (For Channels 1-8 Only)

4 = CLOSING

5 = SUPERVISORY/TROUBLE (For Channels 1-8 Only)

6 = SYSTEM STATUS:

• AC LOSS in Channel 1

• LOW BATTERY in Channel 2

• TIME SET in Channel 3

• LOG CLEAR in Channel 3

• LOG 50% FULL in Channel 3

• LOG 90% FULL in Channel 3

• LOG OVERFLOW in Channel 3

• POWER ON RESET in Channel 4

• WALK-TEST START, END in Channel 8

7 = NORMAL ALARM STATUS (Channels 1-8 Only)

9 = TEST REPORT

Explanation of Channels 9-15:

If there is a 1 in the status channel, and:

1 in the 1st location = Duress

1 in Channels 9-15 = Zone alarm on those channels

3 in Channels 9-15 = Restore on those channels

6 in Channels 9-15 = Previously reported alarm–not restored

A typical high-speed report may look like this:

1234 5115 5555 7 (Acct #1234 with alarms on channels 2 and 3)

1234 5555 1555 1 (Acct #1234 with alarm on channel 12)

LIMITATIONS

1. When using ADEMCO High-Speed, remember there are only 15 channels available, plus

a duress channel. If more than 15 zones are being used, they will have to share channels.

2. With ADEMCO High-Speed reporting, channels 9-15 cannot report troubles or bypasses.

Use these channels for zones that will not report these conditions.

3. Only user numbers 1-15 can be uniquely reported with Open/Close reports in ADEMCO

High-Speed.

Loading Communication Defaults

To help expedite the installation, the system provides 4 different communication defaults

(Low Speed, ADEMCO Express, ADEMCO High-Speed and ADEMCO's Contact ID).

You may load communications defaults at any time. However, it is recommended that the

panel be defaulted first (*97) only if no other programming has been done. If other

programming has already been done, there is no need to default the panel.

Section 27 – System Communications

27-5

To load communication defaults, do the following:

Enter Program Mode [Installer Code] + 8 0 0 0. Once the Programming Mode is entered,

first press *94 and then enter one of the following field numbers:

TABLE OF DEFAULT PROGRAMMING COMMANDS

PRESS TO LOAD THIS DEFAULT PROGRAM SET

*80 Low Speed communication defaults

*81 ADEMCO 4 + 2 Express communication defaults

*82 ADEMCO High Speed communication defaults

*83 Contact ID communication defaults

Loading communication defaults results in the following:

Low Speed

(*94*80)

• Selects low speed, standard format, with no checksum, for both phone numbers.

• Assigns the following report codes:

03 for zones 003-047, 056-061, 064-128

01 for zones 001, 002, and 048-055 (fire zones)

02 for zones 062,063 (panic transmitters), & 995, 996, 999 (keypad panics)

09 for all alarm restores

• Enables all zone type restores.

• For "expanded" reporting, enable fields *52 and *53.

ADEMCO

Express

(*94*81)

• Selects ADEMCO express reporting format, with checksum, for both phone numbers.

• Report codes for zones 001-128, RF receiver, and keypad panics are sent as their

respective zone ID numbers. Duress is sent as "DD." Alarm restore is "E" + 2nd digit.

• Enables all zone type restores.

ADEMCO

High-

Speed

(*94*82)

• Selects ADEMCO High-Speed format with no checksum, for both phone numbers.

• Zone reporting is assigned to channels as described later in this section.

• Enables all zone type restores.

• Enables duress to be sent.

ADEMCO's

Contact

(*94*83)

• Selects Contact ID format for both phone numbers.

• Reporting is enabled for all zones.

• Enables all zone type restores.

• Refer to the Table of Contact ID Event Codes to follow.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

27-6

TABLE OF CONTACT ID EVENT CODES

Code Definition

110 Fire Alarm

111 Smoke Alarm (Fire w/Verification)

113 Water Flow Alarm

121 Duress

122 Silent Panic

123 Audible Panic

124 Duress Access Grant

125 Duress Egress Grant

131 Perimeter Burglary

132 Interior Burglary

133 24-Hour Burglary

134 Entry/Exit Burglary

135 Day/Night Burglary

140 ACS Zone Alarm

142 Polling Loop Short Alarm

150 24-Hour Auxiliary

200 Fire Supervisory

301 AC Loss

302 Low System Battery

305 System Reset

306 Program Tamper

308 System Shutdown

309 Battery Test Fail

310 Ground Fault

313 System Engineer Reset

320 ACS Relay Supervision

321 Bell 1 Trouble

322 Bell 2 Trouble

332 Poll Loop Short-Trouble

333 Expansion Module Failure

338 ACS Module Low Battery

339 ACS Module Reset

342 ACS Module AC Loss

343 ACS Module Self-Test Fail

351 Main Dialer Trouble

352 Backup Dialer Trouble

354 ACS RS232 Fail

373 Fire Loop Trouble

374 Exit Error by Zone

380 Trouble (global)

381 Loss of Supervision (RF)

382 Loss of RPM Supervision

383 RPM Sensor Tamper

384 RF Transmitter Low Battery

385 High Sensitivity Maintenance Signal

386 Low Sensitivity Maintenance Signal

389 Detector Self-Test Failed

401 O/C by User

403 Power-Up Armed/Auto-Arm

Code Definition

406 Cancel by User

407 Remote Arm/Disarm (Download)

408 Quick Arm

409 Keyswitch O/C

411 Call-back Requested

421 Access Denied

422 Access Granted

423 Door Force Open

424 Egress Denied

425 Egress Granted

426 Door Prop Open

427 Access Point DSM Trouble

428 Access Point RTE Trouble

429 ACS Program Entry

430 ACS Program Exit

431 ACS Threat Change

432 Access Point Relay/Trigger Fail

433 Access Point DSM Shunt/Unshunt

434 Access Point RTE Shunt

441 Armed STAY

451 Early Open/Close

452 Late Open/Close

453 Fail to Open

454 Fail to Close

455 Auto-arm Fail

457 Exit Error by User

459 Recent Close

501 ACS Reader Disable

520 ACS Relay Disable

521 Bell 1 Bypass

522 Bell 2 Bypass

524 Auxiliary Relay Bypass

551 Main/Backup Dialer Bypass

570 Bypass

576 ACS Zone Shunt

577 ACS Point Bypass

602 Communicator Test

604 Fire Test

606 Listen-In to Follow

607 Burglary Walk-Test

608 Off-Normal

611 Fire Walk-Test – Point Tested

612 Fire Walk-Test – Point Not Tested

621 Event Log Reset

622 Event Log 50% Full

623 Event Log 90% Full

624 Event Log Overflow

625 Time/Date Reset

631 Exception Schedule Change

632 Access Schedule Change

Section 27 – System Communications

27-7

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for LOW SPEED FORMAT (*94*80)

*45 Primary Format 0 ADEMCO Low Speed

*46 Low Speed Format (Prim) 0 ADEMCO Low Speed

*47 Secondary Format 0 ADEMCO Low Speed

*48 Low Speed Format (Sec.) 0 ADEMCO Low Speed

*49 Checksum Verification 0 0

No checksum Primary Secondary

*50 Sescoa/Radionics Selection. 0 Radionics

*51 Dual Reporting 0 no

*52 Standard/Expanded Reporting For Primary

0 0 0 0 0 0 standard

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

*53 Standard/Expanded Reporting For Secondary

0 0 0 0 0 0 standard

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for ADEMCO EXPRESS FORMAT (*94*81)

*45 Primary Format 3 ADEMCO Express

*46 Low Speed Format (Prim) 0 ADEMCO Express

*47 Secondary Format 3 ADEMCO Express

*48 Low Speed Format (Sec.) 0 ADEMCO Express

*49 Checksum Verification 0 0

No checksum Primary Secondary

*50 Sescoa/Radionics Selection. 0 Radionics

*51 Dual Reporting 0 no

*52 Standard/Expanded Reporting For Primary

0 0 0 0 0 0 standard

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

*53 Standard/Expanded Reporting For Secondary

0 0 0 0 0 0 standard

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for ADEMCO HIGH-SPEED FORMAT (*94*82)

*45 Primary Format 2 ADEMCO High-Speed

*46 Low Speed Format (Prim) 0 ADEMCO High-Speed

*47 Secondary Format 2 ADEMCO High-Speed

*48 Low Speed Format (Sec.) 0 ADEMCO High-Speed

*49 Checksum Verification 0 0

No checksum Primary Secondary

*50 Sescoa/Radionics Selection. 1 Radionics

*51 Dual Reporting 0 no

*52 Standard/Expanded Reporting For Primary

0 0 0 0 0 0 standard

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

*53 Standard/Expanded Reporting For Secondary

0 0 0 0 0 0 standard

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for ADEMCO's CONTACT ID FORMAT (*94*83)

*45 Primary Format 1 ADEMCO Contact ID

*46 Low Speed Format (Prim) 0 ADEMCO Contact ID

*47 Secondary Format 1 ADEMCO Contact ID

*48 Low Speed Format (Sec.) 0 ADEMCO Contact ID

*49 Checksum Verification 0 0

No checksum Primary Secondary

*50 Sescoa/Radionics Selection. 0 Radionics

*51 Dual Reporting 0 no

*52 Standard/Expanded Reporting For Primary

0 0 0 0 0 0 standard

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

*53 Standard/Expanded Reporting For Secondary

0 0 0 0 0 0 standard

Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

27-8

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS FOR ZONES

ZONE # LOW SPEED EXPRESS HIGH SPEED CONTACT ID

1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd

001 01 00 10 01 01 00 01 00

002 01 00 10 02 01 00 02 00

003 03 00 10 03 02 00 03 00

004 03 00 10 04 02 00 04 00

005 03 00 10 05 02 00 05 00

006 03 00 10 06 02 00 06 00

007 03 00 10 07 02 00 07 00

008 03 00 10 08 02 00 08 00

009 03 00 10 09 03 00 09 00

010 03 00 01 10 03 00 10 00

011 03 00 01 01 03 00 11 00

012 03 00 01 02 03 00 12 00

013 03 00 01 03 03 00 13 00

014 03 00 01 04 03 00 14 00

015 03 00 01 05 03 00 15 00

016 03 00 01 06 03 00 01 00

017 03 00 01 07 04 00 02 00

018 03 00 01 08 04 00 03 00

019 03 00 01 09 04 00 04 00

020 03 00 02 10 04 00 05 00

021 03 00 02 01 04 00 06 00

022 03 00 02 02 04 00 07 00

023 03 00 02 03 04 00 08 00

024 03 00 02 04 04 00 09 00

025 03 00 02 05 04 00 10 00

026 03 00 02 06 04 00 11 00

027 03 00 02 07 04 00 12 00

028 03 00 02 08 04 00 13 00

029 03 00 02 09 04 00 14 00

030 03 00 03 10 04 00 15 00

031 03 00 03 01 04 00 01 00

032 03 00 03 02 05 00 02 00

033 03 00 03 03 05 00 03 00

034 03 00 03 04 05 00 04 00

035 03 00 03 05 05 00 05 00

036 03 00 03 06 05 00 06 00

037 03 00 03 07 05 00 07 00

038 03 00 03 08 05 00 08 00

039 03 00 03 09 05 00 09 00

040 03 00 04 10 05 00 10 00

041 03 00 04 01 05 00 11 00

042 03 00 04 02 05 00 12 00

043 03 00 04 03 05 00 13 00

044 03 00 04 04 05 00 14 00

045 03 00 04 05 05 00 15 00

046 03 00 04 06 05 00 01 00

047 03 00 04 07 05 00 02 00

048 01 00 04 08 01 00 03 00

049 01 00 04 09 01 00 04 00

050 01 00 05 10 01 00 05 00

Section 27 – System Communications

27-9

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS FOR ZONES (cont’d)

ZONE # LOW SPEED EXPRESS HIGH SPEED CONTACT ID

1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2

051 01 00 05 01 01 00 06 00

052 01 00 05 02 01 00 07 00

053 01 00 05 03 01 00 08 00

054 01 00 05 04 01 00 09 00

055 01 00 05 05 01 00 10 00

056 03 00 05 06 06 00 11 00

057 03 00 05 07 06 00 12 00

058 03 00 05 08 06 00 13 00

059 03 00 05 09 06 00 14 00

060 03 00 06 10 06 00 15 00

061 03 00 06 01 06 00 01 00

062 02 00 06 02 09 00 02 00

063 02 00 06 03 09 00 03 00

064 03 00 06 04 06 00 04 00

065 03 00 06 05 14 00 05 00

066 03 00 06 06 14 00 06 00

067 03 00 06 07 14 00 07 00

068 03 00 06 08 14 00 08 00

069 03 00 06 09 14 00 09 00

070 03 00 07 10 14 00 10 00

071 03 00 07 01 14 00 11 00

072 03 00 07 02 14 00 12 00

073 03 00 07 03 15 00 13 00

074 03 00 07 04 15 00 14 00

075 03 00 07 05 15 00 15 00

076 03 00 07 06 15 00 01 00

077 03 00 07 07 15 00 02 00

078 03 00 07 08 15 00 03 00

079 03 00 07 09 15 00 04 00

080 03 00 08 10 15 00 05 00

081 03 00 08 01 13 00 06 00

082 03 00 08 02 13 00 07 00

083 03 00 08 03 13 00 08 00

084 03 00 08 04 13 00 09 00

085 03 00 08 05 13 00 10 00

086 03 00 08 06 13 00 11 00

087 03 00 08 07 13 00 12 00

088 03 00 08 08 13 00 13 00

089 03 00 08 09 13 00 14 00

090 03 00 09 03 13 00 15 00

091 03 00 09 01 13 00 01 00

092 03 00 09 02 13 00 02 00

093 03 00 09 03 13 00 03 00

094 03 00 09 04 13 00 04 00

095 03 00 09 05 13 00 05 00

096 03 00 09 06 13 00 06 00

097 03 00 09 07 13 00 07 00

098 03 00 09 08 13 00 08 00

099 03 00 09 09 13 00 09 00

100 03 00 10 10 13 00 10 00

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

27-10

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS FOR ZONES (cont’d)

ZONE # LOW SPEED EXPRESS HIGH SPEED CONTACT ID

1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2

101 03 00 10 01 13 00 11 00

102 03 00 10 02 13 00 12 00

103 03 00 10 03 13 00 13 00

104 03 00 10 04 13 00 14 00

105 03 00 10 05 13 00 15 00

106 03 00 10 06 13 00 01 00

107 03 00 10 07 13 00 02 00

108 03 00 10 08 13 00 03 00

109 03 00 10 09 13 00 04 00

110 03 00 11 10 13 00 05 00

111 03 00 11 01 13 00 06 00

112 03 00 11 12 13 00 07 00

113 03 00 11 03 13 00 08 00

114 03 00 11 04 13 00 09 00

115 03 00 11 05 13 00 10 00

116 03 00 11 06 13 00 11 00

117 03 00 11 07 13 00 12 00

118 03 00 11 08 13 00 13 00

119 03 00 11 09 13 00 14 00

120 03 00 12 10 13 00 15 00

121 03 00 12 01 13 00 01 00

122 03 00 12 02 13 00 02 00

123 03 00 12 03 13 00 03 00

124 03 00 12 04 13 00 04 00

125 03 00 12 05 13 00 05 00

126 03 00 12 06 13 00 06 00

127 03 00 12 17 13 00 07 00

128 03 00 12 08 13 00 08 00

601 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

602 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

603 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

604 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

605 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

606 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

607 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

608 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

609 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

610 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

611 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

612 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

613 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

614 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

615 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

616 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

800 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

801 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

802 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

803 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

804 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

805 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Section 27 – System Communications

27-11

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS FOR ZONES (cont’d)

ZONE # LOW SPEED EXPRESS HIGH SPEED CONTACT ID

1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2

806 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

807 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

808 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

809 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

810 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

811 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

812 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

813 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

814 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

815 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

816 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

817 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

818 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

819 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

820 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

821 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

822 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

823 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

824 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

825 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

826 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

827 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

828 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

829 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

830 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

831 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

970 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

971 03 00 07 01 07 00 02 00

972 03 00 07 02 07 00 03 00

973 03 00 07 03 07 00 04 00

974 03 00 07 04 07 00 05 00

975 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

988 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

990 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

995 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

996 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

997 07 00 09 07 07 00 06 00

999 02 00 09 09 12 00 60 00

ALARM RST.

09 00 14 00 01 00 01 00

TROUBLE0500150001000100

TRBLE. RST0900140001000100

BYPASS 0000000000000000

BYP. RST. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

DURESS 0200131301001100

To program report codes, see Report Code Programming in the #93 Menu

Mode section.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

27-12

28-1

SECTION 28

Downloading Primer

(Remote downloading is not a UL Listed feature)

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

General Information

♦

Getting On-Line with a Control Panel

♦

On-Line Control Functions

♦

Access Security

♦

Connecting a 4100SM Module for Direct-Wire Downloading

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

General Information

Downloading allows the operator to remotely access, program, and control the security

system over normal telephone lines. Anything that can be done directly from the keypad can

be done remotely, using ADEMCO's VLINK® or COMPASS downloading software. To

communicate with the control panel, the following is required:

Using V-LINK

1. An IBM PC compatible 286, 386, or 486 computer with at least 1MB RAM, a hard disk

with 12MB available disk space, running MS DOS 3.1 or higher operating system.

2. One of the following modems:

• Hayes Smartmodem 1200 (external: level 1.2 or higher; internal: level 1.1 or higher)

• Hayes Optima 24 + Fax 96 external

Other brands are not compatible, even if claimed to be 100% compatible.

3. V-LINK® DOWNLOADING software may be purchased from ADEMCO. This software

is available on 3-1/2" diskettes, and includes a complete User's Manual. It may also be

downloaded. from the ADEMCO web page. The web address is http://www.ademco.com.

Using Compass

1. An IBM PC compatible 486 33MHz PC or better with 30 MB of available hard disk space

and at least 8MB of RAM (12MB is preferred). Windows 3.X, Windows 95, or Windows

NT.

2. One of the following modems:

• Hayes Smartmodem 1200 (external: level 1.2 or higher; internal: level 1.1 or higher)

• Hayes Optima 24 + Fax 96 external

• Hayes Optima 336

• BizComp Intellimodem 1200 w/volume

• BizComp Intellimodem 2400

Other brands are not compatible, even if claimed to be 100% compatible.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

28-2

3. COMPASS DOWNLOADING software may be purchased from ADEMCO. This software

is available on 3-1/2" diskettes or CD ROM, and includes a complete User's Manual. It

may also be downloaded from the ADEMCO web page. The web address is

http://www.ademco.com.

Internal modems must have a 4-position DIP switch. Modems with a 6-position DIP switch will not

work.

Alternatively, you may use a 4100SM interface module to "direct-wire" the control panel to

your computer at the site.

Getting On-Line with a Control Panel

At the protected premises, the Control panel must be connected to the existing telephone line

(refer to the System Communication section). No programming of the panel is required

before downloading to an initial installation.

To download, do the following:

1. Enter the [Installer Code] + [#] + [5]. The panel temporarily enables a ring count of 5

and sets the Download Callback option to "1" (callback not required).

2. Call the panel using the downloader software set to "First Communication" Mode.

3. The downloader will establish a session with no callback. The panel information can then

be downloaded.

4. In order to remotely access, control, or program the alarm panel, a "link" must be

established between the computer and the control panel, as follows:

a. The computer calls up the control panel. (The phone number for each customer is

entered into the customer's account file on the computer.)

b. The control panel "answers" at the pre-programmed ring count and executes a

handshake with the computer.

c. The computer sends a request for callback to the control, unless callback is not

required.

d. The panel acknowledges the request and hangs up. During the next few seconds,

the control will process the request, making sure certain encrypted information

received from the computer matches its own memory.

e. Upon a successful match, the control panel will seize the phone line and call the

computer back, unless callback is not required. (The phone number to which the

computer’s modem is connected must be programmed into the control field ∗35.)

f. The computer answers, usually by the second ring, and executes a handshake

with the panel.

g. The panel then sends other default information to the computer. If this

information matches the computer's information, a successful link is established.

This is known as being “On-line.”

1. Alarms and Trouble responses and reports are disabled during actual uploading or

downloading sessions. If you are on-line, but not actively uploading or downloading, all

alarms will report immediately. All other reports will be delayed until you complete the

session.

2. The keypads remain active when on-line with a control, but are inactive during actual

uploading or downloading sessions.

Section 28 - Downloading Primer

28-3

On-Line Control Functions

The following functions can be performed while on-line with a control panel:

• Arm the system in the AWAY Mode; disarm the system

• Bypass a zone

• Force the system to accept a new program download

• Shut down communication (dialer) functions (non-payment of monitoring fees in an

owned system)

• Shut down all security system functions (non-payment for a leased system)

• Inhibit local keypad programming (prevents takeover of your accounts)

• Leave a message for customer

• Command the system to upload a copy of its resident program to the office

• Read: arming status, AC power status, list of faulted zones, list of bypassed zones, 224

event log, list of zones currently in alarm, list of zones currently in trouble, and ECP

equipment list

• Set the real-time clock

Access Security

Accessing the control from a remote location is protected against compromise by the use of 4

levels of protection:

1. Security code handshake: The subscriber's account number as well as an 8-digit ID

number (known only to the office) must be matched between the control and computer.

2. Hang-up and Call-back: The control panel will "hang up" and call the computer back at

the pre-programmed number only if the security codes match.

3. Data encryption: All data that is exchanged between the computer and control is

encrypted to reduce the possibility of anyone "tapping" the line and corrupting data.

4. Operator access levels: Operators may be assigned various levels of access to the

downloader, each having its own log-on code. The access levels allow the operators

read/write capabilities of the customers’ account information. For a detailed explanation

of the access levels, see the downloading software User Manual.

NOTES:

• Each time the control panel is accessed successfully, a Callback Requested report is sent

to the central station, if programmed.

• When downloading, the keypad displays "MODEM COMM."

• After each download or a save, an automatic time stamp is done, indicating the date and

time of the last download (or save) and the operator ID number.

• A complete hard copy of each individual account can be obtained by connecting a printer

to the computer. Refer to your computer Owner's Manual or contact your dealer for

printer recommendations.

Connecting a 4100SM Module for Direct Wire Downloading

The VISTA-128FB can be downloaded without using a modem or telephone line, but by using

a 4100SM Serial Module and V-LINK or Compass Downloading Software. The direct-wire

downloading connection is to be temporary, and is not part of the permanent installation.

Direct-wire downloading is meant as a tool for the installer during the installation process.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

28-4

The connections between the control and the 4100SM are different than those shown in the

4100SM Installation Instructions. See the diagram below for correct connections. In addition,

the green wire is referred to in step 2 of the “IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY” section of the 4100SM

Instructions, use the violet wire instead.

Connector J8 on the main PC board (see the Summary of Connections diagram on the inside

back cover of this manual), is intended to be interfaced to either a local serial printer (see

Event Log printer Connections in the Event Log Options section) or a computer. Make

connections to a computer as shown below. Note that the violet wire connection for a

computer differs from that used when connecting a serial printer.

Remove the alpha numeric pager interface if it is installed while performing the direct-wire

download. It may be reconnected once the direct-wire download is completed

123456789

INPUT 1

GROUND

OUT 1

OUT 4

OUT 7

OUT 3

OUT 6

OUT 2

OUT 5

J2 CONNECTOR

(VIOLET)

(GRAY)

(YELLOW)

(WHITE)

(RED)

(GREEN)

(BROWN)

BLUE

BLACK

4142TR CABLE

+ PWR

– (GND)

RXD

not used

TXD

not used

BLUERED WHITE

10 FT.

CABLE

SUPPLIED

WITH 4100SM

DOWNLOADING

(TO TERM 11)

–

(TO TERM 12)

▲▲

AUX PWR 1

OUTPUT

NOTE: ENTER THE INSTALLER

CODE + [#] + [5] TO INITIATE

DOWNLOADING BEFORE MAKING

THE ABOVE CONNECTIONS TO

AVOID TRIGGERING A FAULT ON

INPUT 1.

4100SM

Figure 26-1. Direct Wire Downloading Connections

29-1

SECTION 29

Setting the Real-Time Clock

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

General Information

♦

Setting the Time and Date

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

General Information

This system provides a real-time clock, which must be set in order for the system's event log

to keep track of events by time and date. It must also be set in order to execute scheduling

programs (time-driven events).

Use a 6139 alpha keypad to set the real-time clock, or set the clock via the downloader software.

Only users with Installer or Master authority level can set the real-time clock.

Setting the Time and Date

1. Enter installer or Master Code + # 63. Typical display shows:

TIME/DATE –– THU

12:01 AM 01/01/90

2. The day of the week is automatically calculated based on the date entered. Time and

date entries are made by simply entering the appropriate hour, minute, month, day and

year.

• Press [∗] to accept the entered value. The cursor then moves to the right.

• Press [#] to move the cursor to the left of the display, to the previous position.

• Enter the correct hour. Then press [∗] to move to the “minutes” field and make the

correct entry.

• Press [∗] again, then press any key 0-9 to set AM/PM. Press any key again to change

AM to PM, or PM to AM.

• Press [∗] to move cursor to the “month” field position and enter the correct month

using a 2-digit entry.

• Press [∗] and enter the correct date.

• Press [∗] and enter the correct year.

3. Exit Clock Mode by pressing [∗] after the cursor is in the year position.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

29-2

30-1

SECTION 30

User Access Codes

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

General Information

♦

User Codes & Levels of Authority

♦

To Add a Master, Manager, or Operator Code

♦

To Change a Master, Manager, or Operator Code

♦

To Add an RF Key to an Existing User

♦

To Delete a Master, Manager, or Operator Code

♦

To Exit the User Edit Mode

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

General Information

This system allows a total of 150 security access codes to be allocated, each identified by a

user ID number. Regardless of the number of partitions each code has access to, it

occupies only one user slot in the system. If a particular code is not used in all

partitions, that user ID number cannot be used again.

The Quick Arm feature can also be programmed (partition-specific program field *29), which

allows the [#] key to be pressed instead of entering the security code when arming the

system. The security code must always be entered to disarm the system.

A user code other than the installer code must be programmed for the Quick Arm feature to

function.

User Codes & Levels of Authority

Each user of the system can be assigned a level of authority, which tells the system what

system functions that user is authorized to do. A user can have different levels of authority

within different partitions. In general, users can perform most system functions, including

Test and Chime Modes, but certain authority levels restrict disarming, bypassing or the

assigning of other user codes. These restrictions are noted in the descriptions below.

Use the "View Capabilities" keypad function to view the partitions and authority levels for

which a particular user is authorized. These levels are described in the table below in order

from highest to lowest ranking.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

30-2

Auth Title

0 Installer

1Master

2 Manager

3 Operator level A

4 Operator level B

5 Operator level C

6Duress

Level 0: Installer (User 1) Codes

• Programmed in field *00 (default = 5-1-4-0). Installer Open/Close reporting is selected in

field *39.

• Can perform all system functions (arm, disarm, bypass, etc.), but cannot disarm if

armed by another code (or by Quick Arm).

• Can add, delete, or change codes of all other authority levels, and can select Open/Close

reports for any user.

• Is the only code that can be used to enter program mode. The Installer Code can be

prevented from re-entering the Program Mode by exiting using ∗98. The only way to

access Programming Mode if this done is by powering down the system, powering up

again, and then pressing both the [∗] and [#] keys at the same time within 30 seconds of

power up.)

• Must program at least one Master Code during initial installation. Master Codes are

codes intended for use by the primary user(s) of the system.

Level 1: Master Codes

• Can perform all normal system functions.

• Can be used to assign up to 141 lower-level codes, which can be used by other users of the

system.

• Cannot assign anybody a level of 0 or 1.

• May change his own code.

• Can add, delete, or change Manager or Operator Codes. Each user's code can be

individually eliminated or changed at any time.

• Open/Close reporting of added users are is the same as that of the Master who is adding

the new user.

Level 2: Manager Codes

• Can perform all system functions (arm, disarm, bypass, etc.) programmed by Master.

• May add, delete or change other users of the system below this level (Manager cannot

assign anybody a level of 0, 1, or 2).

• May change his own code.

• Open/Close reporting of added users are is the same as that of the Manager who is

adding the new user.

Levels 3-5: Operator Codes

• Can arm and disarm the system to the authority assigned, but cannot add or modify any

user code.

• May operate a partition with one of the three Operator authority levels A through C in

the table below.

Section 30 - User Access Codes

30-3

Level Title Functions Permitted

3 Operator A Arm, Disarm, Bypass

4 Operator B Arm, Disarm

5 Operator C Arm, Disarm only if armed with same code

• Operator C (sometimes known as the Babysitter Code) cannot disarm the system unless

the system was armed with that code. This code is usually assigned to persons who may

have the need to arm and disarm the system at specific times only (e.g., a babysitter

needs to control the system only when babysitting).

Level 6: Duress Codes

• Sends a silent alarm to a central monitoring station if the user is being forced to disarm

(or arm) the system under threat (only useful if the system is connected to a central

station).

• When the system's Auxiliary Voltage Triggers are connected to another communication's

media (Derived Channel/Long Range Radio), note that duress is signaled on the same

trigger that signals silent panic (whereas duress has its own unique report when

digitally communicated).

• Assigned on a partition-by-partition basis, and can be any code or codes desired.

• Will disarm (or arm) the system, but will also send a silent alarm to the central station

(if service is connected). There will be no indication at the keypad that an alarm was

sent.

Duress Reporting Note: A non-zero report code for zone 992 (duress) must be programmed, and

partition-specific field *85 duress location enabled, to enable Duress reporting.

• The Duress report-triggering logic activates on the 5th key depression (such as OFF), not

the 4th key depression (last digit of code). Duress reports will not be triggered if the 5th

key is a [*], such as when performing a GOTO or viewing the capabilities of a user.

General Rules on Authority Levels and Changes

The following rules apply to users when making modifications within the system based on

the user code authority levels:

• Master Codes and all lower-level codes can be used interchangeably when performing

system functions within a partition (a system armed with a user's temporary code can be

disarmed with the Master Code or another user's temporary code), except the Operator

Level C Code described above.

• A user may not delete or change the user code of the SAME or HIGHER authority than

that which he is assigned.

• A user (levels 0, 1 & 2 only) may only ADD users to a LOWER authority level.

• A user may assign other users access to only those partitions to which he himself has

access.

• A user code can only be DELETED or CHANGED from within the partition it was

created in.

• User numbers must be entered in 3 digits. Single-digit user numbers must, therefore,

always be preceded by a "00" (e.g., 003, 004, 005, etc.). Make sure the end user

understands this requirement. Temporary codes are entered as 4-digit numbers.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

30-4

Open/Close Reporting Note: When adding a user, the system will only prompt for

Open/Close reporting capability if the user is being added by the Installer. When a Master or

Manager adds a new user, the new user's Open/Close reporting enable will be the same as

that of the Master or Manager who is adding the user. If Open/Close reports are required to

be selectable by the Master or Manager, the Installer should assign two Master or Manager

user codes: one with Open/Close reporting enabled, and one without.

Note that Open/Close reporting of Quick Arm is enabled if User 002 is enabled for

Open/Close reporting, and that Quick Arm reports as User 000. In order for Quick Arm

reports to be sent for all partitions, User #002 must have authority and Open/Close must be

enabled for all partitions. If a code with access to all partitions is not desired, it is suggested

that user #002 be assigned authority level 5 in all partitions, and that the code be kept

secret. Authority level 5 cannot disarm the system unless armed by that user.

ADEMCO Contact ID format is capable of reporting Users 001-150 uniquely. If any other report

format is used, only user numbers 001 - 015 can uniquely report to the central station. Users 016 -

150 will report as User 015.

Multiple Partition Access Examples

Each user is programmed for a primary (home) partition. A user can also be given access to

operate one or more additional partitions. Within each partition, each user may be

programmed to have different levels of authority. For example, User #3, the VP of

Engineering, could be assigned to work within the Engineering Department (Partition 1) of

ABC Manufacturing. Since he needs the full capabilities in his area, he is assigned as a

MASTER with Level 1 authority. This means he may arm, disarm, bypass, add or modify

users in Partition 1.

He must also be able to gain access to the manufacturing area (Partition 2) on an emergency

basis. You can set this up easily with the partitioned system by requesting that he also be

assigned to Partition 2, with a level of authority set lower, such as Level 4 (OPERATOR

Level B), which allows him to arm and disarm, but nothing else. The control will

automatically assign him the same user number within Partition 2, and does not require

reprogramming of his already-existing 4-digit security code.

EXAMPLE OF MULTIPLE PARTITION ACCESS

Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Part 5 Part 6 Part 7 Part 8

User 3 User 3

Level 1 Level 4

Master Oper B

In the above example, User 3 has MASTER authority in Partition 1 and OPERATOR B

authority in Partition 2. His user number is the same for both partitions. Note that if a user

number is already being used in a partition, the system will automatically assign a new user

an unused number. Also notice that no access is allowed for this user into Partitions 3 - 8.

Attempts to access these partitions would be denied automatically.

To ADD a Master, Manager, or Operator Code

During user code entry, normal key depressions at other keypads in a partition will be ignored.

However, panic key depression will cause an alarm and terminate user entry.

Section 30 - User Access Codes

30-5

Enter [Installer Code]†+ 8 + [new user # (002-150)] + [new user's code]

†Or Master or Manager Code, but must be code with higher level of authority than the code

being changed (i.e., Master Code can add a Manager or Operator-level Code, but cannot add

another Master Code; a Manager Code can add an Operator-level Code, but cannot add a

Master or another Manager Code).

Keypad will prompt for the authority level for this user.

User Number = 003

Enter Auth. Level

Enter the level number as follows:

1 = Master (arm, disarm, bypass, add or modify lower-level

users)

2 = Manager (arm, disarm, bypass, add or modify lower level

users)

3 = Operator Level A (arm, disarm, bypass)

4 = Operator Level B (arm, disarm)

5 = Operator Level C (arm, disarm only if system armed with

this code)

6 = Duress (arm, disarm, trigger silent panic alarm)

Keypad will then prompt for Open/Close reporting option for

this user.

Open/Close Rep.?

0 = NO , 1 = YES

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether or not

arming/disarming by this user will trigger Opening and Closing

reports. This prompt appears only if the Installer Code is used

to add a user.

Access Group?

Enter 0-8

If access schedules have been programmed, this prompt

appears. Enter the user's access group number (1-8) if this user

should have limited access to the system. Enter 0 if no access

group should be assigned.

RF Button ?

0=NO , 1=YES

If a 5800 Series button transmitter has been enabled for

arming/disarming functions, and is not assigned to a user, this

prompt will appear. Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES).

Enter Button ZN #

(001-087)

If “yes” was given as the answer to the RF button question, the

zone number for the button will be requested. Enter any one of

the zone numbers assigned to the button transmitter as AWAY,

STAY or DISARM. The system will then assign all buttons of

the transmitter to this user number.

Multi-Access ?

0 = NO , 1 = YES

Press 0 (NO) if the user is to have access to this partition only.

Press 1 (YES) if the user is to have access to more than one

partition. If NO, the program exits this mode. If YES, the

keypad prompts for the Global Arm option for this user.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

30-6

Global Arm ?

0 = NO , 1 = YES

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether this user will

be allowed to arm more than one partition via Global Arm

prompts (described in the Keypad Functions section) .

The keypad now prompts for the user’s access to the next

partition.

Part. 2 – SHOP ?

0 = NO , 1 = YES

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether this user will

have access to the displayed partition number. If NO, the

keypad displays this prompt for the next partition number in

sequence.

If YES, the keypad prompts for the following:

• User’s authority level in the displayed partition (see

Authority Level prompt above).

• Open/Close option for this user in the displayed partition

(see Open/Close prompt above).

• Global Arm option for this user in the displayed partition.

When all partitions have been displayed, the keypad will scroll

through all partitions to which access has been assigned, and

will display the user number, authority level, open/close and

global arm options that were programmed for each partition to

which the user was granted access. For example:

Part. 1 A0* WHSE

User 003 Auth=3G.

Note that the “G” following the authority level indicates that

the global arm feature is enabled for this user in the displayed

partition, and that the period at the end of the second line

indicates Open/Close reporting is enabled for this user in the

displayed partition. The "✴" indicates the partition from which

the user may be changed or deleted.

To CHANGE a Master, Manager, or Operator Code

Enter [Installer code]* + 8 + [User number (002-150)] + [new user's code]

* Or Master or Manager code, but must be code with higher level of authority than the code

being changed (i. e., Master Code can change a Manager or Operator-level Code, but cannot

change another Master Code; a Manager Code can change an Operator-level Code, but

cannot change a Master or another Manager Code).

User Number = 003

NEW USER?

The system detects that the user number is already assigned,

and will prompt if this is a new user.

Press 0 (NO).

The system will then confirm that the change is allowed based

on authorization level.

To Add an RF Key to an Existing User

To add an RF key to an existing user, or to change a user's global arm option, first delete that

user's code, then re-add the user code as described in the "To ADD a Master, Manager, or

Operator Code" paragraph.

Section 30 - User Access Codes

30-7

To Delete a Master, Manager, or Operator Code

Enter [your code]* + 8 + [User number (002-150)] + [your code again]

* Installer, Master or Manager Code, but must be code with higher level of authority than

the code being deleted (i.e. Master Code can delete a Manager or Operator-level Code, but

cannot delete another Master Code; a Manager Code can delete an Operator-level Code, but

cannot delete a Master or another Manager Code).

OK TO DELETE 003?

0=NO 1=YES

The system will prompt to confirm that you want to delete this

user. Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES).

If “yes”, that user's code will be removed from all partitions to

which it was assigned, and all authorization levels and other

information about that user will be deleted. Note that a user

can only be deleted by a user with a higher authority level. A

user cannot delete himself.

A user code can only be deleted from the partition through which it was entered. If trying to delete

from another partition, the message "User [XXX] Not Deleted" will be displayed.

To EXIT the User Edit Mode

Press either [✴] or [#], or don't press any key for 10 seconds.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

30-8

31-1

SECTION 31

Keypad Functions

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

General Information

♦

Arming Functions

♦

Global Arming

♦

Access Control

♦

Delaying Closing Time

♦

Partition "Go To" Command

♦

Viewing Capabilities of a User

♦

Viewing Zone Descriptors

♦

Viewing Downloaded Messages

♦

Using the Built-in User's Guide

♦

Panic Keys

♦

Speed Key [D] (Macros)

♦

Manual Relay Activation Mode (#70 Mode)

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

General Information

The keypad allows the user to arm and disarm the system, and perform other system

functions, such as bypassing zones, viewing messages from the central station, and

displaying zone descriptors. Zone and system conditions (alarm, trouble, bypass) are shown

in the display window.

When an alarm occurs, keypad sounding and external sounding will occur, and the zone(s) in

alarm will be displayed on the keypad. Pressing any key will silence the keypad sounder for

10 seconds. Disarming the system will silence both keypad and external sounders. When the

system is disarmed, the system’s memory of alarm causes any zones that were in an alarm

condition during the armed period to be displayed. To clear this display, simply repeat the

disarm sequence (enter the security code and press the OFF key).

The keypads also feature chime annunciation, and 3 panic keys (for silent, audible, fire or

personal emergency alarms) which can notify the central station of an alarm condition, if

that service is connected.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

31-2

Arming Functions

The following is a brief list of system commands. For detailed information concerning system

functions, refer to the User's Manual.

Display Faulted

Zones Before arming, the system must be in the READY condition (all

zones must be intact). If the "NOT READY" message appears, press

the READY * key to display faulted zones.

Arming Away Enter code + 2 (AWAY)

Arming Stay Enter code + 3 (STAY) (all zones designated as zone types 4 and 10

will be automatically bypassed).

Arming Instant Enter code + 7 (INSTANT) (same as STAY without entry delay).

Arming

Maximum Enter code + 4 (MAXIMUM) (same as AWAY without entry delay).

Disarming Enter code + 1 (OFF).

Bypassing Zones Enter code + 6 (BYPASS) + 3-digit zone number. To automatically

bypass all faulted zones, use "Quick Bypass" method: Enter code +

BYPASS + #.

Chime Mode Enter code + 9 (CHIME). To turn Chime Mode off, enter code +

CHIME again.

Quick Arming Note that if QUICK ARM is enabled (field *29), the # key can be

pressed instead of entering the security code, for any of the arming

procedures (Away, Stay, Instant, Maximum, etc.).

A user code other than the Installer Code must be programmed into the system in order for the

Quick Arm feature to work.

SUMMARY OF ARMING MODES

Mode Features for Each Arming Mode

Exit Delay Entry Delay Perimeter Armed Interior Armed

AWAY Yes Yes Yes Yes

STAY Yes Yes Yes No

INSTANT Yes No Yes No

MAXIMUM Yes No Yes Yes

Section 31 - Keypad Functions

31-3

Global Arming

If enabled for the user, the keypad will display the following:

ARM ALL ?

0 = NO , 1 = YES

If NO, the keypad prompts for arming each partition

individually. If YES, the system attempts to arm all partitions

allowed by this user. If there are any faults (open doors,

windows, etc.) the keypad will display them. See notes below.

These faults must be corrected or the zone bypassed before

arming will occur. When faults are corrected, repeat the arming

procedure.

Notes:

• When using the Global Arm feature, if there are faults in any of the selected partitions,

the system will enter a Summary Mode in which the faulted zones of all of the selected

partitions will be displayed. These faults must be corrected or bypassed (code + BYPASS

+ [#] will attempt to bypass the faults in all of the selected partitions). This Summary

Mode will end in approximately 120 seconds if no keys are pressed.

• If, when disarming the system using a Global Disarm, any of the selected partitions has

a condition which would cause the keypad to beep (such as alarm memory or a trouble

condition), the system enter a Summary Mode in which the alarm memory or trouble

conditions of all of the selected partitions will be displayed. This mode will continue

until either approximately 120 seconds elapses or a second disarm occurs which clears

the beeping.

Access Control

The system has the capability to utilize access control by one of 3 methods.

1. One relay may be used for access control in each partition. The relay is programmed in

data field 1*76. To activate this relay, the user enters his User Code + [0]. The relay will

pulse for 2 seconds.

2. For a more powerful method of access control, program input devices (keypads, RF

buttons, hardwired) and output devices (relays) as access points (see the Access Control

section). Up to 32 access point devices (relays) among 8 partitions can be controlled. For

example, if a keypad is programmed as an access input device, then entering [User

Code] + [#73] or [User Code] + [#74] will activate the appropriate access point relays

(see also Zone Programming and Relay Programming in the #93 Menu Mode section).

3. If a Vista Gateway Module is installed along with the ADEMCO PassPoint Access

Control System, then these same inputs will automatically control the appropriate access

points in the PassPoint ACS. Entering [User Code] + [#75] will control the state

(protect, bypass, lock) of a door. Entering [User Code] + [#76] will pass a script number

to the PassPoint ACS. Entering [User Code] + [#77] will unbypass a PassPoint ACS

zone (see the Access Control section).

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

31-4

Delaying Closing Time

If open/close schedules are used, end users can manually delay closing time by extending the

closing window by 1 or 2 hours. This is useful if a user must stay on the premises later than

usual. The user must have an authority level of Manager or higher.

To extend the closing window, enter [User code] + [#] +82.

Closing Delay ?

Hit 0-2 Hours

Enter the number hours, 1 or 2, by which the end of the closing

window should be extended. Note that the delay is from the

scheduled closing time, not from the current time.

Press [∗] to accept entry and exit this mode. Press [#] to exit

this mode without changes.

The system will send an Access Schedule Change report to the

central station when the closing window is extended (if

programmed).

An extension of the closing window cannot be reduced once it is set. However, a 1-hour delay can

be increased to 2 hours. This is to prevent the user from deleting the delay after the normal

window expires, thereby missing the end of the window.

Partition "GOTO" Commands

Each keypad is assigned a default partition for display purposes, and will show only that

partition's information. To see information for another partition, or perform system functions

in another partition, use the GOTO command ([User Code] + [*] +partition number 0-8).

The keypad will remain in the new partition until directed to go to another partition, or until

120 seconds has elapsed with no keypad activity. To return to your home partition, enter [∗]

+ Partition number 0.

You must program data field 2*18 to enable the GOTO function. This is a partition-specific field

that must be set for each partition the user wants to access from another partition's keypad

Viewing Capabilities of a User

The keypad will display the partitions that a user is authorized for, the user number, and the

authority level for all partitions authorized. Enter [User Code] + [∗] + [∗]. The user's

capabilities in each authorized partition will typically be displayed as follows:

Part. 1 A0* WHSE

User 01 Auth.=1G.

The user's Open/Close report capability is shown by the dot

following the authority level. If Open/Close is not enabled for a

user, the dot will not appear.

Section 31 - Keypad Functions

31-5

Viewing Zone Descriptors

The Alpha Keypads can display all programmed descriptors, which is useful to the installer

when checking entries, and can be helpful to the user when there is a need to identify zones.

To display descriptors, the system must be disarmed and ready to arm. Press and

hold the READY key until the built-in instructions for that key appear, then release the key.

The zone descriptors will appear one at a time, for about 2-3 seconds each. For faster

viewing, press the READY key to display the next descriptor in numerical order, and so on.

When all descriptors have been displayed, the control will exit Display Mode. Enter the

Security Code and press the OFF key to exit Display Mode before all descriptors have been

displayed.

Viewing Downloaded Messages

Users may occasionally receive a message from their installation company displayed on an

alpha keypad. When this occurs, the keypad will display "Message. Press 0 for 5 secs."

Instruct the user to press and hold the 0 key to display the central station's message. Note

that the system must be in the READY state to view these messages.

Using the Built-in User’s Manual

An abbreviated User's Manual is stored in the system's memory, and can be particularly

useful to the end user if the printed User's Manual is not conveniently accessible when the

user needs to perform a seldom-used and unfamiliar system procedure. The Built-in User's

Guide is displayed by simply pressing any of the function keys (e.g., OFF, AWAY, STAY,

MAXIMUM, BYPASS, INSTANT, CODE, TEST, READY, #, and CHIME) for approximately

5 seconds and then releasing it. Abbreviated instructions relative to the key that has been

pressed will then be displayed (2 lines of text are displayed at a time). This function operates

in either the armed or the disarmed state.

Panic Keys

There are three panic key pairs (shown below) that, if programmed, can be used to manually

initiate alarms and send a report to the central station. Each key pair can be individually

programmed for 24 Hour Silent, Audible or Auxiliary (Emergency) responses, as well as Fire.

The panic function is activated when the appropriate key pair is pressed at the same time.

The panic functions are identified by the system as follows:

PANIC Displayed as Zone

* + 1

# + 3

* + #

995

996

999

For alpha keypads, these panic keys

can also be programmed with an alpha

descriptor.

For the panic functions to be of practical value, the system must be connected to a central station.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

31-6

Speed Key [D] (Macros)

The system supports up to 32 Speed Key (macro) commands. A Speed Key command is a

series of keystrokes stored in the system memory and activated when a programmed lettered

key is pressed. Each Speed Key command can include 32 keystrokes. Typical Speed Key

functions include:

• Arming sequences that involve first bypassing certain zones before arming.

• Seldom-used but repeatable sequences.

• Relay activation sequences.

Lettered keys A-B-C can be assigned a specific Speed Key function by entering a Speed Key

number (1-32) in field 1*26.

Programming Speed Key Sequence

To program a macro, enter your [User Code] + [#] + [D]. The following appears:

ENTER SPEED KEY #

01-32 00=QUIT

Enter the 2-digit Speed Key number (01-32) being defined and press [*]. Enter up to 32

keystrokes. A Speed Key sequence can include different commands. Press the "D" key to

separate different commands.

For example, you may want to perform the following sequence:

Desired function Keystrokes

GOTO partition 2 Enter *2

Bypass Zones 10 & 11 Press bypass [6], then the zone numbers 010 & 011

Arm in Maximum Mode Press maximum [4] key

Return to Partition 1 Enter *1

To program that Speed Key sequence, type the following :

*2 D 6010011 D 4D *1 D D

Note that the "D" key is pressed after each command. Press "D" twice to complete the entry

and exit.

When defining Speed Key sequences, do not use the [#] key to represent Quick Arming. The

system uses the code entered in response to the prompt to initiate commands in a Speed Key

sequence, so the quick arm key is unnecessary. The system interprets the use of the [#] key in a

Speed Key sequence as its designated function only (e.g. #2 is not interpreted as "Arm-AWAY,"

but rather as "Enter House ID Sniffer Mode").

Executing Speed Key Sequence

To execute a Speed Key sequence, do the following:

If a lettered key, A-B-C, has been assigned as a Speed Key, press the appropriate key. If a

user code is required for any part of the Speed Key sequence, the following prompt appears.

Otherwise, the Speed Key sequence automatically begins.

ENTER USER CODE

✴✴✴✴

Enter your user code. The programmed Speed Key sequence will begin automatically.

Section 31 - Keypad Functions

31-7

To activate a Speed Key not assigned to the A-B-C keys, press and hold down the [D] key for

2 seconds until the following prompt appears:

ENTER SPEED KEY #

01-32 00=QUIT

Enter the desired Speed Key number.

If a user code is required for any part of the Speed Key sequence, the following prompt

appears. Otherwise, the Speed Key sequence automatically begins.

ENTER USER CODE

✴✴✴✴

Enter your user code. The programmed Speed Key sequence will begin automatically.

The system will apply the user code’s Global Arming capabilities if the macro executes any

arming or disarming commands.

Manual Relay Activation Mode (#70 Mode)

The system allows users to manually activate relays by keypad command using either the

keypad or a telephone keypad (if VIP Module is used). The user will be prompted (either by

keypad alpha display or telephone voice module).

To activate relays from a keypad, enter 4-digit [Security Code] + [#] +70.

To activate relays using a telephone and VIP Module, first dial the 2-digit phone access code.

When the system acknowledges the access, enter 4-digit [Security Code] + [#] + 70. The

following prompts/voice responses will begin.

ENTER DEVICE NO.

00=QUIT 01

Voice: "ENTER DEVICE CODE NOW"

Enter the 2-digit number of the relay to be activated.

nn DEVICE IS OFF

HIT 0=OFF , 1=ON

Voice: “’VOICE DESCRIPTOR’ DEVICE ‘NN’ ON/OFF. FOR

‘VOICE DESCRIPTOR’ ON, ENTER 1; FOR ‘VOICE

DESCRIPTOR’ OFF ENTER 0"

Press 0 or 1 to turn the device off or on respectively.

‘NN’ represents the 2-digit relay number and ‘VOICE

DESCRIPTOR’ is the relay voice descriptor programmed by the

installer (see Relay Voice Descriptors in the #93 Menu Mode).

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

31-8

nn DEVICE IS OFF

HIT THE "*" KEY

Voice: "’VOICE DESCRIPTOR’ DEVICE ‘NN’ ON/OFF. TO

EXIT, ENTER 00 NOW"

From a keypad, press [∗] to continue. The ENTER DEVICE

NO. prompt will appear.

From a telephone keypad, enter 00 to exit, or enter the next

relay number to be programmed. The current on/off state of

that relay will be annunciated as described above.

Alternatively, if 6 seconds elapses with no key depression, the

voice module will annunciate the "ENTER DEVICE CODE

NOW" message.

A relay that has been designated as a fire relay is automatically restricted to prevent

inadvertent activation/deactivation by users. Only the Installer Code can override this

restriction. If the installer attempts to access a fire relay, the message “RESTRICTED USE

OVERRIDE” will be displayed. The relay can then be tested for manual operation.

32-1

SECTION 32

Testing The System

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

In This Section

♦

Battery Test

♦

Dialer Test

♦

Fire Drill Test

♦

One-Man Fire Walk-Test

♦

Burglary Walk-Test

♦

Armed Burglary System Test

♦

Trouble Conditions

♦

Turning the System Over to the User

♦

To the Installer

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Battery Test

When AC power is present, the VISTA-128FB will run a brief battery test every 60 seconds

to determine if there is a battery connected, and will run an extended battery test every 24

hours to check on the battery’s condition. If the VISTA-128FB finds that the battery voltage

is low (less than approximately 11.5V) during one of these tests, it initiates a keypad

“SYSTEM LOBAT” display and a rapid console beeping sound. It also sends a Low Battery

report to the central station (if the dialer feature is used). The console can be cleared by

entering any security code + OFF, and a Restore report will be sent to the central station

after a subsequent test indicates that the problem (disconnected or low battery) has been

corrected.

If used, the PS24 will also run a brief battery test every 60 seconds to check that a battery is

connected, and will run an extended battery test every 17 hours to check the actual battery

condition. If the PS24 finds the battery voltage low (less than approximately 23V), it will

open-circuit its LOW BATTERY output. Be sure to wire this output to one of the VISTA-

128FB's EOLR-supervised zones (zones 3-8; program for 24-hour trouble response (zone type

19) so that the VISTA-128FB will initiate the required local annunciation and dialer reports).

Dialer Test

The VISTA-128FB may be programmed to automatically transmit test reports to a central

station at intervals ranging from once per hour to once per 999 hours (field *27). UL

requires that a test report be transmitted at least once every 24 hours. The VISTA-128FB

can be programmed to send the first report at any time of the day, or on any day of the week

after power-up (field *83).

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

32-2

Fire Drill Test (code + [#] + 69)

This test causes fire bells (or any bell having a non-zero response type in the #93 Menu

Mode) to be activated (in either steady or pulsing manner, as programmed in field 3*15) for

the purpose of conducting a fire drill or a bell test. This test can only be activated by the

installer or a master user from Partition 1 keypads by entering the corresponding security

code and pressing [#] + 69 while the burglary portion of the system is disarmed. Keypads

display "FIRE DRILL ACTIVE" while this test is active. The test is stopped by entering any

security code and pressing OFF. Note that the system continues to monitor all 24-hour zones

(fire, panic, etc.) while this test is active, and will end the test when an alarm condition is

detected. This test should be conducted at periodic intervals, as determined by the local

authority having jurisdiction.

One-Man Fire Walk-Test (code + [#] + 68)

This test causes the system to sound console beeps and bell dings in response to fire zone

faults (zone type 9, 16 & 17) for the purpose of allowing proper zone operation to be checked

without triggering alarms. Note that the system will not be operational as an alarm system

(i.e., cannot sense alarms) while this test is active. The test can only be activated by the

installer by entering the Installer’s Code and pressing [#] + 68 while the burglary portion of

the system is disarmed. This test should be conducted at periodic intervals, as determined by

the local authority having jurisdiction.

When this test is first activated, the system will display:

USE BELL DING?

0 = NO 1 = YES

Enter 1 (YES) to have the fire bells associated with each

point sound for 3 seconds when a point is faulted.

Enter 0 (NO) if only keypad sounders are desired.

The next prompt will be displayed.

AUTO-TEST DET?

0 = NO 1 = YES

Enter 1 (YES) to have the system automatically test all

polling loop points with a fire response type 9 or 16. Other

fire zones will have to be tested manually.

Enter 0 (NO) to test every point manually.

The next prompt will be displayed.

For true detector sensitivity tests, and for compliance with fire codes, you must enter 0

(NO) to this question.

LOG RESULTS?

0 = NO 1 = YES

Enter 1 (YES) to have the system log each point as it is

tested. A list of untested points will also be logged.

Enter 0 (NO) if you do not want the system to keep track

of the results.

The next prompt will only be displayed if Contact ID report

format has been selected.

Section 32 – Testing The System

32-3

C.S. TRANSMIT?

0 = NO 1 = YES

Enter 1 (YES) to have the results of the test sent to the

central station. This report will consist of a list of points

that have been tested followed by a list of points that have

not been tested.

Enter 0 (NO) if you do not want to report the results. A

Walk-Test Start and Walk-Test End report will be sent in

either case (if programmed).

When the Test Mode is activated, the system will sound fire bells (or any bell having a non-

zero response type programmed in the #93 Menu Mode) for 3 seconds. The system will also

send a Start of Walk-Test message to the central station, and will light all keypad indicators

and display window segments to verify that they are working properly. The keypads will

then display Fire Walk-Test in Progress and will sound a single beep every 15 seconds while

this test is active.

The system will build a list of all the fire zones (response types 9, 16, 17, 18) that need to be

tested. These points will be scrolled on the display. For each point, the keypad will display

"UNTST XXX," where XXX is the point number, followed by an alpha descriptor for the

point.

If the auto-test option has been selected, the control panel will attempt to automatically test

all of the polling loop points that have a zone response type of 9 or 16. For points that must

be manually tested, fault and reset each fire alarm sensor in turn. Each action should cause

keypads to beep and fire bells to ding. The keypads will display the zone number and the

associated alpha descriptor while the zone remains faulted. The system automatically issues

a smoke detector power reset about 10 seconds after it finds a fault on one of these zones, to

allow faulted detectors to be reset.

To end the test, enter any security code and press OFF. An End of Walk-Test message will be

sent to the central station (if programmed). Note that the test will automatically end if no

faults are detected within a 60-minute time period.

Burglary Walk-Test (Code + TEST [5])

This test causes the system to sound keypad beeps in response to faults on burglary and non-

fire related 24-hour zones for the purpose of allowing proper zone operation to be checked

without triggering alarms. Note that the system will not trigger alarms for burglary and

non-fire related 24-hour zones, but will trigger fire alarms while this test is active. This test

can only be activated by the installer, a master user or manager user by entering the

corresponding security code and pressing TEST while the burglary portion of the system is

disarmed. UL requires that this test be conducted on a weekly basis.

When this test is first activated, the system will sound burglary bells (or any bell having a

non-zero response type in each bell's supervisory zone) for 3 seconds. The system will send a

Start of Walk-Test message to the central station. The keypads will display Burg Walk-Test

in Progress and will sound a single beep every 15 seconds while the test remains active.

Open and close each protected door and window in turn. Each action should produce 3 beeps

from the keypad. Walk in front of any motion detectors. Listen for three beeps when the

detector senses movement. The keypad will display the zone number and alpha descriptor

while a door or window remains open or while a detector remains activated. The system

automatically issues a Zone 8 Glassbreak Detector Power Reset about 10 seconds after it

finds a fault on this zone, to allow faulted detectors to be reset.

To end this test, enter any security code and press OFF. An End-of-Walk-Test message will

be sent to the central station.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

32-4

Armed Burglary System Test

1. Alarm messages will be sent to the central station during the following tests. Notify the

central station that a test will be in progress.

2. A display of "COMM. FAILURE" indicates a failure to communicate (no kissoff by the receiver

at the central station after the maximum number of transmission attempts is tried). If this

occurs, verify that the phone line is connected, the correct report format is programmed, etc.

1. Arm the system and fault one or more zones. Silence alarm sounder(s) each time by

entering the code and pressing OFF. Check that entry/exit delay zones provide the

assigned delay times.

2. Check the keypad-initiated alarms, if programmed, by pressing the panic keys (* and #, 1

and *, and/or 3 and #). If the system has been programmed for audible emergency, the

keypad will emit a loud, steady alarm sound. The word “ALARM” and a descriptor "999"

will be displayed for * and #. (If 1 and * are pressed, a "995" will be displayed; if 3 and #

are pressed, a "996" will be displayed.) Silence the alarm by entering the security code

and pressing OFF. If the system has been programmed for silent panic, there will be no

audible alarms or displays. A report will be sent to the central station, however.

3. Notify the central station that all tests are finished, and verify results with them.

Trouble Conditions

Supervisory Messages

• A display of “SUPV” accompanied by a zone number (001-128) and an alpha descriptor (if

programmed) indicates that a fire supervisory condition exists on that zone. This means

that the operation of the fire alarm system may be compromised.

Check or Trouble Messages

• A display of "CHECK" or "TRBL" (as per field 3*00) accompanied by a zone number (001-

128) and an alpha descriptor indicates that a problem exists with that zone. Zone trouble

may be caused by one of the following conditions:

A hardwired fire zone is open (broken wire)

A Day/Night zone (zone type 5) is faulted

A polling loop zone is not seen by the control panel

A polling loop zone has been tampered (cover removed on a 4190)

A wireless zone has not checked in during the time programmed in field 1*31

A 5800 Series transmitter has been tampered (cover removed)

• "CHECK" accompanied by a numeric display of "6XX," where XX = 01-32, indicates a

trouble on a 4204CF Supervised Bell Output (corresponding relay number 01-32).

• "CHECK" accompanied by a numeric display of "8XX," where XX = 00-31, indicates a

trouble on a peripheral device (connected to the panel's keypad terminals) of the

corresponding device address (00-31).

• "CHECK" accompanied by a numeric display of "9XX," where XX = 00-99, indicates that

a system trouble exists (dialers, bell outputs, ground fault, etc.). See the Zone

Index/Zone Type Defaults section.

If the problem has been corrected, key an OFF sequence (Security Code + OFF) twice to clear the

display.

Section 32 – Testing The System

32-5

Other System Messages

• "COMM. FAILURE" at the keypad indicates that a failure occurred in the telephone

communication portion of your system.

• "LO BAT" and a zone descriptor, accompanied by a once-per-minute beep at the keypad,

indicates that a low battery condition exists in the wireless transmitter displayed. The

audible warning sound may be silenced by pressing any key.

• "SYSTEM LO BAT" at the keypad indicates that a low battery condition exists with the

system's backup battery.

• “HSENS” and a zone number indicates a smoke detector with a high sensitivity level,

which may cause false alarms. The detector is dirty and should be cleaned or replaced.

• “LSENS” and a zone number indicates a smoke detector with a low sensitivity level.

Detectors with a low sensitivity might not detect a smoke condition. The detector should

be cleaned or replaced.

• "RCVR SET UP ERROR" at the keypad indicates that the system has more wireless

zones programmed than the wireless receiver can support. If this is not corrected, none of

the zones in the system will be protected. If additional wireless zones are desired, use an

appropriate receiver.

• "MODEM COMM" at the keypad indicates that the control is on-line with a remote

computer.

System Off-Normal Report

If programmed, a unique Off-Normal report will be generated instead of the periodic test

report if any of the following conditions are present at the time of the report:

• Fire trouble on any zone (zone response types 9, 16, 17, 18)

• Fire supervisory present (zone response type 18)

• Unrestored fire alarm on any zone

• Bypass of any fire zone

• Bell circuit fault for any supervised fire bell

• Bypass/disable of any supervised fire bell

• Telco fault of either dialer line

• Bypass/disable of either dialer

• Earth ground fault present

• Bypass of earth ground supervisory zone

• Fault on LORRA "XMIT OK" signal (if enabled)

• LORRA trigger bypassed

• AC failure

• Low system battery

• Keypad supervision fault

This report will be sent as follows:

Contact ID: Code 608

High Speed: Channel 3 of system report used (channel 9 = 6)

Low Speed: Digits programmed in System Group #4 report codes (Report Code

Programming in the #93 Menu Mode).

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

32-6

Power Failure

If the POWER indicator is off, and the message "AC LOSS" is displayed, the keypad is

operating on battery power only. Check to see that the circuit breaker for the branch circuit

that your system's transformer is wired to has not been accidentally turned off. Instruct the

user to call a service representative immediately if AC power cannot be restored.

Turning the System Over to the User

• Fully explain the operation of the system to the user by going over each of its functions

as well as the User's Manual supplied.

• In particular, explain the operation of each zone (entry/exit, perimeter, interior, fire,

etc.). Be sure the user understands how to operate any emergency feature(s) programmed

into the system.

To The Installer

Regular maintenance and inspection (at least annually) by the installer and frequent testing

by the user are vital to continuous satisfactory operation of any alarm system.

The installer should assume the responsibility of developing and offering a regular

maintenance program to the user as well as acquainting the user with the proper operation

and limitations of the alarm system and its component parts. Recommendations must be

included for a specific program of frequent testing (at least weekly) to ensure the system's

proper operation at all times.

Contacting Technical Support

PLEASE, before you call Technical Support, be sure you:

• READ THE INSTRUCTIONS!

• Check all wiring connections.

• Determine that the power supply and/or backup battery are supplying proper voltages.

• Verify your programming information where applicable.

• Be sure all keypads and devices are addressed properly.

• Note the proper model number of this product, and the version level (if known) along

with any documentation that came with the product.

• Note your ADEMCO customer number and/or company name.

Having this information handy will make it easier for us to serve you quickly and effectively.

You may contact Technical Support via Toll-Free Fax. Please include your return fax

number. You will receive a reply within 24 hours. You may also contact Technical Support

via modem to ATLIS-BBS, Tech Support's Electronic Bulletin Board System. Replies are

posted within 24 hours.

East Coast Technical Support: 1-800-645-7492 (8 a.m.-6 p.m. E.S.T.)

West Coast Technical Support: 1-800-458-9469 (8 a.m.-5 p.m. P.S.T.)

Technical Support Fax Number: 1-800-447-5086

ATLIS-BBS Electronic Bulletin Board System: 1-516-496-3980

(1200 – 28.8 Baud, 8 Data Bits, 1 Start/Stop Bit, No Parity)

ATLIS-FAX Automated Document Retrieval System: 1-800-573--0153 or

1-516-921-6704/ext. 1667

ADEMCO World Wide Web Page: HTTP//:WWW.ADEMCO.COM

Internet E-Mail Address: ADEMCO_TECH_SPRT@ADEMCO-165.ADEMCO.COM

Appendix A-1

APPENDIX A

Regulatory Agency Statements

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

UL Installation Requirements

The following requirements apply to both UL residential and UL commercial burglary

installations:

1. All partitions must be owned and managed by the same person(s).

2. All partitions must be part of one building at one street address.

3. The audible alarm device(s) must be placed where it/they can be heard by all partitions.

4. The control cabinet must be protected from unauthorized access. This can be done by

installing a tamper switch on the cabinet door (supplied with VISTA-128FB) or by

installing a UL Listed passive infrared detector positioned to detect cabinet access. Wire

the selected device to any EOLR-supervised zone (Zone 1-8). Program this zone for day

trouble/night alarm (type 05) or 24-hour audible alarm (type 07) response. The 24-hour

alarm response must be used for multiple partitioned systems.

5. Remote downloading and auto-disarming are not UL Listed features.

UL864/NFPA Local Fire

Configure at least one bell output for supervision and wire polarized fire alarm indicators to

it. Program this bell for temporal sounding.

UL864/NFPA Central Station and Remote Station Fire

1. Size the backup battery for 24-hour standby (central station) or 60-hour standby (remote

station) time.

2. For central station service, you may use the 7720ULF or 7920SE LORRAs alone, the

main dialer with a LORRA, or the main dialer with the 5140DLM Backup Dialer Module.

For remote station service, you must use the main dialer with the 5140DLM Backup

Dialer Module.

3. When using the LORRA, connect its channel inputs to the VISTA-128FB's fire alarm, fire

supervisory (if used), and trouble triggers. Also connect its XMIT OKAY output to Input

1 on the VISTA-128FB's J2 header. Program J2 Input 1 system Zone 973 for 24-hour

trouble response (type 19) to send radio faults.

4. When the main dialer is used, enable it (field 3*30) and connect it to a telephone line.

Assign a 24-hour trouble response (type 19) to system Zone 974 to enable main dialer

supervision. The VISTA-128FB will activate the trouble trigger when it detects a main

dialer supervision fault.

5. When the backup dialer is used, install it on the VISTA-128FB's PCB shield. Enable it

(field 3*30) and connect it to a separate telephone line. Assign a 24-hour trouble

response (type 19) to system Zone 975 to enable backup dialer supervision.

6. When the dialer is used, program it to send fire alarm, fire supervisory (if used), trouble,

AC loss, low battery, normal dialer test, and off-normal dialer test reports. Field *27

must be set to "024" maximum so that test reports are sent at least once every 24 hours.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

Appendix A-2

7. If a secondary number is programmed, set the maximum number of dialer re-tries to 3, 4,

or 5 in field 3*21.

UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises/Local Mercantile Safe & Vault

1. Use the VISTA-128FB.

2. All zones must be configured for EOLR supervision (*41=0). Wireless sensors may not be

used. If 4190WH RPMs are used, set field *24 to "0" to enable tamper detection.

3. Attach a door tamper switch (supplied) to the VISTA-128FB cabinet backbox. For safe

and vault installations, a shock sensor (not supplied) must also be attached to the

backbox. (Also see Mounting the Cabinet in the Installing the Control section)

4. Wire an ADEMCO AB12 Grade A Bell/Box to the bell output. Bell wires must be run in

conduit. Program the bell output for 16 or longer timeout and for confirmation of arming

ding. (Also see the External Sounders section)

5. Wire the VISTA-128FB tamper switch and AB12 Bell/Box tamper switches to any EOLR

supervised zone (zones 1-8). Program this zone for day trouble/night alarm (type 05) or

24-hour audible alarm (type 07) response. The 24-hour alarm response must be used for

multiple partitioned systems.

6. Entry delays must not exceed 45 seconds, and exit delays must not exceed 60 seconds.

UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm

Follow the instructions for UL609 local installations given above.

For Grade A Service:

• You may use the VISTA-128FB dialer alone, or the 7720 Long Range Radio alone.

• When using the dialer, program it to send Burglary Alarm, Low Battery and

Communicator Test reports. Field *27 must be set to "024" (or less) so that test reports

are sent at least once every 24 hours.

• If using the 7720, connect it to the VISTA-128FB burglary/audible panic alarm trigger.

For Grade AA Service:

• You must use a 7920SE Long Range Radio.

• Connect the 7920SE to the VISTA-128FB burglary/audible panic alarm trigger.

UL611/UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm

Follow the instructions for UL609 local installations given above.

For Grade A Service:

• You must use the VISTA-128FB's dialer with a 7720 Long Range Radio.

• Connect the control's burglary/audible panic alarm trigger (on J2 header) to the 7720.

Program a 24-hour trouble response for Zone 974 to enable main dialer supervision. The

VISTA-128FB will activate the burglary/audible panic trigger when a corresponding

alarm is detected, and will activate the trouble trigger when a main dialer fault is

detected..

• Also connect the 7720's radio fault output to one of the VISTA-128FB's EOLR-supervised

zones (i.e., 1-8). Program this zone for a trouble by day/alarm by night (type 05) or a 24-

hour alarm (type 07, 08) response to radio faults.

• Program the control's dialer to send Burglary Alarm, Trouble, Opening/Closing, and Low

Battery reports.

Appendix A – Regulatory Agency Statements

Appendix A-3

For Grade AA Service:

• Follow the instructions for Grade A service, except use the 7920SE in place of the 7720.

California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) Requirements.

24-hour backup: The California State Fire Marshal has published new regulations which

require that all residential fire alarm control panels installed after June 30, 1993 must be

provided with a backup battery which has sufficient capacity to operate the panel and its

attached peripheral devices for 24 hours in the intended standby condition, followed by at

least 4 minutes in the intended fire alarm signaling condition. Be sure to size the battery to

meet this requirement.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

Appendix A-4

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC) STATEMENT

This equipment has been tested to FCC requirements and has been found acceptable for use. The FCC requires the following

statement for your information:

This equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used properly, that is, in strict accordance

with the manufacturer's instructions, may cause interference to radio and television reception. It has been type tested and

found to comply with the limits for a Class B computing device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC

Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However,

there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference to

radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to

correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• If using an indoor antenna, have a quality outdoor antenna installed.

• Reorient the receiving antenna until interference is reduced or eliminated.

• Move the receiver away from the control/communicator.

• Move the antenna leads away from any wire runs to the control/communicator.

• Plug the control/communicator into a different outlet so that it and the receiver are on different branch circuits.

If necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions.

The user or installer may find the following booklet prepared by the Federal Communications Commission helpful:

"Interference Handbook"

This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402.

The user shall not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless authorized by the Installation Instructions or

User's Manual. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

IN THE EVENT OF TELEPHONE OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS

In the event of telephone operational problems, disconnect the control panel by removing the plug from the RJ31X (CA38A

in Canada) wall jack. We recommend that you demonstrate disconnecting the phones on installation of the system. Do not

disconnect the phone connection inside the control panel. Doing so will result in the loss of your phone lines. If the regular

phone works correctly after the control panel has been disconnected from the phone lines, the control panel has a problem

and should be returned for repair. If upon disconnection of the control panel, there is still a problem on the line, notify the

telephone company that they have a problem and request prompt repair service. The user may not under any circumstances

(in or out of warranty) attempt any service or repairs to the system. It must be returned to the factory or an authorized service

agency for all repairs.

FCC PART 68 NOTICE

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the front cover of this equipment is a label that contains, among

other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this

information must be provided to the telephone company.

This equipment uses the following jacks:

An RJ31X is used to connect this equipment to the telephone network.

The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the

telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the

RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined

by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary

discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer

as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe necessary.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the

operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the

necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.

If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please contact the manufacturer for repair and warranty information. If the

trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request you remove the equipment from the

network until the problem is resolved.

There are no user serviceable components in this product, and all necessary repairs must be made by the manufacturer. Other

repair methods may invalidate the FCC registration on this product.

This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line Service is subject to

state tariffs.

This equipment is hearing-aid compatible.

When programming or making test calls to an emergency number, briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call.

Perform such activities in the off-peak hours; such as early morning or late evening.

Appendix A – Regulatory Agency Statements

Appendix A-5

CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS

(DOC) STATEMENT

NOTICE

The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the

equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements. The Department does

not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.

Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local

telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some

cases, the company's inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of certified

connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions

may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.

Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier.

Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications

company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.

Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and

internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural

areas.

Caution: User should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric

inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.

The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a

telephone loop which is used by the device, to prevent overloading. The termination on a loop may consist of any

combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed

100.

AVIS

L'étiquette du ministère des Communications du Canada identifie le matériel homologué. Cette étiquette certifie que le

matériel est conforme à certaines normes de protection, d'exploitation et de sécurité des réseaux de télécommunications. Le

ministère n'assure toutefois pas que le matériel fonctionnera à la satisfaction de l'utilisateur.

Avant d'installer ce matériel, l'utilisateur doit s'assurer qu'il est permis de le raccorder aux installations de l'entreprise locale

de télécommunications. Le matériel doit également être installé en suivant une méthode acceptée de raccordement. Dans

certains cas, les fils intérieurs de l'entreprise utilisés pour un service individuel à la ligne unique peuvent être prolongés au

moyen d'un dispositif homologué de raccordement (cordon prolongateur téléphonique interne). L'abonné ne doit pas oublier

qu'il est possible que la conformité aux conditions énoncées ci-dessus n'empèchet pas la dégradation du service dans certaines

situations. Actuellement, les entreprises de télécommunications ne permettent pas que l'on raccorde leur matériel aux prises

d'abonnés, sauf dans les cas precis prévus par les tarifs particuliers de ces entreprises.

Les réparations du matériel homologué doivent être effectuées pas un centre d'entretien canadien autorisé désigné par le

fournisseur. La compagnie de télécommunications peut demander à l'utilisateur de débrancher un appareil à la suite de

réparations ou de modifications effectuées par l'utilisateur ou à cause de mauvais fonctionnement.

Pour sa propre protection, l'utilisateur doit s'assurer que tous les fils de mise en terre de la source d'énergie électrique, des

lignes téléphoniques de réseau de conduites d'eau s'il y en a, soient raccordés ensemble. Cette précaution est particulièrement

importante dans les régions rurales.

Avertissement: L'utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui-même; il doit avoir recours à un service

d'inspection des installations électriques, ou à un électricien, selon le cas.

L'indice de charge (IC) assigné à chaque dispositif terminal pour éviter toute surcharge indique le pourcentage de la charge

totale qui peut être raccordé à un circuit téléphonique bouclé utilisé par ce dispositif. La terminaison du circuit bouclé peut

être constituée de n'importe quelle combinaison de dispositifs, pourvu que la somme des indices de charge de l'ensemble des

dispositifs ne dépasse pas 100.

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

Appendix A-6

Appendix B-1

APPENDIX B

DIP Switch Tables

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

Appendix B-2

DIP SWITCH TABLES FOR ADDRESSABLE POLLING LOOP DEVICES

4208 ZONE EXPANDER

DIP

SHOWN SET FOR

ID 10 (A)

SIDE VIEW

(UP)

12345

DN UP

POS.1: LOOPS 1 & 2

RESPONSE TIME:

W/TABLE FAST SLOW

AUPDN

BDNUP

4190WH ZONE EXPANDER

4192D/4192SDT/4192CP

SMOKE DETECTORS

APPLIES TO TABLE A ONLY

SHOWN SET FOR ID 10

SIDE VIEW

(DN)

123456 78

POS.1: MUST BE DOWN WITH TABLE: A B

POS.1 MUST BE: DN UP

SIDE VIEW

(DN)

THIS TABLE FOR DIPS

WITH WORD “DN”

(“—” = DN)

DEVICE

DIP SWITCH POSITION

2345

10-16 — — — UP

17-24 — — UP —

25-32 — — UP UP

33-40 — UP — —

41-48 — UP — UP

49-56 — UP UP —

57-64 — UP UP UP

THIS TABLE FOR DIPS

WITH WORD “UP”

(“—” = DN)

DIP

APPLIES TO TABLE A & B ONLY

SHOWN SET FOR ID 10 (A)

123456 78

SIDE VIEW

(UP)

DIP

DEVICE

DIP SWITCH POSITION

2345

10-16 UP UP UP —

17-24 UP UP — UP

25-32 UP UP — —

33-40 UP — UP UP

41-48 UP — UP —

49-56 UP — — UP

57-64 UP — — —

DEVICE DIP SWITCH POSITION

2345678

10 –––

–

11 –––

–

UP UP

12 –––

UP UP

––

13 –––

UP UP

–

14 –––

UP UP UP

–

15 –––

UP UP UP UP

16 ––

––––

17 ––

–––

18 ––

––

–

19 ––

––

UP UP

20 ––

–

––

21 ––

–

22 ––

–

UP UP

–

23 ––

–

UP UP UP

24 ––

UP UP

–––

25 ––

UP UP

––

26 ––

UP UP

–

27 ––

UP UP

–

UP UP

28 ––

UP UP UP

––

29 ––

UP UP UP

–

30 ––

UP UP UP UP

–

31 ––

UP UP UP UP UP

32 –

–––––

33 –

––––

34 –

–––

–

35 –

–––

UP UP

36 –

––

37 –

––

–

38 –

––

UP UP

–

39 –

––

UP UP UP

40 –

–

–––

41 –

–

––

42 –

–

43 –

–

UP UP

44 –

–

UP UP

––

45 –

–

UP UP

–

46 –

–

UP UP UP

–

47 –

–

UP UP UP UP

48 –

UP UP

––––

49 –

UP UP

–––

50 –

UP UP

––

–

51 –

UP UP

––

UP UP

52 –

UP UP

–

––

53 –

UP UP

–

54 –

UP UP

–

UP UP

–

55 –

UP UP

–

UP UP UP

56 –

UP UP UP

–––

57 –

UP UP UP

––

58 –

UP UP UP

–

59 –

UP UP UP

–

UP UP

60 –

UP UP UP UP

––

61 –

UP UP UP UP

–

62 –

UP UP UP UP UP

–

63 –

UP UP UP UP UP UP

––– –––

––– ––

––– –

–

––– –

UP UP

–––

––

–––

–

–––

UP UP

–

–––

UP UP UP

––

–––

––

–

––

–

UP UP

––

UP UP

––

UP UP

–

––

UP UP UP

–

––

UP UP UP UP

–

––––

–

–––

–

––

–

––

UP UP

–

––

–

UP UP

–

UP UP UP

–

UP UP

–––

–

UP UP

––

BIT

VALUE: 64 32 16 8 4 2 1

THIS TABLE FOR DIPS WITH

WORD "DN"

(“–” = DN)

DEVICE DIP SWITCH POSITION

2345678

UP UP UP

–

UP UP UP

–

––

UP UP UP

––

UP UP

UP UP UP

––

–

UP UP UP

–––

UP UP UP

––––

UP UP

–

UP UP UP UP

UP UP

–

UP UP UP

–

UP UP

–

UP UP

–

UP UP

–

UP UP

––

UP UP

–

UP UP

–

UP UP

–

––

UP UP

–

–––

UP UP

––

UP UP UP

UP UP

––

UP UP

–

UP UP

––

–

UP UP

––

UP UP

–– –

UP UP

–– –

–

UP UP

––––

UP UP

–––––

–

UP UP UP UP UP

–

UP UP UP UP

–

UP UP UP

–

UP UP UP

––

–

UP UP

–

UP UP

–

UP UP

–

UP UP

––

–

UP UP

–––

–

UP UP UP

–

UP UP

–

––

–

––

UP UP

–

––

–

–– –

–

–– ––

––

UP UP UP UP

––

UP UP UP

–

––

UP UP

–

––

UP UP

––

–

UP UP

––

–

––

–––

–– –

UP UP UP

–– –

UP UP

–

–– –

–

–– –

––

–– – –

UP UP

–– – –

–

–––––

––––––

64 –

UP UP UP UP UP UP

65 –

UP UP UP UP UP

–

66 –

UP UP UP UP

–

67 –

UP UP UP UP

––

68 –

UP UP UP

–

UP UP

69 –

UP UP UP

–

70 –

UP UP UP

––

71 –

UP UP UP

–––

72 –

UP UP

–

UP UP UP

73 –

UP UP

–

UP UP

–

74 –

UP UP

–

75 –

UP UP

–

––

76 –

UP UP

––

UP UP

77 –

UP UP

––

–

78 –

UP UP

–– –

79 –

UP UP

–– ––

80 –

–

UP UP UP UP

81 –

–

UP UP UP

–

82 –

–

UP UP

–

83 –

–

UP UP

––

84 –

–

UP UP

85 –

–

86 –

–

––

87 –

–

–––

88 –

––

UP UP UP

89 –

––

UP UP

–

BIT

VALUE: 64 32 16 8 4 2 1

THIS TABLE FOR DIPS WITH

WORD "UP"

(“–” = DN)

Appendix B - DIP Switch Tables

Appendix B-3

DIP SWITCH TABLES FOR POLLING LOOP DEVICES

4275 PIR

MIRROR

DIP

SHOWN SET FOR

ID 10 (A)

SIDE VIEW

(UP)

1234567

POS 6: UP (A), DN (B) = INST. MODE

DN (A), UP (B) = PULSE COUNT

POS. 7: UP (A), DN (B) = WALK TEST

DN (A), UP (B) = W/T DISABLE

}

4194 REED CONTACT

(SURFACE MOUNT)

DIP

SHOWN SET FOR

ID 10

123456

—

4278 PIR

MIRROR

DIP

SHOWN SET FOR ID 10 SIDE VIEW

(

)

12345678

POS 7: UP = NORMAL MODE

DN = INSTANT MODE

POS. 8: UP = W/T DISABLE

DN = WALK TEST

}

+ —

SIDE VIEW

(

)

THIS TABLE FOR DIPS

WITH WORD “DN”

DEVICE

DIP SWITCH POSITION

12345

10 — UP — UP —

11 —UP—UPUP

12 — UP UP — —

13 — UP UP — UP

14 — UPUPUP—

15 — UPUPUPUP

16 UP————

17 UP — — — UP

18 UP — — UP —

19 UP — — UP UP

20 UP—UP——

21 UP—UP—UP

22 UP — UP UP —

23 UP — UP UP UP

24 UP UP — — —

25 UP UP — — UP

26 UP UP — UP —

27 UP UP — UP UP

28 UP UP UP — —

29 UP UP UP — UP

30 UP UP UP UP —

31 UP UP UP UP UP

DEVICE

DIP SWITCH POSITION

123456

10 UP UP — UP — UP

11 UP UP — UP — —

12 UP UP — — UP UP

13 UP UP — — UP —

14 UP UP — — — UP

15 UP UP — — — —

16 UP — UPUPUPUP

17 UP — UP UP UP —

18 UP —UPUP—UP

19 UP — UP UP — —

20 UP — UP — UP UP

21 UP—UP—UP—

22 UP—UP——UP

23 UP—UP———

24 UP — — UP UP UP

25 UP — — UP UP —

26 UP — — UP — UP

27 UP — — UP — —

28 UP — — — UP UP

29 UP — — — UP —

30 UP————UP

31 UP—— ———

32 — UPUPUPUPUP

33 — UPUPUPUP—

34 — UPUPUP—UP

35 — UPUPUP— —

36 — UP UP — UP UP

37 — UP UP — UP —

38 — UP UP — — UP

39 —UPUP———

40 — UP — UPUPUP

41 —UP—UPUP—

42 —UP—UP—UP

43 —UP—UP——

44 — UP — — UP UP

45 — UP — —UP—

46 — UP — — — UP

47 —UP————

48 — — UP UP UP UP

49 — — UP UP UP —

50 — — UP UP — UP

51 — — UP UP — —

52 — — UP — UP UP

53 — — UP —UP—

54 — — UP — — UP

55 — —UP———

56 — — — UPUPUP

57 — — — UP UP —

58 — — — UP—UP

59 — — — UP — —

60 — — — — UP UP

61 ————UP—

62 —————UP

63 — — ————

BIT

VALUE: 32 16 8 4 2 1

DEVICE

DIP SWITCH POSITION

123456

10 — — UP — UP —

11 — — UP — UP UP

12 — — UP UP — —

13 — — UP UP — UP

14 — — UP UP UP —

15 — — UP UP UP UP

16 —Up————

17 — UP — — — UP

18 — UP — — UP —

19 — UP — — UP UP

20 — UP — UP — —

21 — UP — UP — UP

22 — UP — UP UP —

23 — UP — UP UP UP

24 —UPUP———

25 — UP UP — — UP

26 — UP UP — UP —

27 — UP UP — UP UP

28 — UPUPUP— —

29 — UPUPUP—UP

30 — UPUPUPUP—

31 — UPUPUPUPUP

32 UP—— ———

33 UP————UP

34 UP — — — UP —

35 UP — — — UP UP

36 UP — — UP — —

37 UP — — UP — UP

38 UP — — UP UP —

39 UP — — UP UP UP

40 UP—UP———

41 UP — UP — — UP

42 UP — UP — UP —

43 UP — UP — UP UP

44 UP — UP UP — —

45 UP — UP UP — UP

46 UP — UP UP UP —

47 UP — UPUPUPUP

48 UP UP — — — —

49 UP UP — — — UP

50 UP UP — — UP —

51 Up UP — — UP UP

52 UP UP — UP — —

53 UP UP — UP — UP

54 UP UP — UP UP —

55 UP UP — UP UP UP

56 UP UP UP — — —

57 UP UP UP — — UP

58 UP UP UP — UP —

59 UP UP UP — UP UP

60 UP UP UP UP — —

61 UP UP UP UP — UP

62 UP UP UP UP UP —

63 UP UP UP UP UP UP

BIT

VALUE: 32 16 8 4 2 1

THIS TABLE FOR DIPS

WITH WORD “UP”

DEVICE

DIP SWITCH POSITION

12345

10 UP—UP—UP

11 UP—UP——

12 UP — — UP UP

13 UP — — UP —

14 UP — — — UP

15 UP————

16 — UPUPUPUP

17 — UPUPUP—

18 — UP UP — UP

19 — UP UP — —

20 —UP—UPUP

21 —UP—UP—

22 — UP — — UP

23 — UP — — —

24 — — UP UP UP

25 — — UP UP —

26 — — UP — UP

27 — — UP — —

28 — — — UP UP

29 — — — UP —

30 ————UP

31 —————

BIT

VALUE: 16 8 4 2 1

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

Appendix B-4

DIP SWITCH TABLES FOR 5700 RF SYSTEM WIRELESS DEVICES

HOUSE ID (1 SHOWN)

123456

12345

123456 78

123456 78910

5706/5707 SMOKE

DETECTORTRANSMITTER

5775 PIR

DETECTOR/TRANSMITTER

HOUSE ID

SWITCH SETTING FOR ALL

DEVICES EXCEPT 5716

5727 KEYPAD

DEVICE

DIP SWITCH POSITION

12345

UP UP UP UP —

2UPUPUP—UP

3UPUPUP——

4 UP UP — UP UP

5UPUP—UP—

6UPUP——UP

7UPUP———

8 UP — UP UP UP

9 UP — UP UP —

10 UP — UP — UP

11 UP — UP — —

12 UP — — UP UP

13 UP — — UP —

14 UP — — — UP

15 UP————

16 — UPUPUPUP

17 — UPUPUP—

18 — UP UP — UP

19 — UP UP — —

20 — UP — UP UP

21 — UP — UP —

22 — UP — — UP

23 — UP — — —

24 — — UP UP UP

25 — — UP UP —

26 — — UP — UP

27 — — UP — —

28 — — — UP UP

29 — — — UP —

30 ————UP

31 —————

BIT

VALUE: 16 8 4 2 1

DIP

SIDE

VIEW (

)

SIDE

VIEW (

)

SIDE

VIEW (

)

SIDE

VIEW

(

)

5701 PANIC TRANSMITTER

POS.6 UP= XMTR ID 62

DN= XMTR ID 63

DIP

XMTR ID

FIXED AT

“00”

XMTR ID

(48 SHOWN)

XMTR

DIP SWITCH POSITION

678

48 UP UP UP

49 UP UP —

50 UP — UP

51 UP — —

52 — UP UP

53 — UP —

54 — — UP

55 — — —

XMTR

DIP SWITCH POSITION

6789

32 UP UP UP UP

33 UP UP UP —

34 UP UP — UP

35 UP UP — —

36 UP — UP UP

37 UP — UP —

38 UP — — UP

39 UP———

40 — UPUPUP

41 — UP UP —

42 — UP — UP

43 — UP — —

44 — — UP UP

45 — — UP —

46 — — — UP

47 ————

}

DIP

HOUSE ID (1 SHOWN)

UP = PULSE COUNT

— = INST. MODE

XMTR ID

(32 SHOWN)

}

MIRROR

DIP

XMTR

DIP SWITCH POSITION

67891011

1 UPUPUPUPUP —

2 UPUPUPUP — UP

3 UPUPUPUP — —

4 UP UP UP — UP UP

5UPUPUP—UP—

6UPUPUP——UP

7UPUPUP———

8 UP UP — UP UP UP

9 UP UP — UP UP —

10 UP UP — UP — UP

11 UP UP — UP — —

12 UP UP — — UP UP

13 UP UP — — UP —

14 UP UP — — — UP

15 UP UP — — — —

16 UP — UPUPUPUP

17 UP — UP UP UP —

18 UP — UP UP — UP

19 UP — UP UP — —

20 UP — UP — UP UP

21 UP — UP — UP —

22 UP—UP— —UP

23 UP — UP — — —

24 UP — — UP UP UP

25 UP — — UP UP —

26 UP — — UP — UP

27 UP — — UP — —

28 UP — — — UP UP

29 UP — — — UP —

30 UP————UP

31 UP—————

32 — UPUPUPUPUP

BIT

VALUE: 32 16 8 4 2 1

XMTR

DIP SWITCH POSITION

67891011

33 — UPUPUPUP —

34 — UPUPUP — UP

35 — UPUPUP — —

36 — UP UP — UP UP

37 — UP UP — UP —

38 — UP UP — — UP

39 — UP UP — — —

40 — UP — UP UP UP

41 — UP — UP UP —

42 — UP — UP — UP

43 — UP — UP — —

44 — UP — — UP UP

45 —UP— —UP—

46 — UP — — — UP

47 — UP — — — —

48 — — UP UP UP UP

49 — — U UP UP —

50 — — UP UP — UP

51 — — UP UP — —

52 — — UP — UP UP

53 — — UP — UP —

54 — — UP — — UP

55 — — UP — — —

56 — — — UP UP UP

57 — — — UP UP —

58 — — — UP — UP

59 — — — UP — —

60 — — — — UP UP

61 ————UP—

62 —————UP

63 ——————

BIT

VALUE 32 16 8 4 2 1

5715

UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER 5711/5711WM

DOOR/WINDOW TRANSMITTER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

XMTR ID

(33 SHOWN)

}

POS.12: UP = N.O.

— = N.C

(Avoid ID 32-37 with N.O.)

SIDE

VIEW

(

)

}

POS.1: UP = NORMAL RESPONSE

DN = FAST RESPONSE

POS. 2:UP = NO COVER TAMPER

DN = COVER TAMPER (use N.C. setting)

DIP

TERMINAL

BLOCK

DIP

HOUSE ID (1 SHOWN)

HOUSE

DIP SWITCH POSITION

54321

1 — UP UP UP UP

2 UP — UP UP UP

3——UPUPUP

4 UP UP — UP UP

5—UP—UPUP

6UP——UPUP

7 — — — UP UP

8UPUPUP—UP

9 — UP UP — UP

10 UP — UP — UP

11 — — UP — UP

12 UP UP — — UP

13 — UP — — UP

14 UP — — — UP

15 ————UP

16 UP UP UP UP —

17 — UPUPUP —

18 UP — UP UP —

19 — — UP UP —

20 UP UP — UP —

21 — UP — UP —

22 UP — — UP —

23 — — — UP —

24 UP UP UP — —

25 —— UP UP — —

26 UP — UP — —

27 — — UP — —

28 UP UP — — —

29 — UP — — —

30 UP————

31 —————

BIT

VALUE: 1 2 4 8 16

TRANSMITTER

DIP SWITCH POSITION

65432 1

1 — UP UP UP UP UP

2 UP — UP UP UP UP

3 — — UPUPUPUP

4 UP UP — UP UP UP

5—UP—UPUPUP

6UP——UPUPUP

7 — — — UP UP UP

8 UP UP UP — UP UP

9 — UP UP — UP UP

10 UP — UP — UP UP

11 — — UP — UP UP

12 UP UP — — UP UP

13 — UP — — UP UP

14 UP — — — UP UP

15 — — — — UP UP

16 UP UP UP UP — UP

17 — UPUPUP — UP

18 UP — UP UP — UP

19 — — UP UP — UP

20 UP UP — UP — UP

21 — UP — UP — UP

22 UP — — UP — UP

23 — — — UP — UP

24 UP UP UP — — UP

25 — UP UP — — UP

26 UP—UP— —UP

27 — — UP — — UP

28 UP UP — — — UP

29 — UP — — — UP

30 UP————UP

31 —————UP

32 UP UP UP UP UP —

33 — UPUPUPUP —

34 UP — UP UP UP —

35 — — UP UP UP —

36 UP UP — UP UP —

37 — UP — UP UP —

38 UP — — UP UP —

39 — — — UP UP —

40 UP UP UP — UP —

41 — UP UP — UP —

42 UP — UP — UP —

43 — — UP — UP —

44 UP UP — — UP —

45 —UP— —UP—

46 UP — — — UP —

47 ————UP—

48 UP UP UP UP — —

49 — UPUPUP — —

50 UP — UP UP — —

51 — — UP UP — —

52 UP UP — UP — —

53 — UP — UP — —

54 UP — — UP — —

55 — — — UP — —

56 UP UP UP — — —

57 — UP UP — — —

58 UP — UP — — —

59 — — UP — — —

60 UP UP — — — —

61 — UP — — — —

62 UP—————

63 ——————

BIT

VALUE: 1 2 4 8 16 32

654321

POS. 6: UP = N.O.

DN = N.C.

SW3

654321

XMTR ID (33 SHOWN)

HOUSE ID (1 SHOWN)

SW4

SIDE

VIEW (

)

DIP

SW4

SW3

TERMINALS

5716 DOOR/WINDOW TRANSMITTER

IMPORTANT

SET SWITCHES WITH

BATTERY REMOVED

For 5700 series transmitters not shown in this table, refer to the instructions accompanying each transmitter.

Appendix C-1

APPENDIX C

Summary of System Commands

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Event Logging

Commands Event Log Display = Code + [#] + 60 (Installer or Master Only)

Event Log Print = Code + [#] + 61 (Installer or Master Only)

Clear Event Log = Code + [#] + 62 (Installer or Master Only)

Wireless System

Commands House ID Sniffer Mode = Code + [#] + 2 (Installer Only)

Transmitter ID Test = Code + [#] + 3 (Installer Only)

Go/No Go Test = Code + 5 (Test Key)

User Code Commands Add A User Code = User Code + 8 + New User Number + New User's Code

Change a Code = User Code + 8 + User Number + New User's Code

Delete a User's Code = Your User Code + 8 + User Number To Be Deleted +

Your Code Again

View User Capability = User's Code + [∗] + [∗]

Set Real-Time Clock (Installer, Master Only) = Code + [#] +63

Arming Functions Arming Away Enter Code + Away [2].

Arming Stay Enter Code + Stay [3].

Arming Instant Enter Code + Instant [7].

Arming Maximum Enter Code + Maximum [4].

Quick Arm Use # Key Instead Of User Code Followed by Any of

the Above Arming Mode Keys.

Global Arming If Enabled for the User, the Keypad Will Display a

Prompt. Answer The Prompted Questions

Disarming Enter Code + Off [1].

Bypassing Zones Enter Code + Bypass [6] + Zone Number.

Quick Bypass To Automatically Bypass All Faulted Zones, Use

"Quick Bypass" Method: Enter Code + Bypass + [#].

Chime Mode Enter Code + Chime [9]. To Turn Chime Mode Off,

Enter Code + Chime Again.

Partition GOTO User Code + [∗] + Partition Number 0-8.

GOTO Home Partition User Code + [∗] + 0.

Panics [∗] + 1 Zone 95 (A Key).

[∗] + [#] Zone 99 (B Key).

[#] + 3 Zone 96 (C Key).

View Downloaded

Messages Press 0 for 5 Seconds.

Display All Zone

Descriptors Press [∗] for 5 Seconds.

Display User Self Help Hold Any Key for 5 Seconds

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

Appendix C-2

Programming

Commands Site Initiated Download = User Code + [#] + 1.

Direct-Wire Download Enable = User Code + [#] + 5.

Enter Program Mode = Installer Code + 8000.

Exit Program Mode = *99 Or *98.

Scheduling

Commands Installer-Programmed Schedule Events = Installer Code + [#] + 80.

Temporary Schedule Editing = User Code + [#] + 81 (Installer, Master,

Manager Only).

Extend Closing Window = User Code + [#] + 82 (Installer, Master, Manager

Only).

End User Output Device Programming = User Code + [#] + 83.

Output Device Control Activate Output Device as Programmed = User Code + [#] + 71.

Activate Output Device as Programmed = User Code + [#] + 72.

Activate Output Device Manually = User Code + [#] + 70.

Access Control Activate Access Relay for Current Partition = User Code + 0.

Request to Enter/Exit = User Code + [#] + 73.

Request to Enter/Exit at Access Point = User Code + [#] + 74 + Access Point

Number.

Change Access Point State = User Code + [#] = 75 + Access Point + State.

Perform Script at Access Point = User Code + [#] + 76 + Access Point + Script

Number.

Appendix D-1

APPENDIX D

Specifications

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

VISTA-128FB CONTROL

Physical: 18"H X 14-1/2"W X 4.3"D

Electrical:

Primary Power: From ADEMCO No. 1451 Transformer with enclosure; rated 18VAC, 72VA.

Backup Battery: 12VDC, 12AH min to 34.4AH max lead acid battery (gel type).

Alarm Power: 12VDC, 1.7 amps max for each bell output.

Aux. Standby Pwr 12VDC, 1 amp max.

Total Power Combined auxiliary standby and alarm currents must not exceed 2.3 amps.

Standby Time: 24 hours with 1 amp aux standby load or 60 hours with 205ma aux. Standby load

using 34.4AH battery.

Fusing: Battery input, auxiliary and bell power outputs are protected using PTC circuit

protectors. All outputs are power limited.

Main Dialer

Line Seize: Double Pole

Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B

FCC Registration No.: AC398U-68192-AL-E

TLM Threshold Good line when tip-to-ring voltage greater than approximately 25V (13 when blue

jumper cut) or when handset current greater than approximately 10ma. Bad line

when both voltage and current below these levels.

Formats: ADEMCO High Speed, ADEMCO 4 + 2 Express, ADEMCO Low Speed, ADEMCO

Contact ID, Sescoa and Radionics Low Speed

Agency Listings:

Burglary: UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises and Mercantile Safe and Vault.

UL611/UL1610 Grades A, AA Central Station.

UL365 Grades A, AA Police Connect.

Fire: UL864-NFPA 72 Local, Central Station, and Remote Station

5140DLM BACKUP DIALER MODULE

Physical: 2.75”H X 4”W X 1”D

Mounts on VISTA-128FB main PC board shield using standoffs supplied.

Connects to VISTA-128FB main PC board J3 header using ribbon cable supplied.

FCC Registration: AC398U-62668-MO-N

5140LED ANNUNCIATOR MODULE

Physical: 4.5”H X 2.75”W X 1.5”D

Mounts to single-gang electrical box.

Indicators: AC Power, Comm Failure, Dialer 1 Fault and Dialer 2 Fault.

Connect indicator inputs to VISTA-128FB trigger outputs (J2 header).

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

Appendix D-2

6139(R) Remote Keypads

Physical:

Width: 6.25 inches

Height: 4.75 inches

Depth: 1.25 inches

Electrical:

Voltage Input: 12VDC

Current Drain: 100 mA

Interface Wiring:

RED: 12VDC input (+) auxiliary power

BLUE: Not Used

GREEN: Data to control panel

YELLOW: Data from control panel

BLACK: Ground and (-) connection from supplemental power supply.

Index-1

Index

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

#70 Relay Mode ............................................................ 31-7

#93 Menu Mode Key Commands......................... 21-5, 25-3

#93 Menu Mode Programming............................. 21-4, 25-1

12/24 HOUR TIME STAMP FORMAT......................... 24-15

1451 transformer....................................................20-1, D-1

4 +2 Format................................................................... 27-2

2-Wire Latching Glassbreak Detectors............................ 6-5

2-Wire Smoke Detectors ................................................. 6-2

4-Wire Smoke Detectors ................................................. 6-3

24-hour Auxiliary Alarm Type 08 ................................... 22-2

24-hour Audible Alarm Type 07..................................... 22-2

24-hour Silent Alarm Type 06........................................ 22-2

24 Hour Trouble Type 19 .............................................. 22-3

3 +1 and 4+1 Expanded Formats.................................. 27-2

3 +1 and 4+1 Standard Formats.................................... 27-2

4100SM Interface Module ................12-1, 12-10, 18-1, 28-2

4100APG LED Indications............................................. 19-4

4100APG Pager Interface ............................................. 19-1

4197 Polling Loop Extender ............................................ 7-3

4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules................................... 9-1

4285/4286 VIP Module.................................................. 10-1

4297 Polling Loop Extender ............................................ 7-3

5140DLM BACKUP DIALER MODULE..................17-5, D-1

5140LED Indicator Module........................... 12-1, 12-4, D-1

5700 Series..................................................................... 8-4

5800 Series..................................................................... 8-7

5800TM Module .............................................................. 8-3

5800TM Wiring................................................................ 8-3

6139(R) ....................................................................5-1, D-3

685 Receiver................................................................. 11-2

7720 .............................................................................. 12-7

7720ULF........................................................................ 12-7

7820 Long Range Radio ............................................... 13-1

7920SE ......................................................................... 12-7

AAV Module Operation.................................................. 11-1

AC 60Hz or 50Hz ........................................................ 24-14

AC LOSS KEYPAD SOUNDING ................................... 24-2

AC Transformer...................................................... 4-4, 20-1

Access Group............................................................... 30-6

Access Control & Lighting and Appliances.................... 14-3

Access Control Dialer Events........................................ 14-4

Access Control of an Entry/Exit Point............................ 14-2

ACCESS CONTROL RELAY ...................................... 24-16

Access Control Using an RF Transmitter Zone ............. 14-2

Access Control ...................................... 1-6, 14-1, 31-3, C-2

Access Point Type 27.................................................... 22-3

Access Schedules......................................................... 26-7

Access Security............................................................. 28-3

ACTION (A)................................................................. 25-25

Action Code................................................................. 26-12

Action Specifier ........................................................... 26-12

Active time................................................................... 26-14

Addressing The Keypads ................................................ 5-3

Ademco 4+2 Express....................................21-1, 27-2, D-1

ADEMCO 4146 ............................................................. 12-3

Ademco AB12. ................................................................ 4-2

ADEMCO CONTACT ID................................21-1, 27-4, D-1

ADEMCO HIGH SPEED ..................... 21-1, 27-2, 27-4, D-1

ADEMCO LOW SPEED ................................21-1, 27-1, D-1

Ademco No. N6277 Cam Lock........................................ 4-1

Affects Lobby ....................................................... 2-2, 24-11

Agency Listings........................................................1-8, D-1

Agency Statements .........................................................A-1

ALARM CODES .......................................................... 25-12

Alarm Power....................................................................D-1

ALARM SOUNDS BELL 1, 2....................................... 24-19

Alarm-Saf ........................................................................ 5-2

ALLOW DISARM OUTSIDE WINDOW IF ALARM

OCCURS.............................................................. 24-17

ALLOW DISARMING ONLY DURING ARM/DISARM

WINDOWS........................................................... 24-17

ALPHA DESCRIPTOR VOCABULARY....................... 25-20

Alpha Descriptors........................................................ 25-16

Alpha Keypad.............................................................. 25-21

ALPHA NUMERIC PAGER INSTALLED....................... 24-8

ALPHA PROG?............................................................. 25-2

Antenna Fault................................................................ 13-3

Arm/Disarm Commands.............................................. 26-13

Arm-AWAY Type 21...................................................... 22-3

Arming Away................................................................. 31-2

Arming Functions ...................................................31-2, C-1

Arming Instant............................................................... 31-2

Arming Maximum .......................................................... 31-2

Arming Stay................................................................... 31-2

Arms Lobby.......................................................... 2-2, 24-11

Arm-STAY Type 20....................................................... 22-3

Audio Alarm Verification......................................... 1-7, 11-1

Authority Levels and Modification Rules........................ 30-4

Auto Arming .................................................................. 26-2

Auto Disarming.............................................................. 26-2

Auto-Arm Delay.................................................. 24-16, 26-2

Auto-Arm Warning.............................................. 24-16, 26-2

AUTO-DISARM DELAY .............................................. 24-17

Aux. Standby Pwr............................................................D-1

Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment ............................ 12-7

AUXILIARY INPUT ALTERNATE FUNCTION ENABLE24-19

Auxiliary Relay 4-Wire Smoke Detector Reset.............. 16-2

Auxiliary Relay Alarm Activation.................................... 16-1

Auxiliary Relay Battery Saver........................................ 16-3

Auxiliary Relay Trouble/Supervisory Activation............. 16-2

Auxiliary Relay ............................................1-5, 16-1, 24-20

Backup Battery................................................................D-1

BACKUP DIALER TOUCHTONE/ROTARY ................ 24-20

Backup Dialer.................................................................. 1-6

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

Index-2

Backup Power Calculations.................................. 20-2, 20-7

Basic Hardwired Zones ............................................ 1-1, 6-1

BATTERY SELECTION TABLE .................................... 20-8

Battery Test................................................................... 32-1

Battery............................................................................. 4-4

BELL 1 CONFIRMATION OF ARMING DING............... 24-2

BELL 1 TIMEOUT ......................................................... 24-2

Bell 1, and Bell 2 outputs............................................... 15-1

BELL 2 & AUX RELAY CONFIRMATION OF ARMING

DING .................................................................... 24-20

BELL 2 & AUX RELAY TIMEOUT............................... 24-20

Bell Circuit Supervision ................................................. 15-2

Bell Outputs Programming ............................................ 15-3

Bell Outputs..................................................................... 1-5

Built-in User's Manual...................................................... 1-7

BURG. ALARM COMM. DELAY.................................. 24-10

BURG. TRIGGER FOR RESPONSE TYPE 8............... 24-3

Burglary Walk Test........................................................ 32-3

Button RF ........................................................................ 8-8

Bypass Commands ..................................................... 26-13

Bypassing Zones........................................................... 31-2

California State Fire Marshal...........................................A-3

Call Waiting Defeat............................................... 3-3, 24-13

CALLBACK REQUESTED ............................................ 28-3

Callback ........................................................................ 28-2

CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS....A-5

CHARACTER (ASCII) CHART.................................... 25-20

Characteristics of Polling Loop........................................ 7-1

Characteristics of Wireless Zones................................... 8-1

Check Messages........................................................... 32-4

CHECK OR TRBL DISPLAY ................................ 7-5, 24-18

CHECKSUM VERIFICATION........................................ 24-7

Chime Mode.................................................................. 31-2

CHIME ON BELL 1...................................................... 24-14

Choices For Start/Stop System Operation .................. 25-28

Choices For Start/Stop Zone Types ............................ 25-28

Class B supervision....................................................... 15-1

CLEAR RF SERIAL#?................................................... 25-3

Code + #73.................................................................... 14-2

Code + #74.................................................................... 14-2

Code + #75 + access point + function ........................... 14-2

Code + #76 + access point + script #. ........................... 14-2

Code + #77 + access point............................................ 14-2

Code + [#] + 68.............................................................. 32-2

Code + [#] + 69.............................................................. 32-2

Code + TEST [5] ........................................................... 32-3

COMM. FAILURE................................................. 17-6, 32-5

COMM. SPLIT REPORT SELECTION........................ 24-13

Common Lobby............................................................... 2-2

Communication Defaults ...................................... 21-1, 27-5

Communications Formats................................................ 1-7

Compass Downloading Software ..............12-11, 28-1, 28-4

Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors .............................. 6-3

Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors .............................. 6-4

Compatible 5700 Series Transmitters ............................. 8-6

Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters ............................. 8-8

Compatible Alarm Indicating Devices............................ 15-2

Compatible Glass Break Detectors ................................. 6-5

Compatible Polling Loop Devices.................................... 7-6

Confirm Serial Number.................................................. 25-8

Connecting the Backup Battery..................................... 20-3

CONTACT ID EVENT CODES...................................... 27-2

Contacting Technical Support ....................................... 32-6

CROSS ZONING PAIR FOUR.................................... 24-12

CROSS ZONING PAIR ONE ...................................... 24-11

CROSS ZONING PAIR THREE .................................. 24-11

CROSS ZONING PAIR TWO...................................... 24-11

Cross Zoning............................................................ 1-7, 3-2

CUSTOM INDEX ?........................................................ 25-3

Custom Message Display (Installer's

Message) ............................................................. 25-19

Custom Word Substitutes............................................ 25-33

Custom Words ............................................................ 25-18

Data Encryption............................................................. 28-3

Data Field Descriptions................................................. 24-1

Data Field Program Mode ............................................. 21-1

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME START/END MONTH24-16

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME START/END WEEKEND 24-16

DELAY FOR ZONE TYPES 17 & 18........................... 24-19

DEVICE PROG? ........................................................... 25-2

Device Programming................................................... 25-21

DIAL TONE DETECTION.............................................. 24-6

DIAL TONE PAUSE ...................................................... 24-6

DIALER 1 FAULT.......................................................... 17-6

DIALER 2 FAULT.......................................................... 17-6

Dialer Operation............................................................ 17-6

Dialer Outputs ............................................................... 17-5

DIALER SELECTION.................................................. 24-19

Dialer Test..................................................................... 32-1

DIGITAL COMMUNICATOR ...........................................D-1

DIP Switch Tables........................................................... B-1

DIP switches ................................................................... 7-2

Direct-Wire Downloading.................................... 12-11, 28-4

DISABLE DOWNLOAD CALLBACK ........................... 24-14

Disarm Delay................................................................. 26-2

Disarm Type 22............................................................. 22-3

Disarming...................................................................... 31-2

DISPLAY BURG & PANIC ALARMS OF OTHER

PARTITIONS........................................................ 24-18

Display Faulted Zones................................................... 31-2

DISPLAY FIRE ALARMS OF OTHER PARTITIONS 24-18

DISPLAY TROUBLES OF OTHER PARTITIONS 24-18

DOWNLOAD COMMAND ENABLES............................ 24-5

DOWNLOAD ID NUMBER............................................ 24-5

DOWNLOAD PHONE NUMBER................................... 24-5

Downloading Requirements .......................................... 28-1

Downloading .......................................................... 1-8, 28-1

DUAL REPORTING ...................................................... 24-7

DUPLICATE serial number ........................................... 25-8

Duress Reporting ................................................. 30-3, 30-4

Early Power Detect ....................................................... 13-3

Earth Ground.......................................................... 4-4, 20-2

ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON FORCE ARM ................. 24-15

ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON GLOBAL ARM ............... 24-14

ENABLE BELL 2 & AUX RELAY CHIME ANNUNCIATION24-20

ENABLE BURG FEATURES ON PARTITION 124-21

ENABLE DIALER REPORTS FOR PANICS &

DURESS .............................................................. 24-10

ENABLE FORCE ARM FOR AUTO-ARM................... 24-17

ENABLE GOTO FOR THIS PARTITION..................... 24-17

Index

Index-3

ENABLE J2 TRIGGERS BY PARTITION.................... 24-17

ENABLE OPEN/CLOSE REPORT FOR INSTALLER

CODE..................................................................... 24-5

Entering Programming Mode......................................... 21-2

ENTRY DELAY #1 ........................................................ 24-1

ENTRY DELAY #2 ........................................................ 24-1

Entry Errors ................................................................... 21-3

ENTRY WARNING...................................................... 24-10

Entry/Exit #1 Type 01.................................................... 22-1

Entry/Exit #2 Type 02.................................................... 22-2

EVENT (EV) ................................................................ 25-25

Event Log clear ............................................................. 18-5

Event Log Options.......................................1-6, 12-10, 18-1

Event Log Printer Connections........................... 12-10, 18-1

EVENT LOG PRINTER ON-LINE................................ 24-15

Event Log Programming................................................ 18-3

EVENT LOG TYPES................................................... 24-15

Event Logging Commands..............................................C-1

Event Logging Procedures ............................................ 18-3

Exception Reports......................................................... 26-3

EXIT DELAY #1............................................................. 24-1

EXIT DELAY #2............................................................. 24-1

Exit Delay Reset................................................... 3-2, 24-11

EXIT DELAY SOUNDING ........................................... 24-14

Exit Error .......................................................1-7, 3-1, 24-11

EXTENDED DELAY FOR TYPES 17 & 18 ................. 24-19

Extending Closing Time ....................................... 26-2, 31-4

External Sounders......................................................... 15-1

False Alarm Reduction.................................................... 3-1

FCC PART 68 NOTICE...................................................A-4

FCC REGISTRATION NO...............................................D-1

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC)

STATEMENT ...........................................................A-4

FIRE ALARM SILENCED.............................................. 15-3

Fire Alarm Verification..................................................... 6-4

FIRE BELL? ................................................................ 25-29

FIRE DISPLAY LOCK ................................................. 24-18

Fire Drill Test................................................................. 32-2

Fire Supervisory Type 18 .............................................. 22-3

Fire Walk-Test Mode....................................................... 1-7

Fire Waterflow Type 17 ................................................. 22-3

Fire With Verification Type 16 ....................................... 22-3

First Communication ..................................................... 28-2

FIRST TEST REPORT TIME ...................................... 24-10

Force Arm...................................................................... 26-2

Frwd. Power Loss.......................................................... 13-3

Fusing .............................................................................D-1

General Description......................................................... 1-1

Getting On-Line with a Control Panel............................ 28-2

Global Arm ? ................................................................. 30-7

Global Arming......................................................... 2-4, 31-3

Go/No Go Test Mode .................................................... 8-11

GOTO Commands ........................................................ 31-4

Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing .............................. 4-2

Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing...................... 4-3

Grade A Service..............................................................A-2

Grade AA Service.................................................... A-2, A-3

HANDSHAKE................................................................ 27-1

Hayes............................................................................ 28-1

Holiday Schedule Programming.................................. 26-11

Holiday Schedule Worksheet ...................................... 26-11

Holiday Schedule .......................................................... 26-5

House ID Sniffer Mode.................................................... 8-3

HSENS.......................................................................... 32-5

IGNORE EXPANSION ZONE TAMPER ....................... 24-3

Installer Code....................................................... 24-1, 30-3

Installing the Cabinet Lock .............................................. 4-1

Installing the Control ....................................................... 4-1

Installing the Control's Circuit Board ............................... 4-3

Installing the Transmitters ............................................... 8-4

INTELLIGENT TEST REPORTING............................... 24-3

Interior W/Delay Type 10............................................... 22-2

Interior, Follower Type 04.............................................. 22-2

J2 Trigger Outputs ........................................................ 12-1

Key Functions for Programming 7820 Radio............... 25-23

Keypad Functions ......................................................... 31-1

Keypad Macros ............................................................... 1-5

KEYPAD PANIC ENABLES .......................................... 24-2

Keypad Panic Keys......................................................... 1-4

Keypad Port 1 ................................................................. 5-2

Keypad Port 2 ................................................................. 5-2

Keypads ................................................................... 2-1, 5-1

Keyswitch LEDs ............................................................ 12-4

Keyswitch Operation and Wiring ................................... 12-3

Keyswitch............................................................... 1-6, 24-2

KISSOFF....................................................................... 27-1

Learn S/N?.................................................................... 25-8

Level 0 Installer (User 1) Codes.................................... 30-3

Level 1 Master Codes ................................................... 30-3

Level 2 Manager Codes ................................................ 30-3

Level 6 Duress Codes................................................... 30-4

Levels 3-5 Operator Codes ........................................... 30-4

Limitation of Access Schedules.......................... 26-3, 26-17

LINE SEIZE.....................................................................D-1

Listen-In to Follow................................................ 11-1, 11-2

LO BAT ......................................................................... 32-5

LOBBY PARTITION .................................................... 24-11

LOG FIRST MAINTENANCE SIGNAL ........................ 24-16

LONG RANGE RADIO CENTRAL STATION #1

CATEGORY ENABLE............................................ 24-8

LONG RANGE RADIO CENTRAL STATION #2

CATEGORY ENABLE............................................ 24-8

Long Range Radio Trouble Messages.......................... 13-2

Long Range Radio ...................................................... 25-23

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

Index-4

Long Range Subscriber................................................. 12-1

LOW SPEED FORMAT (PRIMARY) ............................ 24-6

LOW SPEED FORMAT (SECONDARY)....................... 24-7

LRR Battery................................................................... 13-3

LRR CRC is bad............................................................ 13-3

LRR reporting options ................................................... 13-1

LSENS........................................................................... 32-5

Macros .......................................................................... 31-6

MAIN DIALER (TOUCH-TONE OR ROTARY

DIAL)...................................................................... 24-4

Main Logic Board (MLB) Supervision Type 28 .............. 22-3

Main Logic Board .......................................................... 14-1

Maintenance Signal Support ........................................... 1-3

Manager Code............................................................... 30-3

Manual Relay Activation Mode...................................... 31-7

Master Code.................................................................. 30-3

Master Keypad ................................................................ 2-5

MAX # OF DIALER RETRIES ..................................... 24-19

Mechanics of Programming........................................... 21-1

MODEM COMM ................................................... 28-3, 32-5

Modems......................................................................... 28-1

MODULE RELAY # ..................................................... 25-29

Mounting the 4100APG................................................. 19-1

Mounting the Control Cabinet.......................................... 4-1

Mounting The Keypads ................................................... 5-3

Mounting the VIP Module.............................................. 10-2

Multi-Access ?............................................................... 28-6

MULTIPLE ALARMS..................................................... 24-3

Multiple Partition Access ............................................... 30-5

National Electric Code..................................................... 4-4

No Alarm Response Type 23 ........................................ 22-3

NORMALLY CLOSED OR EOLR (ZONES 3-8)24-6

NUMBER OF PARTITIONS ........................................ 24-16

OC or OPEN CIRCUIT .................................................... 5-4

Off-Normal Report......................................................... 32-5

One-Man Fire Walk-Test............................................... 32-2

On-Line Control Functions............................................. 28-3

OPEN/CLOSE REPORTING FOR KEYSWITCH 24-5

Open/Close Reporting................................................... 30-5

Open/Close Reports by Exception ..................... 24-17, 26-5

Open/Close Schedule Programming........................... 26-10

Open/Close Schedule Worksheet ............................... 26-10

Open/Close Schedules......................................... 26-4, 26-7

Open/Close Windows.................................................. 26-13

Operator Access Levels ................................................ 28-3

Operator Level Codes ................................................... 30-3

Output Device Control.....................................................C-2

Output Relays....................................................... 1-5, 25-22

PABX ACCESS CODE.................................................. 24-4

PAGER ID NUMBER FOR ALARMS............................. 24-8

PAGER ID NUMBER FOR BYPASSES........................ 24-9

PAGER ID NUMBER FOR OPENS/CLOSES............... 24-9

PAGER ID NUMBER FOR SYSTEM ............................ 24-9

PAGER ID NUMBER FOR TEST.................................. 24-9

PAGER ID NUMBER FOR TROUBLES........................ 24-8

PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR ALARMS ................... 24-8

PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR BYPASSES............... 24-8

PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR OPENS/CLOSES...... 24-9

PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR SYSTEM ................... 24-9

PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR TEST......................... 24-9

PAGER PHONE NUMBER FOR TROUBLES............... 24-8

PANIC BUTTON OR SPEEDKEY............................... 24-12

Panic Keys .................................................................... 31-5

Partition Descriptors.................................................... 25-19

PARTITION No. (P)..................................................... 25-26

Partitions ......................................................................... 1-3

PassPoint............................................................. 14-1, 31-3

Perimeter Type 03......................................................... 22-2

Peripheral Devices.......................................................... 1-4

PERMANENT KEYPAD DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING 24-13

Phone Access User's Guide.......................................... 10-1

Planning a Partitioned System ........................................ 2-1

PLL out of Lock ............................................................. 13-3

POLLING LOOP CURRENT DRAW WORKSHEET .. 20-3

Polling Loop Expansion............................................ 1-1, 7-1

Polling Loop Supervision................................................. 7-5

Polling Loop Wire Runs................................................... 7-2

Power Failure................................................................ 32-6

Power Unattained.......................................................... 13-3

POWER UP IN PREVIOUS STATE .............................. 24-3

Power-Up Procedure..................................................... 20-1

PREVENT ZONE XXX BYPASS................................... 24-5

PRIMARY FORMAT...................................................... 24-6

PRIMARY PHONE NUMBER........................................ 24-4

PRIMARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT #................................ 24-4

PRINTER BAUD RATE............................................... 24-15

Printer Configurations.................................................... 18-2

PROGRAM TOOL......................................................... 25-3

Programming Audio Alarm Verification.......................... 11-2

Programming Commands ......................................24-3, C-2

Programming for 4100APG........................................... 19-3

Programming Partition-Specific Data Fields.................. 21-4

Programming Scheduling Options................................. 26-6

Programming System-Wide Data Fields ....................... 21-3

Programming the Control for the Long

Range Radio.......................................................... 13-2

PS24 Power Supply Module.......................... 1-6, 20-1, 20-2

Quick Arm ...................................................24-4, 30-1, 31-2

RANDOMIZE AC LOSS REPORT ................................ 24-2

RCVR SET UP ERROR ................................................ 32-5

Real-Time Clock................................................... 18-3, 29-1

RECEIVER TYPE........................................................ 24-13

Recent Close Report....................................................... 3-2

Regulatory Agency Statements.......................................A-1

Relay commands ........................................................ 26-12

Relay Group................................................................ 25-29

Relay Outputs ........................................................ 9-1, 25-7

RELAY PROG?............................................................. 25-2

Index

Index-5

Relay Programming..................................................... 25-25

RELAY TIMEOUT XXX MINUTES .............................. 24-15

RELAY TIMEOUT YYY SECONDS............................. 24-15

RELAY TYPE .............................................................. 25-29

Relay Voice Descriptors ................................... 25-30, 25-31

Remote Keypad Sounder.............................................. 12-2

Remote Point Modules.................................................... 7-1

REPORT CODE PROG?............................................... 25-2

Report Code Programming.......................................... 25-12

Reporting Formats......................................................... 27-1

RESET ON SECOND OFF FOR BELL 1 ................... 24-20

RESET ON SECOND OFF FOR BELL 2 .................... 24-20

RESTORE REPORT TIMING...................................... 24-10

Restore/Supervisory Codes......................................... 25-12

Restrict Disarming......................................................... 26-3

RF Expander ............................................................... 25-22

RF RCVR SUPERVISION CHECK-IN INTERVAL 24-12

RF Serial Number Clear Mode .................................... 25-33

RF System Installation Advisories................................... 8-2

RF System Operation and Supervision ........................... 8-2

RF TRANSMITTER CHECK-IN INTERVAL ................ 24-13

RF Transmitter Loop Designations................................ 25-7

RF TX LOW BATTERY REPORT ENABLE ................ 24-12

RF TX LOW BATTERY SOUND ................................. 24-12

RING DETECTION COUNT................................. 24-6, 28-2

RINGER EQUIVALENCE................................................D-1

RJ31X jack .................................................................... 10-2

RLY VOICE DESCR?.................................................... 25-2

Scheduling Commands ...................................................C-2

Scheduling Menu Mode................................................. 26-6

Scheduling..............................................................1-6, 26-1

SECONDARY FORMAT................................................ 24-6

SECONDARY PHONE NUMBER.................................. 24-5

SECONDARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT #........................ 24-11

SEND CANCEL IF ALARM + OFF .............................. 24-14

SEQUENTIAL LEARN?................................................. 25-2

Sequential Mode Programming..................................... 25-9

Serial Number Devices.................................................... 7-2

Serial Number ............................................................... 25-4

Serial Printer.................................................................. 19-3

SESCOA ................................................................27-1, D-1

SESCOA/RADIONICS SELECT.................................... 24-7

Setting Up a Partitioned System...................................... 2-2

Setup of the 4281/5881 RF Receivers ............................ 8-2

Specifications ..................................................................D-1

Speed Key [D] Macros .................................................. 31-6

STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT PRIMARY.. 24-7

STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT SECONDARY... 24-7

START (STT) .............................................................. 25-25

STOP (STP) ................................................................ 25-26

Summary Screen........................................................... 25-9

Supervised Fire (Without Verification) Type 09 ............. 22-2

Supervised RF................................................................. 8-8

SUPERVISION PULSES FOR LORRA TRIGGER

OUTPUTS............................................................ 24-18

Supervisory Messages.................................................. 32-4

SUPERVISORY ON OPEN & SHORT ........................ 24-18

SUPPRESS TX SUPERVISION SOUND.................... 24-14

SWINGER SUPPRESSION ........................................ 24-10

System Commands.........................................................C-1

System Communication ................................................ 27-1

System Defaults ............................................................ 21-1

System Group 1 Codes.................................... 25-12, 25-14

System Group 2 Codes.................................... 25-12, 25-15

System Group 3 Codes.................................... 25-12, 25-15

System Group 4 Codes.................................... 25-12, 25-16

System LoBat”...................................................... 32-1, 32-5

System Messages......................................................... 32-5

System Sensor A77-716B EOL Relay Module................ 6-3

SYSTEM ZONE BYPASS INHIBIT.............................. 24-21

System Zones ................................................................. 1-3

TECHNOLOGY TYPE................................................... 25-9

Telephone Line Connections......................................... 17-5

Telephone Line Supervision.......................................... 17-5

TEMPORAL SIREN PULSE.......................................... 24-1

Temporary Schedule Worksheet................................. 26-18

Temporary Schedules Programming........................... 26-19

Temporary Schedules ........................................ 26-5, 26-18

TEST REPORT INTERVAL........................................... 24-3

Testing The System ...................................................... 32-1

Theory of Partitioning...................................................... 2-1

Time and Date............................................................... 29-1

Time Driven Events............................................ 26-3, 26-12

Time Windows Definitions Worksheet........................... 26-9

Time Windows Programming ........................................ 26-9

Time Windows...................................................... 26-3, 26-7

Timed Events ................................................................ 26-7

Time-Driven Event Programming................................ 26-14

Time-Driven Event Worksheet .................................... 26-12

To ADD a Master, Manager, or Operator

Code ...................................................................... 30-6

To Add an RF Key to an Existing User.......................... 30-8

To CHANGE a Master, Manager, or Operator

Code ...................................................................... 30-7

To Delete a Master, Manager, or Operator

Code ...................................................................... 30-9

To EXIT The User Edit Mode ........................................ 30-9

Total Control Panel Load Worksheets........................... 20-5

TOUCH-TONE W/ROTARY BACKUP ....................... 24-13

Transmitter Battery Life............................................ 8-4, 8-8

Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode .......................................... 8-11

Transmitter Input Types .................................................. 8-8

Transmitter Supervision ........................................... 8-4, 8-7

TRIGGER OUTPUTS FUNCTION SELECTION 24-19

Trouble by Day/Alarm by Night Type 05........................ 22-2

Trouble Conditions........................................................ 32-4

Trouble Messages......................................................... 32-4

Turning the System Over to the User............................ 32-6

UL Installation Requirements ..........................................A-1

UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar

Alarm........................................................................ A-2

UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises/Local

Mercantile Safe & Vault............................................A-2

UL611/UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm............... A-2

UL864/NFPA Central Station and Remote Station FireA-1

UL864/NFPA Local Fire .................................................. A-1

UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION.......................... 2-3

Unsupervised RF ............................................................ 8-8

USE LONG RANGE RADIO IF DIALER FAILS............. 24-8

USE LONG RANGE RADIO ONLY............................... 24-7

VISTA-128FB Installation Instructions

Index-6

USE PARTITION DESCRIPTORS.............................. 24-17

User Access Codes......................................... 1-4, 2-1, 30-1

User Code Commands....................................................C-1

User Codes Authority Levels......................................... 30-1

User Scheduling Menu Mode ...................................... 26-20

Using a Supplementary Power Supply............................ 5-2

Using ACS Relays and Triggers.................................... 14-3

Using ACS Zone Inputs................................................. 14-3

Using the Built-in User’s Manual ................................... 31-5

Viewing Capabilities Of A User............................. 30-1, 31-4

Viewing Data Fields....................................................... 21-3

Viewing Downloaded Messages.................................... 31-5

Viewing Zone Descriptors.............................................. 31-5

VIP MODULE PHONE CODE ....................................... 24-2

VIP Module..................................................1-5, 10-1, 25-25

Vista Gateway Module .....................14-1, 14-4, 25-25, 31-3

V-LINK....................................................... 12-11, 28-1, 28-4

Voltage Triggers.............................................................. 1-6

WATERFLOW SILENCE OPTION.............................. 24-19

Wire Run Length ............................................................. 5-1

WIRELESS KEYPAD ASSIGNMENT.......................... 24-14

WIRELESS KEYPAD TAMPER DETECT ................... 24-14

Wireless System Commands ..........................................C-1

Wireless Zone Expansion......................................... 1-3, 8-1

Wiring Bell Outputs........................................................ 15-2

Wiring Devices to Zones 1-8 ........................................... 6-1

Wiring the 4100APG...................................................... 19-2

Wiring the Long Range Radio ....................................... 13-2

Wiring the VIP Module................................................... 10-2

Wiring To The Keypads................................................... 5-1

Wiring/Addressing RPM Devices..................................... 7-2

Yuasa............................................................................ 20-8

ZN TYPE 18 DELAY USE........................................... 24-18

ZONE 5 AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION.................... 24-15

Zone 6 Alternate Tamper Function....................... 4-2, 24-19

Zone 6 Tamper Configuration ......................................... 6-4

Zone 804....................................................................... 10-1

Zone 973....................................................................... 20-2

Zone Alarm Reports .................................................... 25-13

Zone Assignments for 5700 Series Transmitters ............ 8-5

Zone Descriptors......................................................... 25-17

Zone Index .................................................................... 23-1

ZONE LIST (ZL).......................................................... 25-25

Zone List Programming............................................... 25-30

Zone Not Used.............................................................. 22-1

ZONE PROG?............................................................... 25-2

Zone Programming ....................................................... 25-3

Zone Type Defaults....................................................... 23-2

Zone Type Definitions ................................................... 22-1

ZONE TYPE RESTORE ENABLES FOR ZONE

TYPES 16-18....................................................... 24-20

ZONE TYPE RESTORES FOR TYPES 9/1024-10

ZONE TYPE RESTORES FOR ZONE

TYPES 1-8............................................................. 24-9

ZONE TYPE/SYSTEM OPERATION (ZT). ................. 25-26

Zones .............................................................................. 2-1

WARNING!

THE LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM

While this System is an advanced wireless security system, it does not offer guaranteed protection against burglary, fire or

other emergency. Any alarm system, whether commercial or residential, is subject to compromise or failure to warn for a

variety of reasons. For example:

• Intruders may gain access through unprotected openings or have the technical sophistication to bypass an alarm sensor

or disconnect an alarm warning device.

• Intrusion detectors (e.g., passive infrared detectors), smoke detectors, and many other sensing devices will not work

without power. Battery-operated devices will not work without batteries, with dead batteries, or if the batteries are not

put in properly. Devices powered solely by AC will not work if their AC power supply is cut off for any reason, however

briefly.

• Signals sent by wireless transmitters may be blocked or reflected by metal before they reach the alarm receiver. Even if

the signal path has been recently checked during a weekly test, blockage can occur if a metal object is moved into the

path.

• A user may not be able to reach a panic or emergency button quickly enough.

• While smoke detectors have played a key role in reducing residential fire deaths in the United States, they may not acti-

vate or provide early warning for a variety of reasons in as many as 35% of all fires, according to data published by the

Federal Emergency Management Agency. Some of the reasons smoke detectors used in conjunction with this System

may not work are as follows. Smoke detectors may have been improperly installed and positioned. Smoke detectors may

not sense fires that start where smoke cannot reach the detectors, such as in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other

side of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level of a residence or building. A second floor

detector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Finally, smoke detectors have sensing limitations. No

smoke detector can sense every kind of fire every time. In general, detectors may not always warn about fires caused by

carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable

materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches, or arson. Depending on the nature of the fire

and/or location of the smoke detectors, the detector, even if it operates as anticipated, may not provide sufficient warning

to allow all occupants to escape in time to prevent injury or death.

• Passive Infrared Motion Detectors can only detect intrusion within the designed ranges as diagrammed in their

installation manual. Passive Infrared Detectors do not provide volumetric area protection. They do create multiple

beams of protection, and intrusion can only be detected in unobstructed areas covered by those beams. They cannot

detect motion or intrusion that takes place behind walls, ceilings, floors, closed doors, glass partitions, glass doors, or

windows. Mechanical tampering, masking, painting or spraying of any material on the mirrors, windows or any part of

the optical system can reduce their detection ability. Passive Infrared Detectors sense changes in temperature; however,

as the ambient temperature of the protected area approaches the temperature range of 90° to 105°F (32° to 40°C), the

detection performance can decrease.

• Alarm warning devices such as sirens, bells or horns may not alert people or wake up sleepers if they are located on the

other side of closed or partly open doors. If warning devices are located on a different level of the residence from the bed-

rooms, then they are less likely to waken or alert people inside the bedrooms. Even persons who are awake may not hear

the warning if the alarm is muffled by noise from a stereo, radio, air conditioner or other appliance, or by passing traffic.

Finally, alarm warning devices, however loud, may not warn hearing-impaired people.

• Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premises to a central monitoring station may be out of service

or temporarily out of service. Telephone lines are also subject to compromise by sophisticated intruders.

• Even if the system responds to the emergency as intended, however, occupants may have insufficient time to protect

themselves from the emergency situation. In the case of a monitored alarm system, authorities may not respond

appropriately.

• This equipment, like other electrical devices, is subject to component failure. Even though this equipment is designed to

last as long as 20 years, the electronic components could fail at any time.

The most common cause of an alarm system not functioning when an intrusion or fire occurs is inadequate maintenance.

This alarm system should be tested weekly to make sure all sensors and transmitters are working properly. The security

keypad (and remote keypad) should be tested as well.

Wireless transmitters (used in some systems) are designed to provide long battery life under normal operating conditions.

Longevity of batteries may be as much as 4 to 7 years, depending on the environment, usage, and the specific wireless

device being used. External factors such as humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large swings in temperature,

may all reduce the actual battery life in a given installation. This wireless system, however, can identify a true low battery

situation, thus allowing time to arrange a change of battery to maintain protection for that given point within the system.

Installing an alarm system may make the owner eligible for a lower insurance rate, but an alarm system is not a

substitute for insurance. Homeowners, property owners and renters should continue to act prudently in protecting

themselves and continue to insure their lives and property. We continue to develop new and improved protection devices.

Users of alarm systems owe it to themselves and their loved ones to learn about these developments.

ADEMCO LIMITED WARRANTY

Alarm Device Manufacturing Company, a Division of Pittway Corporation, and its divisions, subsidiaries

and affiliates ("Seller"), 165 Eileen Way, Syosset, New York 11791, warrants its products to be in

conformance with its own plans and specifications and to be free from defects in materials and workmanship

under normal use and service for 24 months from the date stamp control on the product or, for products not

having an ADEMCO date stamp, for 12 months from date of original purchase unless the installation

instructions or catalog sets forth a shorter period, in which case the shorter period shall apply. Seller's

obligation shall be limited to repairing or replacing, at its option, free of charge for materials or labor, any

product which is proved not in compliance with Seller's specifications or proves defective in materials or

workmanship under normal use and service. Seller shall have no obligation under this Limited Warranty or

otherwise if the product is altered or improperly repaired or serviced by anyone other than ADEMCO factory

service. For warranty service, return product transportation prepaid, to ADEMCO Factory Service, 170

Michael Drive, Syosset, New York 11791.

THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR

A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OTHERWISE, WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE

FACE HEREOF. IN NO CASE SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL

OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED, OR UPON ANY OTHER BASIS OF LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, EVEN IF THE LOSS OR

DAMAGE IS CAUSED BY THE SELLER'S OWN NEGLIGENCE OR FAULT.

Seller does not represent that the products it sells may not be compromised or circumvented; that the

products will prevent any personal injury or property loss by burglary, robbery, fire or otherwise; or that the

products will in all cases provide adequate warning or protection. Customer understands that a properly

installed and maintained alarm may only reduce the risk of a burglary, robbery, fire or other events

occurring without providing an alarm, but it is not insurance or a guarantee that such will not occur or that

there will be no personal injury or property loss as a result. CONSEQUENTLY, SELLER SHALL HAVE NO

LIABILITY FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY, PROPERTY DAMAGE OR OTHER LOSS BASED ON A

CLAIM THE PRODUCT FAILED TO GIVE WARNING. HOWEVER, IF SELLER IS HELD LIABLE,

WHETHER DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FOR ANY LOSS OR DAMAGE ARISING UNDER THIS

LIMITED WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE, REGARDLESS OF CAUSE OR ORIGIN, SELLER'S MAXIMUM

LIABILITY SHALL NOT IN ANY CASE EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, WHICH

SHALL BE THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AGAINST SELLER. This warranty replaces

any previous warranties and is the only warranty made by Seller on this product. No increase or alteration,

written or verbal, of the obligations of this Limited Warranty is authorized.

TRANSFORMER

W/ENCLOSURE

ADEMCO No.1451

(supplied)

INPUT: 120VAC,

60HZ,

1.0A max. Connect to a

dedicated circuit.

See instructions for

proper earth ground

connections

ZONE 2

12345678910 11121314151617181920 212223242526

27 28 29 30

SMOKE

2-WIRE SMOKE

DETECTOR LOOP

N.C.

N.O.

2k (note 2)

N.C.

N.O.

GLASS

BREAK

REMOTE KEYPADS:

6139, 6139R

SEE NOTE 3

Red Blk Grn Yel

Data in

Data out

4209U

4208U

2-WIRE GLASS BREAK

DETECTOR LOOP

4192SD

SMOKE

BACK-UP LINE SEIZE

LED (GREEN)

Connect to main PCB

header J3 using ribbon

cable (supplied)

BACK-UP DIALER ON HOOK

VOLTAGE THRESHOLD (BLUE)

INTACT: 25V

CUT: 13V

OPTIONAL 5140DLM BACK-UP DIALER MODULE

MAIN PCB SHIELD

BACK-UP PHONE JACK

SEE TELCO

JACK SHOCK

WARNING

BELOW

Make connections using

4142TR cable (not supplied)

VOLTAGE

TRIGGERS

(not supervised)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Make connections using

4142TR cable (supplied)

(not supervised)

KEYPAD PORT #2

BELL 1

(WHITE)

BELL 2

(WHITE)

BELL CIRCUIT SUPERVISION JUMPERS

INTACT: Supervised using 2k EOLR

CUT: Not supervised (no EOLR used)

BLK + RED

OPTIONAL REMOVABLE

TERMINAL BLOCK KIT:

ADEMCO NO. 4142BLK

BELL

HORN

BELL

HORN

SMOKE

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

TO OTHER DEVICES

2k 2k 2k 2k 2k

ZONE 1 ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8

NOTE 3:

See instructions on setting

addresses & for max # of keypads

and wire run length restrictions.

Keypad color subject to approval

of local authority.

2k (note 2) 2k

AC WIRING IS

SUPERVISED

BELL 1 BELL 2

ALARM POLARITY SHOWN

Each output may be selected for

Style Y supervision or no supervision

(See main PCB jumpers W1, W4 and

program field 3*10)

FIRE CKTS: Supervise using 2k EOLR.

Use polarized sounding devices.

BURG CKTS: Supervision not req'd.

EOLRs not req'd. May use non

polarized devices.

Ratings: 10 - 14VDC, 1.7A max.

See note 1, see instructions

for compatible devices.

N.O.

POLE

N.C.

AUX RELAY (FORM C)

programmable response

(not supervised)

Contact Rating:

28V, 2.8A

resistive loads

SPARE AUX

POWR #1

AUXILIARY POWER #1

Rating: 10 - 14VDC

1.0A MAX (STANDBY)

1.7A MAX (ALARM)

See note 1.

(not supervised)

NOTE 1:

The combined standby current

drawn from aux pwr #1, aux pwr #2

and polling loop cannot exceed

1.0A.The combined alarm current

drawn from aux pwr #1, aux

pwr #2, polling loop, bell 1 and

bell 2 cannot exceed 2.3A.

2-WIRE SMOKE

DETECTOR LOOP

PROGRAMMABLE

AS TAMPER LOOP

PROGRAMMABLE

AS KEY SWITCH LOOP

ZONE 1-8 NOTES

• All zones provide Style B supervision

• Zone resistance (excluding EOLR):

- Zones 1, 2, 8: 100 ohms max

- Other zones: 300 ohms max

• Zone response: 350 - 500mS (all zones)

Connect to 12V, 12AH min/34.4AH max

lead acid batteries using cables supplied.

See instructions for required capacity.

Float charging voltage: 13.7VDC. Battery

normally need not be replaced for

at least 3 yrs.

VISTA-128FB

SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS

J4 KEYPAD PORT #2

See instr. regarding port #2 use

1. GROUND (to keypad black wire)

4. DATA IN 2 (to keypad green wire)

5. AUX PWR #2 (to keypad red wire)

Rating: 10 - 14 VDC,

400mA max. See note 1

7. DATA OUT 2 (to keypad yellow wire)

(BLUE)

INTERFACE TO 5140DLM

MAIN DIALER ON HOOK

VOLTAGE THRESHOLD

INTACT:25V

CUT: 13V

BACK-UP DIALER EARTH

GROUND SCREW

(wire to main PCB

terminal #30)

J2 VOLTAGE TRIGGERS

See instructions for trigger use and programming

(default functions shown)

1. OUT 4 (SILENT PANIC/DURESS)

2. OUT 7 (TROUBLE)

3. OUT 3 (BURGLARY/AUDIBLE PANIC)

4. OUT 6 (SUPERVISORY)

5. OUT 2 (FIRE)

6. OUT 5 (REMOTE KEYPAD SOUNDER)

7. OUT 1 (OPEN/CLOSE)

8. GROUND

9. IN 1 (N.O. LOOP)

RATINGS: OUT 1, 5, 7:

LOW: 2K TO GROUND

HIGH: 10 - 14VDC, 20mA MAX

OTHER OUTS: LOW: 1K TO GROUND

HIGH: 10 - 14VDC THRU 5K

Attach 5140DLM module to main PCB shield using

4 standoffs (supplied)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

REFER TO INSTRUCTIONS N8988 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

WARNING: OWNER'S INSTRUCTION NOTICE NOT TO BE REMOVED

BATTERY TABS

PINS 2, 3, 6, 8 & 9 NOT USED

RJ31X

MAIN

PHONE JACK

BELL OUTPUTS AUX. RELAY KEYPAD PORT #1

INPUT

OUTPUT

NOTE 2:

2k EOLR is Ademco model 610-7

CONNECTION OF THE FIRE ALARM

SIGNAL TO A FIRE ALARM HEAD-

QUARTERS OR A CENTRAL STATION

SHALL BE PERMITTED ONLY WITH

THE APPROVAL OF THE LOCAL

AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION.

THE BURGLARY ALARM SIGNAL

SHALL NOT BE CONNECTED TO A

POLICE EMERGENCY NUMBER.

POLLING

LOOP

WARNING:

TO PREVENT

RISK OF

ELECTRICAL

SHOCK,

DISCONNECT

TELCO JACK

BEFORE

SERVICING

THIS PANEL

Connect

RJ31X using

cable supplied.

Supervision is

programmable

TYPES OF FIRE SIGNALLING SERVICE:

Manual fire alarm, automatic fire alarm, sprinkler supervisory and waterflow alarm. UL Listed local control (non-coded).

UL Listed central station and remote station protected premises unit when used with 5140DLM back-up dialer module.

Installation limits under jurisdiction of local authority.

CIRCUIT

(ZONE) CONTROL UNIT

DELAY-SEC SMOKE DETECTOR

MODEL DELAY-SEC

THE DELAY TIME MARKED ON THE INSTALLED

DETECTOR(S) IS TO BE USED

Polling Loop

Ratings:

(supervised)

128mA max. See note 1.

See instructions for

compatible devices

and for max wire

run length

OUTPUT: 18VAC

72VA

BLACKWH

RJ31X

(connect using supplied cable)

Supervision is programmable

EARTH GROUND

• Ratings for zones 1,2:

- 10 - 14VDC

- 2mA max for smoke det. (up to 16 detectors

of the type specified in the instructions

can be used)

• UL compatibility ID: A

Do not mix fire and burg. sensors on one loop.

N.C. contacts for burg. usage only.

NOTES

TRNSFMR

ALL CIRCUITS ARE POWER LIMITED EXCEPT

THE OUTPUT OF THE 1451 TRANSFORMER

TEST BURGLARY SYSTEM WEEKLY

The VISTA-128 Main Dialer

Complies with FCC Rules, Part 68

FCC Reg. No.: AC398U-68192-AL-E

Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B

The 5140DLM Dialer

Complies with FCC Rules, Part 68

FCC Reg. No.: AC398U-68628-MO-N

Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B

WARNING:

THIS UNIT MAY BE PROGRAMMED TO

INCLUDE AN ALARM VERIFICATION

FEATURE THAT WILL RESULT IN A DELAY

OF THE SYSTEM ALARM SIGNAL FROM

THE INDICATED FIRE CIRCUITS. THE

TOTAL DELAY (CONTROL UNIT PLUS

SMOKE DETECTORS) SHALL NOT EXCEED

60 SECONDS. NO OTHER INITIATING

DEVICES SHALL BE CONNECTED TO

THESE CIRCUITS UNLESS APPROVED BY

THE LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING

JURISDICTION.

This equipment should be

installed in accordance

with the National Fire

Protection Association's

Standard 72 (National

Fire Protection Assoc.,

Batterymarch Park,

Quincy, MA. 02269). Printed

information describing proper

installation, operation,

testing, maintenance and

repair service is to be

provided with this equipment.

For commercial fire, bell timeout

must be a minimum of 6 minutes.

¬1Pl

N8988 5/98

165 Eileen Way, Syosset, New York 11791

V128FBII Vista 128fb V1 Installation Manual

Vista-128FB v1 Installation Manual Vista-128FB v1 Installation Manual AlarmHow.net Library

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation